Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia

John N . A . Hooper; Merrick  Ekins

This report was peer-reviewed and submitted to the National Oceans Office (now DEWHA) under contract 2004/020, in 2004. It was initially only printed in limited numbers and also distributed as PDF files. The present document is now a web publication.

Technical reports of the Queensland Museum ISSN 1837-6568 No. 002 Authors: John N.A. Hooper & Merrick Ekins Address: Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane, Queensland, 4101, Australia (JohnH@qm.qld.gov.au, MerrickE@qm.qld.gov.au) Report written for: National Oceans Ofice C2004/020 (2004) COLLATION AND VALIDATION OF MUSEUM COLLECTION DATABASES RELATED TO THE DISTRIBUTION OF MARINE SPONGES IN NORTHERN AUSTRALIA This document may be cited as: Hooper, J.N.A. & Ekins, M. 2004 (published online 2009). Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia. (ISBN 978-0-9805692-5-4) Technical Reports of the Queensland Museum 002: 1-224. www.qm.qld.gov.au (ISSN 1837-6568) Copyright for this document is with the Queensland Museum and the National Oceans Office (now incorporated within the Marine Division of the Department of Environment, Water, Hertiage and the Arts [DEWHA]). Technical reports of the Queensland Museum are published online, in read-only format. These reports may include reproductions (or revisions) of documents that were originally compiled to advise industry, government or academia on specific scientific issues, and they are reproduced here to ensure that the scientific and technical data they contain are not lost within the vast unpublished scientific ‘grey literature’. For further information please contact: Managing Editor, Memoirs of the Queensland Museum Queensland Museum, PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Qld Australia Phone 61 7 3840 7555. Fax 61 7 3846 1226. www.qm.qld.gov.au Email memoirs@qm.qld.gov.au CONTENTS SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1. General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2. Deinitions of Australia’s marine bioregions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2. MATERIALS & METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.1. Specimen point-data conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.2. Geographic coverage and scales of analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.3. Species distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4. Modelled distribution datasets and historical sponge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.5. Identiication of useful datasets and gaps in data, prioritised by geographic location and acceptable data standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.6. Species database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.7. Numerical analysis of sponge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.8. Dissemination of data via the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.9. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.10. Background to GIS analysis of the sponge dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.1. Deinitions of Australia’s marine bioregions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.2. Descriptive GIS analysis of bioregionalisation trends for sponge groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.3. Numerical analysis of Australian tropical sponge biodiversity and bioregionalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.3.1. Localities (γ-scale diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.3.2. Bioregions (ε-scale diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.4. Consensus of datasets delineating bioregional transition zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4. CONCLUSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 5. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6. REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 APPENDIX 1. List of sponge species chosen as surrogates for collaborative studies between Australian sponge collection and research institutions (QM, AIMS, MAGNT, WAM). Refer to Appendix 6 for PDF ile of CAAB modelled species distributions for each of these surrogate species. . . . . . . . . . 64 APPENDIX 2. A. Similarities between larger scale (ε-scale diversity) regions. B Small scale (γ-scale diversity) regions sampled for sponges in northern Australia (including temperate transitional bioregions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 APPENDIX 3. List of species occurring in four or more tropical Australian bioregions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 APPENDIX 4. Jaccard Similarity index (%) for pairwise comparisons between small scale (γ-scale diversity) localities sampled for sponges in northern Australia (including temperate transitional bioregions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 APPENDIX 5. Metadata for the sponge dataset to accompany NOO, GA and OZCAM databases . . . . . 87 APPENDIX 6. Descriptive analysis of GIS bioregionalisation trends for sponge groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Family Plakinidae Schulze, 1880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Family Tetillidae Sollas, 1886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Family Ancorinidae Schmidt, 1870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Family Geodiidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Family Clionaidae d’Orbigny, 1851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Family Alectonidae Rosell, 1996 & Family Hemiasterellidae Lendenfeld, 1889 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Family Polymastiidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Family Spirastrellidae Ridley & Dendy, 1886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Family Trachycladidae Hallmann, 1917 & Family Timeidae Topsent, 1928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Family Suberitidae Schmidt, 1870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Family Tethyidae Gray, 1848 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Family Chondrillidae Gray, 1872 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ‘Coralline sponges’: Family Acanthochaetetidae Fischer, 1970, Family Verticillitidae Steinmann, 1882, Family Astroscleridae Lister, 1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Family Agelasidae Verrill, 1907 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Family Acarnidae Dendy, 1922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Family Microcionidae Carter, 1875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Family Raspailiidae Hentschel, 1923 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Family Rhabderemiidae Topsent, 1928, Family Esperiopsidae Hentschel, 1923 & Family Isodictyidae Dendy, 1924 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Family Desmacellidae Ridley & Dendy, 1886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Family Podospongiidae de Laubenfels, 1936 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Family Mycalidae Lundbeck, 1905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Family Chondropsidae Carter, 1886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Family Coelosphaeridae Dendy, 1922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Family Tedaniidae Ridley & Dendy, 1886, Family Crambeidae Levi, 1963 & Family Dendoricellidae Hentschel, 1923 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Family Crellidae Dendy, 1922 & Family Phellodermidae Van Soest & Hajdu, 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Family Desmacididae Schmidt, 1870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Family Hymedesmiidae Topsent, 1928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Family Iotrochotidae Dendy, 1922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Family Myxillidae Dendy, 1922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Family Latrunculiidae Topsent, 1922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Family Axinellidae Carter, 1875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Family Desmoxyidae Hallmann, 1917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Family Dictyonellidae Van Soest, Diaz & Pomponi, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Family Halichondriidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Family Callyspongiidae de Laubenfels, 1936 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Family Chalinidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Family Niphatidae Van Soest, 1980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Family Petrosiidae Van Soest, 1980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Family Phloeodictyidae Carter, 1882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Family Dysideidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Family Irciniidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Family Spongiidae Gray, 1867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Family Thorectidae Bergquist, 1978 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Family Darwinellidae Merejkowsky, 1879 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Family Dictyodendrillidae Bergquist, 1980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Family Ianthellidae Hyatt, 1875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Family Aplysinellidae Bergquist, 1980. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Family Pseudoceratinidae Carter, 1885 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Family Aplysinidae Carter, 1875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Family Leucettidae de Laubenfels, 1936 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Family Levinellidae Borojevic & Boury-Esnault, 1986 & Family Sycettidae Dendy, 1892 . . . . . . . . . . . 187 APPENDIX 7. Modeled CAAB distributions and ‘mudmaps’ of surrogate species used for GIS and numerical analysis. Refer to Appendix 1 for list of taxonomic names that refer to each of these CAAB modelled distributions (ordered by species number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia COllATiON ANd vAlidATiON OF MUSEUM COllECTiON dATAbASES RElATEd TO ThE diSTRibUTiON OF MARiNE SPONgES iN NORThERN AUSTRAliA. PREFACE This report was peer-reviewed and submitted to the National Oceans Ofice (now DEWHA) under contract C2004/020, in 2004. It was initially only printed in limited numbers and also distributed as PDF iles. The present document is now a web publication. SUMMARY Australian museums and other marine collection agencies now hold extensive collections of sponges (Phylum Porifera) and associated digital data that have demonstrated utility towards recognising and defining areas of high biodiversity value (‘hotspots’). Amalgamation of the Queensland Museum sponge database (c.30,000 records) with recent collections (of a subset of 721 ‘surrogate’ species) from the tropical fauna by the Australian Institute of Marine Science, Museums and Art Galleries of the Northern Territory and Western Australian Museum has produced a significant database of c.3,800 ‘species’ (OTUs) from c.4,000 localities, representing 425 genera, 120 families, 26 orders and 3 classes of Porifera, with 2,248 species living in tropical waters and analysed in this study. This dataset is to be made available online through a nationally distributed database OZCAM (www.ozcam.gov.au). Point specimen data of the ‘surrogate’ species are accompanied by modelled geographic and depth distributions using the CSIRO CAAB system, together with digital descriptions of species to ensure compliance with taxonomic identifications across all agencies, with the intention that all 3,800 or so currently known (collected) species will eventually have similar digital information available on-line, irrespective of whether or not they have yet been formally described in the scientific literature (a painfully slow and exacting, but ultimately essential process). This amalgamated tropical sponge dataset was analysed descriptively using GIS, and numerically using statistical tools, to identify, test and define major changes (β-diversity) in species richness, species composition and community structure of marine sponges across the Australian tropics. It is anticipated that these data will eventually contribute to an integrative project for bioregionalisation of the tropical fauna based on numerous biotic and abiotic datasets. Descriptive GIS analysis of sponge specimen point data, amalgamated into logical taxonomic groups (speciesgroups, genera, families), produced spatial maps of taxonomic distributions across the tropics from central eastern to central western coasts. These maps enabled visual interpretation of species’ ranges and prevalence within the tropical fauna, and also provided descriptive data to help define localities and bioregions. Numerous lists of species (unique to particular IMCRA demersal bioregions) are provided as a contribution to characterising these bioregions using biotic data. Numerical data were analysed at two spatial scales. (1) Localities (γ-scale diversity, or within-region diversity). Specimen point data were amalgamated into 34 localities across tropical Australia, in a transect from Sydney on the east coast to the Houtman Abrolhos on the west coast, based on similarity analyses (cluster, MDS) analyses, and each of these localities was examined for taxonomic richness, diversity, similarity in species composition and community structure. Of 2248 species in 34 localities, only one species (Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina) was found in 22 localities and 19 in 13-19 localities (0.01% of species), with the remaining 2228 species found in 12 or less localities: 138 species (6%) occurred in 6-12 localities, 713 (32%) in 2-5 localities, and 1377 species (61%) were rare, found in only a single locality. Species rarefaction curve approached 1 QM Technical Reports | 002 but did not reach the asymptote, indicating incomplete sampling of some localities. Six peaks in species richness (biodiversity ‘hotspots’) were recorded across the tropical-subtropical transect: (1) SE Queensland – N New South Wales biogeographic transition zone (peak in the Moreton Bay region); (2) S GBR (peak at Capricorn-Bunker Group); (3) Central GBR (peak in the Townsville region mid-lagoon reefs); (4) N GBR (peak in the Lizard Island region); (5) W margin of the Northern Province (peak in the Darwin to Cobourg Peninsula regions); and (6) NW Shelf (peak in the Dampier to Port Hedland region). Several different types data analyses (species richness, composition, taxonomic distinctness) support the existence of these ‘biodiversity hotspots’ as biological phenomena rather than sampling artifacts. Nevertheless, data were deficient in some respects, with the number of unique species in each locality partially related to the total species richness, but not necessarily correlated with collection effort, although species accumulation curves were skewed by considerable heterogeneity in species richness and collection effort between localities, and by some localities having abnormally high richness but without significantly correspondingly high uniqueness or collection effort. Similarity analysis (cluster, MDS) showed a number of trends in β–diversity across the tropical Australian transect, some reflecting major (historical) biogeographic patterns and other possibly more ecological or presentday environmental influences. Three major sponge provinces were indicated, with smaller transitions occurring within these: (1) Temperate-subtropical east coast fauna with a south-north gradient extending from temperate to tropical influence and hard boundary in the vicinity of the Tweed River (historical boundary between Solanderian and Peronian Provinces). (2) Tropical east coast fauna, containing (2a) a southern component, with moderately hard boundary somewhere north of Hervey Bay-Fraser Island; (2b) a central component, with soft boundary somewhere between 2 Mackay and Townsville; (2c) a northern component, with one or more minor transitions in the Far Northern GBR leading to (2d) a major transition on the eastern edge (GBR side) of Cape York (historical boundary between Damperian and Solanderian Provinces); and (2e) the Coral Sea Territories on the Queensland Plateau with affinities to the western Pacific islands faunas but also containing many elements of the northcentral and southern GBR faunas. (3) Tropical northern and western fauna, with several transitions that are not completely resolved by our data: (3a) the Gulf of Carpentaria, differing from either Torres Strait and the Wessel Islands (probably an ecological rather than biogeographic pattern); (3b) a moderately hard boundary at the Wessel Islands, differing moderately from Cobourg Peninsula and Darwin faunas (and probably representing a major species turnover point rather than a ‘biodiversity hotspot’ from previous analyses); (3c) one or more probable transitions west of the Darwin region to the North West Cape region, but these are not well indicated from our data and appear to be less dramatic than on the east coast; and (3d) a significant boundary in the vicinity of Northwest Cape, with the Shark Bay and Houtman Abrolhos faunas markedly different from the northwestern coastal and shelf faunas, but at this time it is uncertain whether this is a gradual (soft) or abrupt (hard) transition given the relative paucity of sponge data from this region. Hypothesis testing showed that latitudinal gradients in ß-diversity were not strong, moving in a transect from temperate to tropical faunas, irrespective of whether faunas were on the east or west coasts, although high latitude temperate faunas differed markedly from low latitude tropical faunas. By comparison, longitudinal gradients in ß-diversity were markedly stronger, underlining the significant faunal changes across a tropical transect from east to west coasts. Species- and genus-level taxonomic distinctness analyses produced similar trends in community structure, whereas familylevel taxonomic analysis was far less Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia informative and is a poor surrogate for species-level biodiversity studies. Several localities were significantly undersampled and are recommended as priority areas for future studies: Southern Sahul Shelf, Joseph Bonaparte Gulf and Bonaparte Archipelago. (2) Bioregions (ε-scale diversity, or provincial diversity). Sites were amalgamated into nine larger-scale tropical/ subtropical provinces defined a priori by the IMCRA demersal bioregions (with the Northern Province (NP) subdivided into eastern (E.NP) and western (W.NP) components based on knowledge of changes in community structure of sponges across this province), to provide material to assist with the characterisation of the IMCRA bioregionalisation process. Provinces included in analyses extended from the Central Eastern Biotome (CEB) in northern New South Wales to the Central Western Province (CWP) in southwest Western Australia. Only one species (Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina) occurs in all nine bioregions, two in eight (Echinodictyum mesenterinum, Spheciospongia papillosa), 16 in seven, 18 in six, 35 in five, 63 in four, 188 in three, 403 in two, with most species (1516 or 68%) rare and found in only a single bioregion. In general, the three east coast bioregions contain substantially higher species richness and greater proportions of unique species than do the six northern and western bioregions, and species composition is also more similar between them than with north or west coast bioregions, with about 10% of species widely distributed throughout the tropical east coast, but only 1-4% of these also found on north and west coast bioregions. Cape York is a significant species turnover point, with only 3.5% similarity between the North Eastern Biotone (NEB) and E.NP. The two northern bioregions (E.NP, W.NP) were more similar in species composition to the four west coast bioregions (CWP, CWB, NWP, NWB) than to those on the east coast. Hypothesis tests showed that there were no significant changes in β-diversity that could be attributed solely (or predominantly) to latitudinal gradients, but there was a significant change across the longitudinal gradient that reflects the faunistic changes from east to west coasts. Two bioregions on the south west coast (CWP, CWB) differ to a greater or lesser extent from the tropical fauna community structure in general (at species-, genus- and familylevel taxonomic analyses), moreso than other bioregions, but these results are treated with caution as both these bioregions were undersampled, having relatively lower species richness and species diversity, than most others. Comparisons between smaller-scale localities and larger-scale (IMCRA demersal) bioregions produced patterns of species richness and community structure that were not fully congruent, suggesting that sponge data do not fully conform to the current IMCRA demersal bioregional model, although there is no proposal to emend the existing bioregional boundaries based on sponge data until (unless) similar patterns are discovered in analyses of other benthic marine phyla, with a diversity of recruitment and dispersal mechanisms (oviparous vs. viviparous, demersal vs. pelagic larvae, etc.). Both smaller- and larger-scale datasets also show that localities/ bioregions are relatively heterogeneous in terms of both species diversity and community structure, and are at best working hypotheses that incorporate some biogeographic, physical and other data into a model useful for planning and management. 1. iNTROdUCTiON 1.1 general introduction For many marine phyla we are still uncertain of the magnitude of their diversity (Kohn, 1997), let alone their dynamics and interdependencies, their interactions and responses to environmental factors, their historical and modern day biogeographic distributions, special areas of richness (biodiversity ‘hotspots’) and endemism, or even the appropriate spatial scales needed to study them in order to develop appro3 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 1. IMCRA Marine and Coastal Region-alisation for Australia – Demersal Provinces. Provincial codes used in the text are as follows: NP - Northern Province. NEB - North Eastern Biotone. NEP - North Eastern Province. CEB - Central Eastern Biotone. CEP - Central Eastern Province. SEB - South Eastern Biotone. BassP Bassian Province. TasP - Tasmanian Province. WBassB - Western Bassian Biotone. GulfP - Gulf Province. GABB - Great Australian Bight Biotone. SWP - South Western Province. SWB - South Western Biotone. CWP - Central Western Province. CWB - Central Western Biotone. NWPNorth Western Province. NWB - North Western Biotone. (Image kindly supplied by Geosciences Australia). FIG. 2. Australian marine biogeographic zones (from Wilson & Allen, 1987) 4 priate marine conservation and management strategies. For many years sponges (Phylum Porifera) have been firmly included in this category (Hooper & Wiedenmayer, 1994), possibly based on their perceived high morphological plasticity (i.e. difficulty in assigning individuals to a species taxon), their paucity of useful or informative morphometric characters and consequent unstable higher systematics, and the inadequate pool of expertise needed to resolve these shortcomings (see various chapters in Hooper & Van Soest, 2002). Consequently, sponges have been usually omitted from marine biodiversity analyses and biogeographic models even though they are frequently dominant components of many benthic communities, from ephemeral (quasiterrestrial) ones to the more stable marine abyssal zones. The renewed interest in the phylum and the accelerated discovery of species over the past few decades, largely driven by their huge potential as sources of therapeutic drugs (e.g., Munro et al. 1999), has had the consequence that there are now some large and significantly well sorted collections of marine sponges, and a number of competent research groups residing within museums and other marine research agencies in Australia and New Zealand. Prior to 1981 there had been no Australian-based sponge researchers since the early 1900s whereas there are now four ‘independent’ groups of taxonomic researchers working primarily on the tropical and subtropical Australian faunas. This substantially enlarged taxonomic capability and their associated collection efforts now enable us to productively analyse and interpret sponges as potential biodiversity models for Australian marine bioregionalisation. This current project is one of a series of projects that comprise Phase 2 of the Invertebrate Datasets project under the National Bioregionalisation program, National Oceans Office (DEWHA). This project is focused on collation, validation, analysis and description of information on sponges from Northern Australia, which were identified in Phase 1 as a priority group for National Bioregionalisation. Outputs from this project will feed into the Integration projects for Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Bioregionalisation which will define and describe bioregions for the Australian Marine Jurisdiction. The aims of this project are to: • Identify sources of useful sponge distribution datasets held by Australian research groups, develop an achievable data management strategy and appropriate software tools within resources allocated to the project to collate, store and maintain data, and validate data associated with the sponge collections held by the Queensland Museum (QM), including: conversion of the existing (DOSbased) relational database to a GIS capable platform; transforming global position coodinates into decimal degrees; checking for obvious errors in coordinates using GIS analysis of all data points; updating the higher taxonomy of the whole database in line with a recent revision of the phylum; verifying the identifications of some key taxa used in the proposed bioregionalisation analyses; digitising ‘mudmaps’ of key taxa to allow (verifiable) input of data points by other agencies (Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS), Northern Territory Museum (MAGNT) and Western Australian Museum (WAM) for key taxa ensuring that the data structure complies with Darwin Core standards; collate these amalgamated datasets into a single system; applying a confidence scaling system for all specimen point data for certain key fields; prioritize and select subsets of the whole database to focus on the tropical Australian faunas, with some special emphasis on the Northern Planning Area (Gulf of Carpentaria region), and within these subsets identify and select key taxa as potential representatives (‘surrogates’) of the entire fauna based on several criteria. • Produce geographic distribution maps from the sponge database records using logical groups of taxa (grouping by taxonomic similarity, such as species-group, genus and family units); produce modelled distributions of geographic and depth distributions for key (‘surrogate’) taxa using the CSIRO CAAB system (www.marine.csiro.au/ caab); and incorporate ABIF sponge data (pertaining to the published Australian sponge literature) into the distribution maps (www. environment.gov.au/biodiversity/ abrs/online-resources/abif/fauna/afd/ PORIFERA/) if possible within the time frame of the project. • Disseminate sponge point data via the web (www.ozcam.gov.au), together with associated ANZLIC Metadata, mudmaps and CAAB distributions, to form the basis of a national marine sponge dataset. • Review and outline existing knowledge of sponge distributions in the Australian marine territories, particularly the tropical faunas, and apply descriptive (GIS) and numerical analyses to the data in order to interpret sponge distributions in tropical Australia that will contribute to the Integration projects for Bioregionalisation. The outputs from this project are to provide: • Validated datasets for tropical Australian sponges containing (among other data) information on geographic distribution, depth distribution, reliability of information (OZCAM database). • Summarised geographic and depth distribution data for selected (‘surrogate’) sponge species in a useful format for national and regional bioregionalisation data layer integration projects (OZCAM database and this report). • Construction of a national capacity for data integration through a distributed national sponge database (OZCAM database) • Analysis of distributional data providing a better understanding of the distribution of sponges in the marine environment (this report). • Development of data and information on the seafloor, including expertise, to describe and inform decisions 5 QM Technical Reports | 002 ledge of sustainable management of oceans through expert advice on the ecological significance of sponges for bioregionalisation. FIG. 3. More recent interpretations of Australian marine biogeography (from Wilson & Allen, 1987) 1.2. definitions of marine bioregions FIG.4. Names for Australian coastal regions mentioned in the text. on bioregions (this report, OZCAM database, consortium of sponge taxonomists in Australia (QM, AIMS, MAGNT & WAM)). • Improved information on the structure and function of marine ecosystems, leading to the development of more effective plans for marine protection and sustainable development (use of the sponge datasets in an integrated GIS Bioregionalisation analysis by Geosciences Australia (GA) in the construction of a Fundamental Marine Dataset); and • Improved access to data on the nature of marine ecosystems by enhanced population of the marine invertebrates database which is a Fundamental Marine Dataset (OZCAM and GA databases). These outputs will contribute towards informed decision making relating to the management of bioregions for Australia’s Marine Jurisdiction through the provision of expert advice on the distribution of sponges, and also increase our know6 Australia’s Australia’s marine demersal bioregions are defined by the Interim Marine and Coastal Regionalisation of Australia (IMCRA) version 3.3, the current national bioregional planning framework endorsed by ANZECC in 1998 (Fig. 1). These bioregions incorporate some of the concepts of, but should not be confused with, Australia’s marine biogeographic provinces as they were first defined (Fig. 2), with only two tropical biogeographic provinces, or the now more widely accepted model where transition or overlap zones are considered to be as pivotal as the ‘core’ biogeographic provinces themselves (Fig. 3). The analyses conducted in this present project concern bioregionalisation moreso than biogeography. For sponges several attempts have been made at marine biogeographic reconstruction, with varying degrees of success, whereas this is the first attempt to undertake bioregional analysis. Place names mentioned in the text are depicted in Fig. 4. 2. MATERiAlS & METhOdS 2.1. Specimen conversion. point-data The Queensland Museum and Northern Territory Museum sponge datasets were converted from ‘R:Base’ relational database format (1991–present) and ‘Notebook’ flat database format (1982-1991) to Biolink, a GIS compatible relational specimen database developed by CSIRO. This was achieved by transferring the data via ASCII delimited text files into Excel where the data was rectified into distinct fields and formats (see below). For instance latitude and longitude coordinates were transformed from degrees, minutes and seconds or degrees and decimal Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Genus (taxon genera) Species (taxon species) Family (taxon family) Order (taxon order) Suborder (taxon suborder) Class (taxon class) Phylum (taxon phylum) Species Authority (species author) Taxon Year (year of species description) Species Number (morphospecies unique identiier number for the those species not yet named)^^ Taxonomic remarks Taxa date (date of taxonomic proof) Taxa Proof (taxonomy proofed by) Record Number (number of all individual records in database) Registration number (material registration number)^^ Original taxonomic name (previous taxon assigned to, to track name changes) QM Identiied by (who identiied the material) Identiication Accuracy (conidence levels taxonomy) ^ Identiied on (when the material was identiied) Site name (where the material was collected from) Macrohabitat (habitat description) Microhabitat (microhabitat description) Collection method (how the material was collected) Elevation depth (average depth at which the material was collected) Elevation lower (Maximum depth of collection) Elevation upper (Minimum depth of collection) Elevation source (Instrument for measuring depth) Elevation error (Depth error) ^ Cross reference (site cross reference, such as with other expedition or organisational codes for quick cross-referencing) * Station (site station reference) * Collector(s) (who collected the material) * Start date (date of start of collection) End date (date of end of collection) Casual date (approximate date of collection) Types (name of type ie holotype, paratype etc.) Institution (Holding Institution of material) Storage method (how the specimens are stored, wet, dry, slides etc) Registration remarks RegDate (creation date of original record) Reference number (linking code; author, title, journal linking code, year of publication, page, remarks) Curation status (status of material in collection) Field number (site location number) Locality (locality description) Country (country) State (state) Latitude (latitude as decimal degrees) Longitude (longitude as decimal degree) Position source (how the location was determined) Position error (location conidence level) ^ Remarks (remarks on colour, morphology, etc) Table1. List of data ields included in the QM sponge specimen database (^ refers to conidence limits on the data, as per Table 2. ^^ signiies critical ields linking this specimen database with species database as per Table 3) 7 QM Technical Reports | 002 minutes into decimal degrees. The Queensland Museum sponge datasets comprised 30,728 records pertaining to about 3,769 species, and was combined with the pre–1991 Northern Territory Museum database with an additional 4083 records, and the NCI collections within the Australian Institute of Marine Science database adding a further 4061 records. The Excel spreadsheet was then imported into the relational database Biolink. The database was also transferred to Microsoft Access for other data transfer capabilities. Subsequently this database was transferred to the QM’s new Vernon Collection Management System, and is intended to have this available online with GIS capability. Specimen point database included the following fields, based on the Darwin Core data standards (Table 1), although not all records had information for all of these fields given that they were derived from different institutional databases. Fields specific to the previous Queensland Museum’s R:Base database are labelled in the list below with ‘QM’. Fields only included in Northern Territory Museum database are marked with ‘NT’ (those marked ‘*’ will be suppressed on the basis of confidentiality with commercial agreements or institution policies; those marked ‘^’ have confidence interval codes as outlined in Table 2). After importation and conversion of specimen data, validity and accuracy checking was carried out and a confidence scaling system for all specimen point data (i.e. method and accuracy of locality data, and taxonomic accuracy) was also incorporated into the database (Table 2). 2.2. geographic coverage and scales of analysis. All sponge data points that fell within the Australian continental marine territory jurisdication were included in analyses (i.e. Antarctic and subantarctic data were not included), but with a major focus on tropical sponges. In the QM, AIMS and WAM collection databases 8 there are many temperate species data points (e.g. Australian Antarctic Division’s survey collections of Antarctica, and Aquenal Pty. Ltd.’s Tasmanian and Bass Strait sponge surveys, both now in QM collections; south west Australian coastal surveys in the WAM), and extra-limital species data points (e.g. surveys of western Pacific islands and Indo-Malay archipelago by the QM). Some of these data were also included in analyses for comparative purposes in order to: (1) analyse the extent of tropical species distributions, (2) determine the uniqueness or otherwise of particular species within tropical Australian bioregions, and (3) further refine bioregional boundaries at tropical-temperate zone margins. Within the tropical data sets special attention was given to the Northern Planning Area (NPA), which includes the area bounded by Cape York in the east (10°14’S, 142°32’E) and approximately Maningrida in the west (12°03’S, 134°13’E) (see Fig. 4 in Results section), i.e. the eastern portion of the NP bioregion. This area was of special significance given (1) that it was a National Oceans Office priority during the initial stages of this project, and (2) it represents a unique bioregional and biogeographical transitional zone due to the land barrier in place during several glacial low sea levels (150-200m below present), the most recent during the Pleistocene (~18,000 years ago), and subsequent remixing of eastern and western faunas during sea level rises (Larcombe et al., 1995). Species turnover at this (and other) boundaries are of particular biological interest (e.g. capacity for hybridization, recolonization and dispersal potential etc.) and management interest (particularly for Introduced Marine Pests assessments – knowing what is native and has evolved in the region and what has migrated or been introduced over human history). In this context the term ‘species turnover’ is equivalent to β-diversity (Gray, 2001), referring to the spatial turnover of species along an environmental gradient, such as from site to site, or the Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Confidence scale for Confidence scale for geographic / depth ranges taxonomic identification 0 Not yet entered 0 Not yet entered 1 Excellent (GPS to 2 or 3 decimals and depth from dive computer) 1 Highly reliable identiication (e.g. includes published material, including types) 2 Good (GPS to 1 decimal and depth from dive computer or sounder) 2 Identiication made with high degree of conidence at all levels (e.g. IDs made by international authority but remain unpublished) 3 Satisfactory (locality determined from map, depth from dive computer or sounder) 3 Identiication made with high conidence to genus, less so to species (e.g. IDs made by research assistants of an international authority under supervision; or taxonomic placement still nebulous due to unstable nature of classiication) 4 Poor (locality and depth determined from anecdotal evidence from collector or gazetteer) 4 Identiication made with limited conidence (e.g. IDs made by a trained 3rd party but so far without corroboration by an international authority or comparison of material to a reliable collection) 5 Doubtful (anecdotal evidence questionable, or antiquated record from Museum register) 5 Identiication supericial (e.g. IDs made by a 3rd party with limited sponge taxonomic skills) number of species whose ranges end between adjacent sampling regions (e.g. O’Hara & Poore, 2004), with sampling regions vaying in size depending on the spatial scale of the particular analysis. Terminology used to define these spatial scales (after Gray, 2001) are: pointdiversity (a single sample within a habitat, represented by individual data-base records), α-scale diversity (within-habitat diversity, or a number of samples within a habitat, where species are presumed to interact and compete for similar limiting resources), γ-scale diversity (within-region or landscape/ seascape diversity, where evolutionary processes becomes increasingly important, termed here localities), ε-scale diversity (regional or biogeographic provincial diversity, or the total species richness of a group of large areas, termed here bioregions). 2.3. Species distributions. Distribution maps for any or all species in any combination of taxonomic hierarchy were produced from the ‘Distribution Map’ function in CSIRO’s Biolink software. This produced a GIS shapefile, with maps of Australia and/or the world, with separate layers showing the distribution points of the specimens. Geographic distribution data for all the 721 surrogate sponges were analysed for accuracy, compared to modelled distribution’s and used for identifying gaps in data, biodiversity, Table 2. Conidence limits scaling for the QM sponge specimen point data bioregionalisation and biogeographic modelling studies. Unfortunately due to technical incompatability it was not possible to incorporate the Geosciences Australia bathymetric shape file into the Biolink GIS mapping function, and consequently this overlay was not possible to achieve during the life of the project. 2.4. Modelled distribution datasets and historical sponge data. The surrogate species used in this study were modelled using CSIRO Marine Research CAAB modelling system (www.marine.csiro.au/caab) to produce modelled distribution datasets for all the priority surrogate taxa for potential use by the National Oceans Office for Northern Australian Bioregionalisation. These models used the species point-data records and locked them to a datum point (0-281) on specific depth contours. These datasets and modelled distributions were compatible with the fish bioregionalisation project. Modelled datasets include only sample pointdata (from these databases). It is not currently possible to include historical data from the Australian Faunal Directory (AFD) sponge catalogue (Hooper & Wiedenmayer, 1994, 1999) because these data do not presently include geographic coordinates (latitude, longitude, depth ranges, broader species distributions) for all named 9 QM Technical Reports | 002 Australian sponge taxa. This latter task requires intensive gazetteer searching for type locality (and other published locality) place names for each taxon, and manual data entry of geographic coordinates to allow incorporation into GIS modelled data. The Australian Biological Resources Study awarded a contract to the senior author (2004-2005) to update the sponge AFD database in line with recent revisions of the Phylum Porifera (Hooper & Van Soest, 2002) and Australian sponge records published since 1999, and including type locality GIS data. 2.5. Identiication of useful datasets and gaps in data, prioritised by geographic location and acceptable data standards. Of the currently 3,769 species contained with the QM database (as of 2005), a proportion (721 or 19%) were chosen as environmental surrogates based on (a) their occurrence in the tropics in general and vicinity of the Northern Planning Area in particular, (b) completeness/ taxonomic validity of records, (c) their intrinsic value as environmental surrogates, such as habitat- or depth-specific taxa, highly endemic taxa, etc. These species are listed in Appendix 1. Specimen point data of these priority surrogate species was linked to descriptive species database (see below) that enables the non-specialist to identify these species, thus allowing other agencies to input additional (verified) data on the geographical and temporal occurrence of these species into the ‘master database’. These descriptive data also allow the inclusion of unnamed species into databases. The agencies contracted to supply data were: • Western Australian Museum (Dr Jane Fromont) • Northern Territory Museum (Dr Belinda Alvarez de Glasby; datasets post 1991) • Australian Institute of Marine Science (Dr Chris Battershill, datasets post 1991) 10 2.6. Species database. The entire species description database was digitised from mainly handwritten species identification sheets (‘mudmaps’) for all the key taxa and some other unique taxa pivotal to this project, forming the basis for a subsequent larger project whereby all sponge researchers, in all Australian museums and other biodiversity agencies, will have a better capacity to identify sponges on-line through comparison of their material with descriptions and illustrations provided in this database. The ‘mudmap’ database will also allow accredited researchers to add species records and descriptions directly (under password control), thus expanding the species coverage across the entire Australian tropics. This is an integral step in the database conversion and taxonomic validation of specimen point-data databases. A list of database fields descriptions is provided below (Table 3). In addition to the digital description of the individual species, digititization of the underwater photos, deck photos, microscope section and spicule photos, drawings and scanning electron microscope pictures were carried out for the 721 surrogate species. 2.7. Numerical analysis of sponge data. Clustering, ordination and biodiversity statistical analyses were applied to presence-absence data and similarity matrix data to test hypotheses concerning area relationships and connectivity between bioregions. Software packages Primer 5.0 (Plymouth Routines In Multivariate Ecological Research; Primer-E Ltd, Plymouth Marine Laboratory, 2001), Systat 9.0 (SPSS Inc., Chicago, 1999) and EstimateS (Version 7, R. K. Colwell, http://purl.oclc.org/estimates; Colwell, 2004) were used to perform analyses. Data were analysed at two spatial scales: γ-scale (smaller-scale localities) and ε-scale diversity (largerscale bioregions). Collection sites Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia (dives, trawl stations etc.) were grouped into 34 smaller-scale localities based on similarities analyses (cluster, MDS) expanded from earlier analysis (Hooper et al., 2002). Conclusions concerning patterns of tropical sponge biodiversity, and development of a tropical sponge biodiversity model, were based on analyses of richness, diversity, similarity and community structure at this spatial scale, as described below. Similarly, collection sites were amalgamated into 9 larger-scale bioregions based on a priori boundaries determined by the IMCRA demersal bioregion model, to compare trends with smaller-scale analyses, but more importantly, to contribute data to characterising these existing IMCRA bioregions. Pairwise comparisons in similarity between faunas were calculated using the Jaccard coefficient or similarity index (a/(a+b+c), where b and c are the total number of species occurring in each region and a is the number of species shared by both regions; e.g. Clifford & Stephenson, 1975). This index was used in preference to the many other similarity indices for reasons explained in Hooper & Kennedy (2002). Similarity analysis (hierarchical clustering using unweighted group average linkage) and ordination analysis (2-D MDS) were performed on the Jaccard similarity matrix to investigate faunistic relationships amongst the different sponge communities. Sample-based rarefaction (species accumulation curve) was computed using EstimateS, yielding an expected richness function (Mao Tau) with 95% confidence intervals. Rarefaction curves estimate sample species richness (i.e. species occurring in each of the localities sampled) from the pooled total species richness (i.e. species from all localities), based on all species actually discovered. They provide an estimate of sampling completeness based on saturation (an asymptote) of the species accumulation curve. Species richness was also computed using functional extrapolation, based on the Michaelis-Menten (MM) function in the EstimateS package that estimates the asymptotic curvilinear function that might fit the species accumulation curve (Colwell & Coddington, 1994). MM computes estimates for values for each pooling level, for each randomization run, averaged over all randomization runs. MM has the ability to detect the contribution of abnormally high species-rich localities that may produce enormous estimates of richness skewing the accumulation curve away from an asymptote, and thus a defacto indicator of spatial heterogeneity in species richness. Smaller scale localities and larger scale bioregions were grouped into Taxonomic data (linked with QM specimen database, automatically generated taxonomic hierarchy) Species Number (critical link between this species database and QM specimen database for informatoin on taxonomic hierarchy; see Table 1) Growth Form (description of sponge habitat in-situ) Colour (colour of sponge in water and ethanol storage) Oscules (description of presence, size and number of oscular structures) Texture (description of sponge textural characteristics) Surface Ornamentation (description of viable outer layer surface characteristics) Ectosomal Skeleton (description of microscopic ectosomal (outer cortex layer) skeletal structure) Choanosomal Skeleton (description of choanosomal skeletal structure) Megascleres (description of presence, location, structure and geometric forms of megascleres) Microscleres (description of presence, location, structure and geometric forms of microscleres) Specimen registration numbers (list of registration numbers and localities, including their global position coordinates, generated automatically by links to QM specimen database) Table 3. Data ields included in the QM species database 11 QM Technical Reports | 002 latitudinal and longitudinal classes and tested using non-parametric twoway nested analyses of similarity (ANOSIM), roughly analogous to standard two-way ANOVA, providing a statistical test of the null hypothesis – that there are no assemblage differences between groups of samples (localities or bioregions) – and as they are permutation/ randomization tests they make a minimum of assumptions and focus on the ranks of the biotic similarity matrices that contain the primary information on assemblage relationships between samples (Clarke and Warwick, 2001). According to these authors the pairwise Global R value is the pivotal statistic as it gives an absolute measure of how separated the groups are, on a scale of 0 (indistinguishable) to 1 (all similarities within groups are less than any similarities between groups). These tests also identify which of the factors (groups of localities or bioregions) are significantly different from others. Summary statistics for diversity and phylogenetic distinctness used to compare each of the bioregions are: Margalef species richness d = (S-1)/Log(N) where S is the total number of species in each site and N is the total number of individuals; Shannon-Wiener diversity index H’(log e), H’=3k(Pi*Log(Pi)) where k is the number of categories and Pi is the proportion of the observations found in category i; Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD); Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD) (see explanation below); Phylogenetic diversity (a measure of taxonomic distinctiveness, which is the total path length constituting the full taxonomic tree), include Average Phylogenetic diversity (Phi+ or φ+) averaged over number of species in sample, and Total Phylogenetic diversity (sφ+). Taxonomic Distinctness Analysis (Clarke & Warwick, 2001) was conducted on presence/ absence data for species in each locality and bioregion. Taxonomic distinctness, an average measure of the relatedness between any two species in a community 12 sample (Izsak & Price, 2001), was measured using two indices: Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD) and Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD) (Clarke & Gorley, 2001). These indices incorporate taxonomic or phylogenetic information by computing a path length, or relative taxonomic distance, between any two species. They are independent of sampling effort and therefore less susceptible to possible biases from sampling than are species richness indices, including the Jaccard index of similarity (Clarke & Warwick, 1998; Warwick & Clarke, 1998; Clarke & Gorley, 2001; Izsak & Price, 2001), and provide effective comparisons of biodiversity between localities/ bioregions at various spatial scales, and various taxonomic hierarchies. These indices reflect both the richness in higher taxa and the evenness component of diversity, but are ultimately a function of pure taxonomic relatedness of individuals (Warwick & Clarke, 2001). AvTD (∆+ or Delta+) is the average taxonomic path length (in a Linnean or a phylogenetic classification) between any two randomly chosen species. The index is most effective for comparing sets of data where there are a restricted number of higher taxa for a given number of species, but is less effective when there is an uneven distribution of species taxa amongst higher taxa, where some taxa are over-represented and others under-represented in comparison to the species pool for the geographic region (e.g. effects of habitat heterogeneity). VarTD (Λ+ or Lambda+) therefore measures the evenness of the distribution of taxa across the hierarchical taxonomic tree, and is also independent of sample size. The two indices used together are considered to be a statistically robust summary of taxonomic relatedness patterns across an assemblage and appropriate to historical data and simple species lists (Warwick & Clarke, 2001). The null hypothesis tested is that a species list from a particular locality or bioregion, which may be incomplete, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia nonetheless has the same taxonomic distinctness structure as the master list from which it is drawn (i.e. for all species from all sites in that geographic region) (Clarke & Gorley, 2001). Using a series of randomisation tests that sample the whole dataset from the geographic region, repeated for a range of random sample subsets (M=20-100), a 95% confidence range of possible (‘expected’) values of both AvTD and VarTD was calculated. ‘M’ is essentially a measure of the degree to which two samples are taxonomically related to each other, termed an ‘optimum taxonomic mapping statistic’ (Warwick & Clarke, 2001). These probability envelopes (ellipse functions) were plotted over the real dataset for each set of taxa (bioregions), the real data compared to the predicted probability intervals, with samples below or above these intervals representing biodiversity measures below or above expectation, respectively. These data were compared at species, genus and family taxon levels. 2.8. dissemination of data via the web. Although ODBC compatible, ‘Biolink’ is not capable of displaying data, or being interrogated directly from the web (unless of course users have copies of this software on their local computers). Consequently, specimen point data was exported to other programs that can be browsed/interrogated directly from the web. The specimen point data is currently stored in multiple formats including Biolink, SQL, Microsoft Access, XML, RTF and delimited file formats. The specimen point data is currently being exported to OZCAM (www.ozcam.gov.au) as soon as some technical issues have been sorted out. The Queensland Museum is currently in the process of changing over the servers for hosting the OZCAM sponge data using Vernon CMS. 2.9. Abbreviations. The following abbreviations are used in the text (see also Figure 1 legend): AbiF, Australian Biodiversity Information Facility (www.environment. g o v. a u / b i o d i v e r s i t y / a b r s / o n l i n e resources/abif/fauna/afd/PORIFERA/); AFd, Australian Faunal Directory available online from ABIF; AiMS, Australian Institute of Marine Science (Townsville); AMS, Australian Museum (Sydney); biolink, Proprietry database developed by CSIRO Entomology (Canberra), available free on-line at www.ento.csiro. au/biolink; CAAb, Codes for Australian Aquatic Biota (www.marine.csiro.au/ caab/); gA, Geosciences Australia; gbiF, Global Biodiversity Information Facility (www.gbif.net/portal/index.jsp); gbR, Great Barrier Reef; MAgNT, Museums and Art Galleries of the Northern Territory (Northern Territory Museum, Darwin); NCi, United States National Cancer Institute (Frederick, Maryland); NMv, Museum Victoria (Melbourne); NPA, Northern Planning Area (Gulf of Carpentaria region, Cape York to west of the Wessel Islands, NT); NSW, New South Wales; NT, Northern Territory; NWS, North West Shelf, WA; OTU, operational taxonomic unit, or ‘morphospecies’; QM, Queensland Museum (Brisbane and Townsville); SAM, South Australian Museum (Adelaide); Tas, Tasmania; vic, Victoria; WA, Western Australia; WAM, Western Australian Museum (Perth). 2.10. background to giS analysis of the sponge dataset The QM Biolink database (incorporating QM collections (1990present), NTM collections (1982-1991) and AIMS NCI collections (19851990)) contains 30,728 datapoints all underpinned by verifiable objects. These combined datasets consist of over 5,000 OTUs (although only 3,769 species have associated ‘mudmaps’ and can be used in a reliable way), from ~4,000 localities (Fig. 5), the majority of which occur throughout Australian continental and tropical territorial waters (including some freshwater sponge records) (Fig. 6). This QM database was supplemented by several hundreds of other specimen data points of 13 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 5. Distribution of marine sponge collection sites (QM Biolink database). selected surrogate species (see criteria for selection in Methods section), supplied by AIMS, WAM and MAGNT during the course of this project (the combined dataset will appear online at OZCAM: www.ozcam.gov.au). It is anticipated that eventually all sponge data points from these institutions’ institutions to identify sponges using a universal species-level classification (e.g. the ‘mudmap’ method and OTU numbering system), given that most Australian sponges currently lack species names and probably will do so for a very long time to come; and (2) the ability of respective curatorial/ scientific databases will be incorporated into the OZCAM database and form the basis of a national sponge database, but this ultimately depends on (1) adequate expertise and resources being made available within each of these staff within each of these institutions to enter all their species-level data points using a minimally acceptable standard (based on the Darwin Core standards, and defined in the Materials & Methods section). FIG. 6. Distribution of marine and freshwater sponge collection sites for Australian waters (QM Biolink database). 14 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 7. Distribution of marine (and freshwater) sponge collection sites in the Northern Planning Area (red square) (QM Biolink database). (Maningrida, 12°04’S, 134°16’E, shown by red dot) Sponge collections are relatively comprehensive for some of the transitional zones of special interest to this project: (1) The Cape York to Wessel Islands region (Fig. 7), lying in the eastern portion of the NP bioregion (referred to as the Northern Planning Area or NPA), which despite its remote and difficult access has very good specimen coverage (e.g. numerous CSIRO Marine Research survey data of the Gulf of Carpentaria, QM & CSIRO benthic trawl surveys of Torres Strait, AIMS NCI and MAGNT diving surveys of the Wessel Islands). (2) The Sahul Shelf and northwest island territories (Ashmore and Hibernia Reefs, Cartier Island; Fig. 8), lying at the edge of the Timor Trough and thus containing an essentially Indonesian marine biota, lying in the NWP-NWB offshore boundary. (3) The Coral Sea island and reef territories lying off the GBR (Fig. 9), containing mixtures of GBR FIG. 8. Distribution of marine sponge collection sites (black dots) on the northwest coast and shelf, with Sahul Shelf indicated (red square) (QM Biolink database). (Ashmore Reef , 12°15.5’S, 123°04.5’E, shown by red dot) 15 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 9. Distribution of marine sponge collection sites (black dots) on the Coral Sea territories (QM Biolink database). (Osprey Reef , 13°55’S, 146°38’E, shown by red dot) and western Pacific island faunas. (4) The eastern subtropical-temperate boundary at the Tweed River (NSWQueensland border), an overlap of northern Solanderian and southern FIG. 10. Distribution of marine sponge collection sites (black dots) on the Tweed River region (QM Biolink database). (Tweed River bar, 28°11’S, 153°34’E, shown by red dot)) 16 Peronian provinces (Fig. 10), which incompasses the southern portion of the CEB bioregion. All these data points are underpinned by verifiable objects, making the sponge database Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia an invaluable objective scientific tool. Conversely, several important marine biogeographic regions are not yet well sampled for sponges (or at least if collections exist they have not yet had rigorous taxonomic investigation applied to them). These include: (1) The NP-NWB boundary lying west of the Darwin region, for which few surveys have yet been undertaken. (2) The boundary between the far north coastal regions in proximity to the Kimberley Coast, and the North West Shelf of Western Australia, encompassed within the NWB and NWP overlap zone. (3) The sponge fauna south of North West Cape, including Ningaloo Reef, on the central west coast, which is the important tropical-temperate overlap zone and narrowly defined as the CWB bioregion. Some collections of these west coast regions do exist (WAM collections) but have not yet been substantially worked up. The combined sponge database records of 3,769 OTUs (henceforth refered to as ‘species’) are distributed amongst 425 genera, 120 families, 26 orders and 3 classes of Porifera, all documented and described using the comprehensive ‘mudmap’ method (an example is provided in Figs 11-12), and which form the pool of species available for analysis. Only two of the three sponge classes are included in present analyses, with the deepsea Hexactinellida, or glass sponges, not yet substantially identified nor collected from within the continental juridiction. Similarly, another ~1,000 species were excluded from analyses because they are currently of unknown or uncertain identity (although largely sorted to genus) given that they were not identified using the ‘mudmap’ process and cannot yet be reconciled with these better-defined OTUs. These mostly concern the AIMS NCI collections (1985-1990) donated to the QM but not yet reconciled with the other collections in terms of their identity (a potentially huge task). This is a major challenge facing all Australian sponge collections, especially those in southern Museums (AMS, NMV, SAM) for which many have been sorted to genus but few to a unique OTU level. More recent AIMS data (post-1991 NCI contract) are included only for those surrogate species mentioned above. 3. RESUlTS ANd diSCUSSiON 3.1. introduction to existing knowledge of Australian sponge biodiversity and bioregionalisation. As this is a first attempt to use sponge data for the purposes of bioregionalisation, it is appropriate to firstly summarise existing knowledge on the biodiversity of Australian sponges, as a context for subsequent analysis of the sponge dataset. Worldwide there are currently about 8,000 described (‘valid’) species of sponges, whereas collections held by various museums (www. marinespecies.org/porifera), and the detection of cryptic sibling species by molecular studies, suggest that this diversity might be twice as large (e.g. Hooper & Lévi, 1994), representing a considerable body of taxonomic work still awaiting to be done. Several regional faunas are comparatively well known, including the Mediterranean, Caribbean and Australian faunas (e.g. Van Soest, 1994) (Fig. 13). Knowledge of the Australian regional sponge fauna commenced with the pivotal works of Lamarck in the early 1800s and continues in a greatly escalated way up to the present day. The described fauna consists of approximately 1,500 ‘valid’ species in 313 genera and 83 families (Hooper & Wiedenmayer, 1994; ABIF-Fauna, 2004), although c.4,000 species have already been collected and documented (‘sorted’ to an operational taxonomic unit; OTU) indicating that significant taxonomic effort remains. The temperate faunas are best known (from the early 1800s), and about 800 species have been described from tropics (from the 1860s). Thus, an estimate of 5,000 species 17 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 11. Distribution of Echinodictyum mesenterinum in Australia (QM Biolink database) (red dots are species records, green crosses represent sampling sites) proposed for the entire regional Australian sponge fauna (Hooper & Lévi, 1994), might be conservative and a gross underestimate in so far as it largely ignores the potentially very many FIG. 12. Example of a digitized ‘mudmap’ of Echinodictyum mesenterinm (Lamarck) accompanying distribution map and modelled distribution. 18 cryptic and sciaphilic species that await discovery. Over the last two decades knowledge of this sponge fauna has received substantial attention owing to their potential as commercial sources Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia of novel therapeutic compounds (e.g. Munro et al., 1999; Faulkner, 2002), but the majority of species are still unnamed and there remain significant challenges to reconcile living populations with (often ancient) published taxonomic descriptions. Nevertheless, Australian sponge distributional data have been used with some success as an analytical tool for bioregional marine conservation planning and management (e.g. Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority Representative Areas Program; http:// www.reefed.edu.au/rap/), and several biodiversity analyses, based on species presence/absence data, have revealed some interesting spatial trends that are not universally reflected in distributions of other marine phyla in the Indo-west Pacific. Only a brief summary of these major trends is provided here. For more details refer to the bibliography. At the smaller (intra-regional) spatial scales sponges frequently form spatially heterogeneous, relatively highly ‘apparently endemic’ communities (e.g. Hooper & Kennedy, 2002), sometimes with as little as 15% similarity in species composition between geographically adjacent reef sites (Hooper, 1994) (Figs 14-15). The potential connectivity between adjacent communities is hampered by their reportedly very limited sexual reproductive dispersal capabilities and alleged preponderance of clonal dispersal and recruitment (Battershill & Bergquist, 1990; Zea, 1993; but see Davis et al., 1996; Zea, 2002). From studies on cross-shelf distributions certain environmental variables have been linked to community heterogeneity, most notably light, depth, substrate quality and nature (e.g. coralline vs. non-coralline, hard vs. soft substrata), local reef geomorphology (presence or absence of specialised niches), water quality and flow regimes, food particle size availability, larval recruitment and survival (Wilkinson & Cheshire, 1989; Hooper, 1994; Roberts & Davis, 1996). At larger (‘landscape’) spatial scales there do not appear to be any trends in latitudinal gradients of species richness along the tropical to warm temperate coastal and shelf faunas (Hooper et al., 1999, 2002), with the exception FIG. 13. Analysis of worldwide trends in sponge species richness, with highest diversity in 3 regions (in red), some due to historical legacies, such as early European exploration, some with a real biological basis, such as the IndoMalay archipelago biodiversity ‘hotspot’ (modiied from Van Soest, 1984) 19 QM Technical Reports | 002 of the Great Barrier Reef which has a not-surprisingly higher overall coastal species richness than areas to the north and south (Fig. 16). Nevertheless, there are significant taxonomic differences (species diversity) between the major Australian marine bioregions on the NE, NW, SE and S coasts and shelf faunas, the Coral Sea and subantarctic territories (e.g. Hooper & Lévi, 1994; Hooper & Wiedenmayer, 1994; Roberts & Davis, 1996; Fromont, 1999; Hooper et al., 2002). Those differences indicate large scale community patterns that might be linked to factors such as historic and modern day current patterns (connectivity, sea level changes), presence or absence of major carbonate platforms, historical biogeography, etc. It has been suggested that between 5% (New Caledonia fauna, Hooper & Lévi, 1994) and 15% of species in regional faunas (Sahul Shelf fauna, Hooper, 1994) may have extensive geographic distributions, ranging from the Red Sea to the central western Pacific islands. The FIG. 14. Species richness and similarities in species composition of sponges living on adjacent reef systems on the Sahul Shelf, north Western Australia, analysed from a pool of 132 species (modiied from Hooper, 1994). (Diagramatic only. Reef size and relative proximity not to scale). 20 remainder probably has more specific or restricted habitat requirements than generally acknowledged, possibly reflecting the mix of ecological specialists vs. generalists in these communities. However, already some of these so-called widely distributed or cosmopolitan species (e.g. Astrosclera willeyana, Wörheide et al., 2002a; Chondrilla spp. Usher et al., 2004) have been shown to consist of several cryptic sibling species that show high genetic diversity that is not clearly manifested at the morphological level across their wide geographic range, making their ‘practical’ species determination difficult. Based on analysis of 2329 species of sponges from 1343 localities, differentiated into 37 regional faunas based on gradients of species richness and taxonomic affinities, five discontiguous ‘hotspots’ of biodiversity were detected (>250 spp/ region) within northern Australia (encompassing tropical to warm temperate waters on coastal and continental shelf waters) Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia (Hooper et al., 2002) (Fig. 17), with these gradients varying across all marine faunas and generally deviating from biodiversity models derived from analyses of other marine taxa. These ‘hotspots’ included two within the NPA bioregion: Darwin region and the Wessels/ Gove/ Groote Eylandt region, two within the GBR corresponding to the northern NEB and southern NEP, and one one the mid north west coast of Western Australia, corresponding to the southern part of the NWP bioregion (indicated as red circles in Fig. 17). Analysis of phylogenetic affinities between these species also showed that there were distinct differences (in species composition) between the sponge faunas of the east and west coasts, with major species turnover occurring at Cape York, such that sponges in the Gulf of Carpentaria, the Wessel Islands, and further to the west were more closely related to those of the Western Australian coast and shelf than they were to the geographically adjacent Cape York and northern GBR faunas (Fig. 18). These data support an hypothesis that FIG. 15A-C. Biodiversity (cluster, MDS) analysis of adjacent small-scale sponge populations off the Sunshine Coast of SE Queensland, from a pool of 226 species, showing distinct crossshelf gradients in species richness, local (‘apparent’) endemism and taxonomic afinities; mid-reefs richest and most diverse (cf. inner and outer reefs); and all reefs highly heterogeneous (mean 34% ‘apparent endemism’ (modiied from Hooper & Kennedy, 2002) 21 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 16. Species richness (bars) and taxonomic afinities (percentages) between regional sponge populations along the central to northeastern Australian coasts (modiied from Hooper et al., 1999) biogeographic factors and connectivity are more obvious in determining largescale (provincial) marine sponge faunas than is geographic proximity, with few obvious physical gradients defining these provincial faunas (e.g. carbonate vs. terrigenous sediments, tidal regimes, etc.). Of major significance from these analyses was the recognition of high heterogeneity (at larger spatial FIG. 17. Species richness of regional sponge faunas in tropical Australia (and some comparative outlining regions). Red circles indicate tropical ‘hotspots’ mentioned in the text (modiied from Hooper et al., 2002) 22 scales) of the sponges living on the Great Barrier Reef, with two distinct ‘hotspots’ detected in the southern (corresponding to the NEP+CEB bioregions) and far northern regions (corresponding to NEB bioregion), and a variable mosaic of diversity and species richness elsewhere (Fig. 17). This pattern has been subsequently confirmed by a phylogeographic study of the calcareous sponge Leucetta Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 18. Phylogenetic analysis of largescale (provincial) sponge faunas based on parsimony analysis (PAUP) showing major trends in taxonomic afinities between provincial regions (modiied from Hooper et al., 2002) ‘chagosensis’ (Wörheide et al., 2002b) (Fig. 19) based on rDNA analysis, and these results question the rigor or even validity of some traditional Australian marine biogeographic boundaries (reviewed by Wilson & Allen, 1987) to encompass all marine phyla. Although historically better known, and believed to contain much higher proportions of endemic species than the tropical faunas, the southern Australian sponge faunas (Flindersian, Peronian and Maugean provinces, believed to have Gondwanan origins) have not been studied in a contemporary or comparable manner to the tropics (Dampierian, Solanderian provinces considered to have Tethyan affinities). Consequently, numerical analyses provided here are restricted to the tropical bioregions. 3.2. descriptive giS analysis of bioregionalisation trends for sponge groups 23 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 19. rDNA ITS Sequence type distribution of Leucetta ‘chagosensis’ on the Great Barrier Reef. Each circle represents one sampling locality. Two distinct and deeply divergent clades were found to be present, corresponding to a southern clade (3-1) and a northern clade (3-5), the latter also containing sequence types found in Taiwan and Guam (3-2). The two clades only narrowly overlap in the central GBR, however, single specimens containing southern-clade sequence types were found at Osprey and Myrmidon Reefs (modiied from Wörheide et al., 2002b). This structure has subsequently been conirmed with an extended data set, covering more samples from the central GBR as well as from Reefs on the Queensland Plateau (Epp, 2003) (modiied from Wörheide et al.,2005) 24 GIS analysis of the sponge dataset is presented in Appendix 6. Although the primary focus is on the tropical faunas, distributions of temperate species in the collections are also presented to highlight differences between taxonomic groups in terms of their tropical versus temperate components, widely distributed (ubiquitous) species versus narrow-range endemics, and so on. GIS maps are presented in varying formats, ranging from species-groups to familygroups, depending on the diversity of a particular taxon and aiming for clarity of presentation. These GIS analyses are accompanied by an interpretation of the taxonomic grouping in terms of their bioregional trends (how they might contribute as surrogates for tropical bioregionalisation), summary detail (the scope and diversity of the taxa, geographic details on distributional peaks (richness, diversity)), and lists of species within genera and families that are unique to particular bioregions, and therefore which might be used to help define those bioregions. Modeled CAAB distributions (incorporating geographic and depth distributions) of species chosen as environmental surrogates are presented in Appendix 7. It is anticipated that these data will be eventually available on OZCAM, linked to the raw species distributions themselves. 3.3. Numerical analysis ofAustralian tropical sponge biodiversity and bioregionalisation 3.3.1. Localities (γ-scale diversity) A subset of 2,249 species found in tropical and subtropical faunas was analysed using numerical methods, from the pool of 3,769 species included in the descriptive analyses (section 4.3). Sponge specimen point data were amalgamated into 34 smaller-scale spatial regions (henceforth referred to as localities) based on similarity and MDS analyses as described in Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Hooper et al. (2002). These localities are defined in Appendix 2b, including the number of sites investigated and the number of unique species found in each locality (i.e. species occurring only in that particular locality). Frequency distributions, species rarefaction and species richness were analysed for each locality in a transect running across the tropics from the central east coast (Sydney region) to the central west coast (Houtman Abrolhos). Only one species (Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina) was found in 22 localities, two species in 19 localities (Rhabdastrella globostellata, Acanthella cavernosa), three species in 18 localities (Ianthella flabelliformis, Myrmekioderma granulata, Echinodictyum mesenterinum), three species in 17 localities (Cinachyrella (Rhaphidotethya) enigmatica, Reniochalina stalagmites, Xestospongia testudinaria), three species in 16 localities (Pericharax heterorhaphis, Hyattella intestinalis, Ianthella basta), two species in 15 localities (Stellatta sp.#1005, Dendrilla rosea), three species in 14 localities (Ircinia sp.#1255, Agelas mauritiana, Dysidea cf. avara), and three species in 13 localities (Ianthella quadrangulata, Spheciospongia papillosa, Cinachyrella australiensis). These species represent less than 1% of the tropical fauna. The majority of species (1377 or 61%) were found only in a single locality; 713 species (32%) in 2-5 localities, and 138 species (6%) in 6-12 localities (Fig. 20). The species rarefaction curve (Fig. 21) is approaching but has not yet reached a well-defined asymptote (R2=0.9253), indicating that sampling of localities may not be statistically complete compared to an ideal (saturated) species accumulation curve. region), an area significant as a biogeographic overlap zone between Solanderian and Peronian provinces); (2) Southern GBR (peak at CapricornBunker Group); (3) Central GBR (peak in the vicinity of the Townsville region mid-lagoon reefs); (4) Northern GBR (peak in the vicinity of the Lizard Island region including outer barrier reefs); (5) Western margin of the Northern Province (peak in the Darwin to Cobourg Peninsula regions); and (6) North West Shelf (peak in the Dampier to Port Hedland region). In addition, sites investigated in the Far Northern GBR locality (Cape Melville up to the Torres Straits) have consistently moderate diversity, suggesting there may be a relatively homogeneous sponge fauna throughout this locality, but there is a dramatic turnover of species richness at the boundary between Cape York and the eastern Gulf of Carpentaria, which is supported further (below) by significant changes in species composition at this boundary. Visually, there appears to be a correlation between collection effort (number of sites collected for each locality) and the number of species and number of unique species in localities (Fig. 22), but these factors are significantly different (Fig. 23; F=20.662, Prob.=3.17E-08), with total numbers of species in localities not related to either collection effort (R2=0.7226, F= 83.350, Prob.=2E-10) FIG. 20. Frequency distribution of sponge species co-occurring in one or more of the 34 smaller-scale localities. Analysis of species richness along this tropical transect (Fig. 22) showed six peaks (possible biodiversity ‘hotspots’) in tropical or subtropical faunas: (1) Southeast Queensland – northern New South Wales biogeographic transition zone (with peak in the Moreton Bay 25 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 21. Species rarefaction of accumulation curve showing estimates of species richness (Mau Tau function) (blue squares), upper and lower 95% conidence limits (red and black diamonds), and a logarithmic trendline of the Mau Tau function (blue curve) for the 34 smaller-scale localities. or proportions of unique species in these localities (R2=0.8144, F=140.392, Prob.=3.06E-13). Conversely, collection effort and numbers of unique species are statistically related (F=0.0039, Prob.=0.9504) although there is no FIG. 22. Species richness (yellow area), number of unique species (red area) and number of localities investigated (green area) for sponges collected from smaller scale (γ-scale diversity) localities in northern Australia, running anticlockwise across the tropics from the south east coast (Sydney region) to the south west coast (Houtman Abrolhos Islands). Numbers and arrows refer to peaks in species richness and major species turnover points, repectively, mentioned in the text. 26 obvious biological explanation for this relationship. Nevertheless, these data suggest that other environmental variables are involved in determining the observed patterns of species richness/ proportions of unique species within Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 23. Regression analysis of species richness (black), number of unique species (red) and collection effort (green ± 95% conidence limits) for sponge faunas in localities (γ-scale diversity) ordered by total species richness. localities, and these are not simply statistical artefacts of sampling effort. This conclusion is further supported by analysis of the Michaelis-Menten function (MM), which provides a more rigorous richness estimate based on computation of the asymptotic function in the species accumulation curve, depicting the effect of significant heterogeneity in species richness within a randomised dataset (Fig. 24) whereby abnormally high speciesrich localities produce consequent enormous estimates of richness that skew MM estimates away from the asymptote (Colwell & Coddington, 1994). MDS ordination (Fig. 25) of the Jaccard similarity matrix for γ-scale locality faunas shows several transition zones where community structure appears to change to a greater or lesser extent: (1) Major transition between temperate and tropical faunas at the Tweed River; (2) Minor transition between Southeast Queensland and Southern GBR faunas in the vicinity of FIG. 24. MichaelisMenten function (MM) for smaller scale (γ-scale diversity) species richness computed for a randomised locality dataset, illustrating the signiicant contribution of abnormally high heterogeneity in species richness between localities to the species accumulation curve. 27 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 25. MDS ordination of Jaccard Similarity matrix data for the 34 smaller scale localities (γ-scale diversity) (South Sahul Shelf not included owing to zero similarity to other sites). Numbers refer to transition zones mentioned in the text. Fraser Island-Hervey Bay; (3) Minor transition between the Far Northern GBR and Torres Strait; (4) Major transition between Torres Strait and the Eastern Gulf of Carpentaria – representing the most significant β-diversity recorded; (5) Major transition between the Gulf and Wessel Islands region (probably an ecological (habitat-related) rather than biogeographic transition); (6) Several minor transitions along the west coast between west of Darwin and Shark Bay (some of which remain undersampled, such as the Kimberley Coast and Northwest Cape), preventing any stronger conclusions on these areas of transition; (7) Minor transition between Exmouth-Shark Bay regions and the Houtman Abrolhos. Cluster analysis (Fig. 26; see Appendix 3 for data similarity matrix) showed a number of trends in β–diversity across the tropical Australian transect. Three major dichotomies are evident. Groups 5, 6 and 7 contain tropical west and north coast faunas, Groups 2, 3 and 4 contain tropical east coast faunas, and Group 1 contains a temperatesubtropical east coast fauna. These groups reflect major biogeographic 28 trends discovered in other analyses (Hooper et al., 2002). Group 7 contains a mix of contiguous (Exmouth Gulf, Shark Bay, Houtman Abrolhos, all from Western Australia) and non-contiguous (Wessel Islands, Northern Territory) faunas, which as a group is more closely related to Groups 5 and 6 (consisting of western coast and north coast faunas, extending from the Dampier region, Western Australia, to the eastern Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland). Of interest here is the inclusion of Torres Strait sampling sites in Group 5 together with the Gulf of Carpentaria localities under cluster analysis (Fig. 26), whereas under MDS analysis the Torres Strait fauna is more closely related to the Far Northern Queensland reefs of the Great Barrier Reef (Fig. 25), with faunal transition between them (transition point 3 in Fig. 25) less marked than between Torres Strait and the Gulf faunas (transition point 4). This suggests that species turnover at the Cape York boundary may occur moreso at the eastern edge (i.e. on the GBR side) than on the western edge (i.e. on the Gulf of Carpentaria side) of Cape York. Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 26. Cluster analysis of Jaccard Similarity matrix data for the 34 smaller scale localities (γscale diversity). Numbers refer to cluster groups and black squares refer to major transitions zones mentioned in the text. 29 QM Technical Reports | 002 Similarly, the fauna of the Wessel Islands region (11°30’S 136°25’E) in northern Australia appears to be more closely related to several west coast faunas (Group 7 in the cluster analysis, Fig. 26) than to the adjacent Darwin region (Group 6; 12°25’S 130°48’E), with species turnover less marked than other transition points (transition points 5-6 in Fig. 25). The conclusion from cluster and MDS analyses of west and north coast faunas, at the smaller locality (γ-scale) diversity, is that transition zones become progressively less obvious/ less marked as one moves westwards/ southwestwards along the transect from Cape York, with the exception of the Gulf of Carpentaria fauna (probably due to major ecological/habitat differences with adjacent localities; transition point 5 in Fig. 25), and the abrupt change at the Houtman Abrolhos (transition point 6, approximately 28°43’S 113°48’E; see also Fromont, 1999). Northern and Central GBR faunas form separate but closely related clusters (Groups 3-4 in Fig. 25). Limited genetic data on sponges (Wörheide et al., 2002b; see Fig. 19) indicate a transition zone in the Central GBR region, somewhere between Mackay (21°09’S 149°12’E) and Townsville (19°15’S 146°50’E), but this transition is not clear from our faunal analyses, nor is it precise from the data presented by Wörheide et al. (2002b), who indicate some genetic mixing over several hundreds of kilometres within this region of the GBR. Nevertheless, the Northern and Central GBR reefs (with the northern boundary in the vicinity of Lizard Island and Ribbon Reefs, 14°40’S 145°28’E) are more-or-less distinct from the Far Northern GBR reefs (i.e. Cockburn Reef (11°50’S 143°18’E), Flinders Reefs, Howick Reefs, Turtle Group, and Shelburne Bay region). This relationship is stronger in ordination (MDS analysis, transition point 3 in Fig. 25) than cluster analysis (both localities grouped together in Group 4 in Fig. 26), indicating a more gradual transition occurring somewhere in 30 the vicinity of the Far Northern GBR, but our data are not robust enough to accurately define any strong turnover point(s). Conversely, there is a much stronger divergence between faunas in the Southern GBR (Group 3 in Fig. 26) and the southern coastal reefs in Southeast Queensland (Group 2 in Fig. 26) with species turnover occurring in the vicinity of Fraser Island-Hervey Bay region (approximately 25°00’S 153°00’E, transition point 2, in Fig. 25). Of further interest here is the distinct break between these south east Queensland localities (Group 2 in Fig. 26) and more southern localities, from the Gold Coast extending down to Sydney (Group 1 in Fig. 26), with major transition between the Gold Coast and Moreton Bay regions (transition point 1 in Fig. 25). These data support an hypothesis of a sharp species turnover in the vicinity of the Tweed River (northern New South Wales – southern Queensland border; 28°11’S 153°34’E), based on in situ observations of tropical and temperate species co-occur at sampling sites but with different depth distributions (shallow and deeper, respectively; Davie & Hooper, 1998). Finally, irrespective of their amalgamation into a single faunistic group with the Byron Bay and Gold Coast faunas (under cluster analysis, Group 1 in Fig. 26), the Sydney region fauna differs more substantially from the other two localities (which have tropical elements), and is indicative of its nearly exclusive temperate origins. Four offshore marine territories, the Queensland Plateau and Sahul Shelf off the northeast and northwest coasts respectively, show differing patterns of similarity (Figs 25-26). The Queensland Plateau fauna (with two localities, north and south), is more similar to the southern and central GBR faunas than to the far northern GBR and Torres Strait regions. Other studies have also shown them to have closer affinities to the western Pacific island faunas than do the GBR reefs, both in terms of species composition (Hooper et al., 2002) and genetic connectivity Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia (Wörheide et al., 2002b). Conversely, the affinities of the Sahul Shelf faunas (with two localities, north and south) is not clear, falling between west and east coast faunas in both MDS and cluster analyses (Figs 25-26). South Sahul reefs (Clarke Reef and Rowley Shoals), were excluded from MDS analysis due to zero similarity with any other locality, skewing the other data trends, whereas North Sahul reefs (Ashmore and Hibernia Reefs and Cartier I.), show greater similarity to the northwest coast (present analysis) and Indo-Malay archipelago fauna (Hooper et al, 2002). Localities of Northumberland Reefs, Rowley Shoals, Joseph Bonaparte Archipelago and Joseph Bonaparte Gulf are not resolved in terms of clear affinities with other faunas, either in cluster or MDS analyses, probably because all have low sample size and collection efforts applied to them (see Appendix 2b & 3). Nevertheless, the latter two localities are pivotal to the detection of delineating transition zones between north and west coast faunas, and should be considered a priority in future collection effort. In summary, cluster groups depicted in ordinal space (MDS analysis; Fig. 25) illustrate the major faunal transition zones better than cluster analysis (Fig. 26). Three major sponge provinces are indicated, with smaller transitions occurring within these. (1) Temperatesubtropical east coast fauna, with a south-north gradient extending from temperate to tropical influence and hard boundary in the vicinity of the Tweed River. This is a well-recognised biogeographic transition zone between Solanderian and Peronian Provinces. (2) Tropical east coast fauna, containing (2a) a southern component, with moderately hard boundary somewhere north of Hervey Bay-Fraser Island; (2b) a central component, with soft boundary somewhere between Mackay and Townsville; (2c) a northern component, with one or more minor transitions in the Far Northern GBR leading to (2d) a major transition on the eastern edge (GBR side) of Cape York; and (2e) the Coral Sea Territories on the Queensland Plateau with affinities to the western Pacific islands faunas, such as Vanuatu, Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands (Hooper, unpublished data), but also containing many elements of the north-central and southern GBR faunas. All of these transitions are undoubtedly related to genetic connectivity and modern-day current patterns (both endogenous and exogenous) that impact on the GBR and Coral Sea regions (see discussion in Wörheide et al., 2002). A major hard boundary at Cape York is a recognised biogeographic boundary between the Dampierian and Solanderian Provinces. (3) Tropical northern and western fauna, with several transitions that are not completely resolved by our data: (3a) the Gulf of Carpentaria which is markedly different from either adjacent eastern (Torres Strait) and western regions (Wessel Islands), and likely an ecological rather than biogeographic pattern; (3b) a moderately hard boundary at the Wessel Islands, differing moderately from Cobourg Peninsula and Darwin faunas (and probably representing a major species turnover point rather than a ‘biodiversity hotspot’ as indicated in previous analyses: Hooper et al., 2002); (3c) one or more probable transitions west of the Darwin region to the North West Cape region, but these transitions are not well indicated by our data and appear to be less dramatic than on the east coast; and (3d) a significant boundary in the vicinity of Northwest Cape, with the Shark Bay and Houtman Abrolhos faunas markedly different from the northwestern coastal and shelf faunas, but at this time it is uncertain whether this is a gradual (soft) or abrupt (hard) transition given the relative paucity of sponge data from the Exmouth and Ningaloo Reef regions. These patterns are illustrated in Fig. 27. To test the strength of observed species turnover between temperate east, tropical east and tropical north 31 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 27. Patterns of sponge distributions across tropical Australia based on similarities in species richness and taxonomic distributions for 34 smaller scale localities (γscale diversity). Numbers refer to major sponge provinces; letters refer to regional subdivisions within each province mentioned in the text; thickness of lines delimiting regions relects conidence assessments applied to transition zones, mentioned in the text. and western faunas non-parametric 2-way nested Analyses of Similarity (ANOSIM) hypothesis tests were applied to the Jaccard similarity matrix data to determine the variation in biodiversity relationships, as an indicator of potential dispersal and connectivity between locality sponge assemblages (at the γ-scale diversity). Localities were grouped into classes according to a priori criteria: (A) five latitudinal clusters, and (B) six longitudinal clusters (Table 4), with the null hypothesis that there are no assemblage differences between groups of localities across latitudinal or longitudal gradients. ANOSIM analyses were also able to discriminate which of the factors (groups of localities) were significantly more different from others via pairwise comparisons (Table 4, Fig. 28A-d). There were no significant differences between latitude groups using longitude groups as samples (R=-0.436, Prob.= 0.999) (i.e. between32 group similarities were not significantly greater than within-group similarities), and slightly more significance where latitude groups were averaged across all longitude groups (R=0.217, Prob.=0.074), with significance levels in pairwise tests between groups of localities varying from 73-100%. Conversely, there were significant differences between longitude groups using latitude groups as samples (R=0.609, Prob.=0.001), which was even more significantly different where longitude groups were averaged across all latitude groups (R=0.655, Prob.=0.0001), and significance levels from pairwise comparisons between groups ranging from 10-67%. These trends are illustrated in the histogram plots of factors (Fig. 28). In other words, latitudinal gradients in ß-diversity were not strong (or significantly different), moving from the temperate to tropical faunas, irrespective of whether east or west coast faunas, although differences Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia groups global R statistic Signiicance level % Possible permutations Actual permutations A. latitude (nested within longitude groups) global test: differences between latitude groups using longitude groups as samples: R = -0.436, Prob. = 99.9% (from 23648625 possible permutations, 999 actual permutations) global test: differences between longitude groups averaged across all latutide groups: R = 0.655, Prob. = 0.01% (from a ‘large number’ of possible permutations, 999 actual permutations) Pairwise tests between latitude groups 1,2 -0.75 100% 3 3 1,3 -0.167 90% 10 10 1,4 -0.071 73.3% 15 15 1,5 -0.25 80% 15 15 2,3 -0.667 100% 10 10 2,4 -0.536 100% 15 15 2,5 -0.536 100% 15 15 3,4 -0.204 77.1% 35 35 3,5 -0.315 100% 35 35 4,5 -0.677 100% 35 35 Table 4A. Tests of signiicance between global R-values from analysis of similarity (2-way nested ANOSIM tests), comparing localities (γscale diversity) grouped a priori along geographic gradients: A, Latitude groups; B, Longitude groups. Refer to Table 4B for deinition of locality groups. b. longitude (nested within Latitude groups) global test: differences between longitude groups using latitude groups as samples: R = 0.609, Prob. = 0.1% (from 21021000 possible permutations, 999 actual permutations) global test: differences between latitude groups averaged across all longitude groups: R = 0.217, Prob. = 7.4% (from 42865200 possible permutations, 999 actual permutations) Pairwise tests between groups of longitude classes 1,2 0.074 20% 10 10 1,3 0.833 10% 10 10 1,4 0.875 10% 10 10 1,5 0.5 20% 10 10 1,6 0.815 10% 10 10 2,3 1 10% 10 10 2,4 0.75 10% 10 10 2,5 0.667 10% 10 10 2,6 1 10% 10 10 3,4 0 66.7% 3 3 3,5 0.75 33.3% 3 3 3,6 1 10% 10 10 4,5 0.25 33.3% 3 3 4,6 0.583 10% 10 10 5,6 0.833 10% 10 10 between some groups of localities were greater than others, such as comparison of high latitude temperate faunas (Group 1) versus low latitude tropical faunas (Groups 4 and 5; Table 4). By comparison, longitudinal gradients in ß-diversity were markedly stronger (or significantly different), underlining the faunal changes across the transect from east to west (as depicted in Fig. 27). Taxonomic Distinctness Analysis was conducted on different taxonomic hierarchies (species, genus and family level taxa), for species presence/ absence data within each of the 34 localities (ß-scale diversity). This procedure measured the relatedness between any two taxa in a community sample, with the null hypothesis that 33 QM Technical Reports | 002 Table 4B. List of locality groups used in ANOSIM analyses. latitude groups Localities (refer to Appendix 2B for extent of locality boundaries) Group1 (35º-27ºS) Sydney region, Byron Bay, Gold Coast, Moreton Bay region, Houtman Abrolhos Group 2 (27º-23ºS) Sunshine Coast, Hervey Bay region, Capricorn Bunkers, Shark Bay Group 3 (23º-20ºS) Swains, Northumberlands, Whitsundays, Pompeys, Sth Queensland Plateau, Exmouth region Group 4 (20º-14ºS) Townsville region, Cairns region, Low Is, Lizard Is region, Nth Queensland Plateau, Sth Gulf Carpentaria, Broome region, Sth Sahul Shelf, Dampier region Group 5 (14º-9ºS) Far Nth Queensland, Torres Straits, East Gulf Carpentaria, West Gulf Carpentaria, Gove region, Wessel Is, Darwin-Cobourg region, Joseph Bonaparte Gulf, Bonaparte Arch., Nth Sahul Shelf longitude groups Group 1 (157º-151ºE) Sydney region, Byron Bay, Gold Coast, Moreton Bay region, Sunshine Coast, Hervey Bay region, Capricorn Bunkers, Swains, Northumberlands, Sth Queensland Plateau Group 2 (151º-142ºE) Whitsundays, Pompeys, Townsville region, Cairns region, Low Is, Lizard Is region, Nth Queensland Plateau, Far Nth Queensland, Torres Straits Group 3 (142º-130ºE) East Gulf Carpentaria, West Gulf Carpentaria, Sth Gulf Carpentaria, Gove region, Wessel Is, Darwin-Cobourg region Group 4 (130º-122ºE) Joseph Bonaparte Gulf, Bonaparte Arch., Broome region Group 5 (122º-118ºE) Nth Sahul Shelf, Sth Sahul Shelf, Dampier region Group 6 (118º-112ºE) Exmouth region, Shark Bay, Houtman Abrolhos a species/ genus/ family list from any particular site has the same taxonomic distinctness structure as the master list from which it was drawn (i.e. the list containing all species from all sites in tropical Australia). These results are presented as two-dimensional plots of 95% probability ellipses based on simulated distributions using sampling subsets from M=20 to M=100 (where M is an ‘optimum taxonomic mapping statistic’ based on the number of taxa in the single selected sample; Warwick & Clarke, 2001). Pairs of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda+) datapoints were calculated from the real sponge dataset, for each of the 34 localities, and superimposed within these probability ellipses (Fig. 29A-C), with summary diversity indices statistics presented (Table 5,7,9), and regression analyses conducted on each of datasets for the three taxonomic hierarchies (Tables 6,8,10) as a statistical test for contribution to overall community heterogeneity. For species-level taxa (Fig. 29A), most sites fall within the M=60 simulated probability envelope of the 95% predicted range for Average Taxonomic Distinctness (delta+). Eight localities 34 deviate most from general community structure, falling outside the M=40 95% simulated probability envelope. Three localities are undersampled (Southern Sahul Shelf, Joseph Bonaparte Gulf and Bonaparte Archipelago), all with relatively lower species richness (d) and species diversity (H’), and relatively high Average Taxonomic Distinctness (delta+) of all localities sampled, deviating the most from the general geographic regional community pattern (Table 5). Similarly, these three localities are also significantly underrepresented in terms of their habitat heterogeneity (or unevenness), as measured by relatively low Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (or lambda+), representing least heterogeneity of all localities in terms of community structure. Conversely, five localities have relatively high taxonomic distinctness and greatest heterogeneity in community structure (Wessel Islands, Gove region, Gold Coast, Southern and Western Gulf of Carpentaria). The contribution to overall community heterogeneity by these eight groups of localities is statistically highly significant (F=10.988, Prob.=0.002) (Table 6). At the genus level of taxonomy (Fig. 29B, Table 7), taxonomic distinctness statistics are less robust, with most sites Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia falling within only the M=40 95% simulated probability envelope, but species-level patterns are preserved. The same three localities detected in species-level taxonomic analyses were undersampled and least heterogenous in terms of community structure (Southern Sahul Shelf, Joseph Bonaparte Gulf and Bonaparte Archipelago), and two (Wessel Islands and Houtman Abrolhos) had relatively high taxonomic distinctness and greatest heterogeneity in community structure, with differences statistically significant (F=9.097, P=0.005) (Table 8). The genus-level taxonomic dataset was analysed further, below. Family level taxonomic distinctness analysis (Fig. 29C) was far less informative, with few of the 34 localities lying within the 95% probability envelope at the M=40 level or above, with the west and north coast localities appearing to deviate more from general community patterns (showing lower taxonomic distinctness and heterogeneity in community structure) than east coast localities (Table 9), although these differences are not statistically significant (F=0.666, Prob.=0.420) (Table 10), and possibly indicate that most localities are undersampled and homogeneous in terms of taxonomic distinctness at the family level of taxonomy. These results indicate that with several exceptions noted above the modelled 95% probability contour is a reasonable fit for all localities at the species- and genus-levels, but not at the familylevel demonstrating that the latter is an inadequate surrogate for true (species- FIG. 28A-D. Frequency histograms of analysis of similarity (2-way nested ANOSIM tests), comparing localities (γscale diversity) grouped a priori along geographic gradients. A, Differences between Longitude groups (averaged across all Latitude groups). B, Differences between Latitude groups (using Longitude groups as samples). C, Differences between Latitude groups (averaged across all Longitude groups). D, Differences between Longitude groups (using Latitude groups as samples). level) sponge biodiversity estimates, as concluded previously by Hooper et al. (2002). Due to the large size of the dataset it was not possible to analyse the specieslevel dataset further using probability funnels in the Taxonomic Distinctness 35 QM Technical Reports | 002 Table 5. Species level of taxonomy: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for localities (γ-scale diversity): species richness (S), Margalef species richness (d), ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)), Average taxonomic distinctness (AvTD or ∆+[Delta+]), Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD or Λ+ [Lambda+]), Average Phylogenetic diversity (Phi+ or φ+), and Total Phylogenetic diversity (sφ+), based on species presence/ absence data for each of the 34 localities. Table 6. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD, Delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD, Lambda+) for species-level taxonomic presenceabsence data for the 34 localities (γ-scale diversity). Locality No. species (S) Margalef species richness (d) Sydney region 153 30.21606 ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)) 5.030438 Byron Bay 60 14.41012 4.094345 Average taxonomic distinctness (Delta+) Variation in taxonomic distinctness (Lambda+) Average phylogenetic diversity (Phi+) 63.99495 125.0142 30.93682 4733.333 63.46516 122.8326 40 2400 Gold Coast 40 10.57232 3.688879 63.09829 176.3693 40.41667 1616.667 Moreton Bay 214 39.69455 5.365976 64.41505 99.44271 29.43925 6300 Sunshine Coast 233 42.5607 5.451038 64.52568 105.1583 28.96996 6750 Hervey Bay 110 23.18912 4.70048 63.6169 106.4899 33.63636 3700 Capricorn-Bunkers 387 64.78222 5.958425 65.87808 129.425 26.27046 10166.67 Swains 304 52.99957 5.717028 64.64413 119.0867 27.30263 8300 Northumberlands 36 9.766936 3.583519 63.4127 81.56337 44.44444 1600 Whitsundays 135 27.31753 4.905275 63.2412 99.40801 31.85185 4300 Pompeys 162 31.64559 5.087596 63.53424 122.3565 30.04115 4866.667 Townsville region 239 43.4587 5.476464 63.88899 110.0136 28.45188 6800 Cairns region 99 21.32697 4.59512 64.24105 100.3946 36.36364 3600 Low Isles region 131 26.66559 4.875197 63.57213 93.02055 32.31552 4233.333 Lizard I. region 464 75.40858 6.139885 64.39745 120.3622 24.56897 11400 N Qld Plateau 106 22.51557 4.663439 64.27673 128.0608 32.86164 3483.333 S Qld Plateau 97 20.98493 4.574711 66.45905 119.8738 37.45704 3633.333 Far N Qld region 146 29.09539 4.983607 63.38844 113.958 32.07763 4683.333 Torres Strait 135 27.31753 4.905275 63.17487 115.9014 30.74074 4150 E Gulf Carpentaria 92 20.12478 4.521789 62.62542 105.3039 35.68841 3283.333 S Gulf Carpentaria 85 18.90763 4.442651 62.2409 130.7394 35.09804 2983.333 W Gulf Carpentaria 53 13.09727 3.970292 62.25206 132.7044 35.22013 1866.667 Gove region 13 4.678455 2.564949 61.96581 155.9646 50 650 Wessel Is 55 13.4753 4.007333 60.93154 142.7536 39.09091 2150 Darwin-Cobourg 395 65.89857 5.978886 63.31791 88.47028 25.23207 9966.667 Joseph Bonaparte Gulf 12 4.426726 2.484907 65.15152 31.37435 62.5 750 Bonaparte Arch 12 4.426726 2.484907 65.15152 31.37435 62.5 750 Broome region 84 18.73244 4.430817 63.29126 97.13599 35.51587 2983.333 N Sahul Shelf 124 25.51718 4.820282 63.69656 80.8935 35.61828 4416.667 S Sahul Shelf 2 1.442695 0.693147 66.66667 0 83.33333 166.6667 Dampier region 347 59.15213 5.849325 63.7776 87.87212 26.08069 9050 Exmouth region 45 11.55868 3.806662 62.62626 89.73574 41.11111 1850 Shark Bay 50 12.52549 3.912023 63.12925 100.8654 43.33333 2166.667 Houtman Abrolhos 130 26.50212 4.867534 62.80859 96.85576 34.10256 4433.333 Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Square Std. Error of the Estimate 1 .512 .262 .238 1.0643 df Mean Square F Sig. 10.988 .002 A Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+ ANOVA Sum of Squares Model 1 Regression 12.446 1 12.446 Residual 35.113 31 1.133 Total 47.559 32 a Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b Dependent Variable: Delta+ 36 Total phylogenetic diversity (sPhi+) Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Locality S d H’(loge) Delta+ Lambda+ Phi+ sPhi+ Sydney region 153 30.21606 5.030438 66.37341 168.8048 36.47449 2917.959 Byron Bay 60 14.41012 4.094345 65.22333 184.3252 43.65255 1877.06 Gold Coast 40 10.57232 3.688879 67.58469 179.3134 45.43541 1272.192 Moreton Bay 214 39.69455 5.365976 67.34139 139.7277 36.95086 3658.135 Sunshine Coast 233 42.5607 5.451038 67.29588 130.2552 36.20798 3838.046 Hervey Bay 110 23.18912 4.70048 66.54843 115.8386 41.0771 2505.703 Capricorn-Bunkers 387 64.78222 5.958425 69.05471 141.704 34.98369 4967.684 Swains 304 52.99957 5.717028 68.36576 154.807 35.57261 4339.859 Northumberlands 36 9.766936 3.583519 66.14856 108.8984 48.25453 1351.127 Whitsundays 135 27.31753 4.905275 65.28377 144.8033 37.88066 2765.288 Pompeys 162 31.64559 5.087596 67.4281 162.8984 36.21415 2897.132 Townsville region 239 43.4587 5.476464 66.51706 145.9713 35.49754 3762.739 Cairns region 99 21.32697 4.59512 66.25553 147.7386 38.38687 2610.307 Low Isles region 131 26.66559 4.875197 66.1042 141.725 37.50751 2738.048 Lizard I. region 464 75.40858 6.139885 67.43204 154.5545 34.32229 4942.41 N Qld Plateau 106 22.51557 4.663439 67.81942 142.9325 41.92632 2305.948 S Qld Plateau 97 20.98493 4.574711 69.89082 147.4661 42.27022 2705.294 Far N Qld region 146 29.09539 4.983607 66.57267 143.9991 37.11761 3006.526 Torres Strait 135 27.31753 4.905275 65.44996 138.1695 38.85681 2564.55 E Gulf Carpentaria 92 20.12478 4.521789 65.92453 110.695 39.80932 2348.75 S Gulf Carpentaria 85 18.90763 4.442651 66.1022 96.16932 43.93413 2108.838 W Gulf Carpentaria 53 13.09727 3.970292 66.00477 113.6612 49.15479 1327.179 Gove region 13 4.678455 2.564949 64.99932 172.2436 58.25568 582.5568 Wessel Is 55 13.4753 4.007333 62.99222 216.526 41.21844 1648.738 Darwin-Cobourg 395 65.89857 5.978886 66.10731 131.4451 33.83685 4669.485 Joseph Bonaparte Gulf 12 4.426726 2.484907 67.62764 68.13522 62.10635 745.2762 Bonaparte Arch 12 4.426726 2.484907 67.62764 68.13522 62.10635 745.2762 Broome region 84 18.73244 4.430817 65.87729 147.0907 41.61908 2122.573 N Sahul Shelf 124 25.51718 4.820282 66.85324 110.1048 38.43549 3151.71 S Sahul Shelf 2 1.442695 0.693147 69.87728 0 84.93864 169.8773 Dampier region 347 59.15213 5.849325 66.33564 135.8022 34.27649 4490.221 Exmouth region 45 11.55868 3.806662 64.96368 132.593 42.12632 1474.421 Shark Bay 50 12.52549 3.912023 65.02653 159.6153 44.71661 1788.664 Houtman Abrolhos 130 26.50212 4.867534 63.96675 153.29 40.02827 3082.177 Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Square Std. Error of the Estimate 1 .470 .221 .197 1.3313 a Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+ ANOVA Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig. Regression 16.123 1 16.123 9.097 .005 Residual 56.715 32 1.772 Total 72.838 33 Model 1 A Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b Dependent Variable: Delta+ Table 7. Genus level of taxonomy: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for localities (γscale diversity): species richness (S), Margalef species richness (d), ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)), Average taxonomic distinctness (AvTD or ∆+[Delta+]), Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD or Λ+ [Lambda+]), Average Phylogenetic diversity (Phi+ or φ+), and Total Phylogenetic diversity (sφ+), based on species presence/ absence data for each of the 34 localities. Table 8. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD, Delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD, Lambda+) for genus-level taxonomic presence-absence data for the 34 localities (γ-scale diversity). 37 QM Technical Reports | 002 Table 9. Family level of taxonomy: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for localities (γscale diversity): species richness (S), Margalef species richness (d), ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)), Average taxonomic distinctness (AvTD or ∆+[Delta+]), Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD or Λ+ [Lambda+]), Average Phylogenetic diversity (Phi+ or φ+), and Total Phylogenetic diversity (sφ+), based on species presence/ absence data for each of the 34 localities. Locality S d H’(loge) Delta+ Lambda+ Phi+ sPhi+ Sydney region 153 30.21606 5.030438 61.4647 201.3595 41.67726 1500.381 Byron Bay 60 14.41012 4.094345 59.11378 206.3424 42.90028 1201.208 Gold Coast 40 10.57232 3.688879 63.12731 162.482 49.76628 846.0267 Moreton Bay 214 39.69455 5.365976 60.92274 171.8047 39.93828 1917.038 Sunshine Coast 233 42.5607 5.451038 61.21354 129.1437 41.52926 1951.875 Hervey Bay 110 23.18912 4.70048 59.28425 122.0704 42.94614 1503.115 Capricorn-Bunkers 387 64.78222 5.958425 63.8687 189.5054 38.58766 2392.435 Swains 304 52.99957 5.717028 63.52975 193.3277 40.51626 2147.362 Northumberlands 36 9.766936 3.583519 58.43343 88.39324 47.34901 946.9803 Whitsundays 135 27.31753 4.905275 57.29624 171.6611 41.67726 1500.381 Pompeys 162 31.64559 5.087596 62.04716 192.9486 43.34542 1473.744 Townsville region 239 43.4587 5.476464 59.52072 179.7401 39.48006 1855.563 Cairns region 99 21.32697 4.59512 58.14429 154.0369 42.40118 1441.64 Low Isles region 131 26.66559 4.875197 57.93667 154.557 39.60929 1465.544 Lizard I. region 464 75.40858 6.139885 62.13911 188.7323 39.05632 2304.323 N Qld Plateau 106 22.51557 4.663439 61.28071 125.8885 44.21885 1415.003 S Qld Plateau 97 20.98493 4.574711 64.77208 160.5474 44.071 1674.698 Far N Qld region 146 29.09539 4.983607 58.98887 170.0401 39.64399 1585.76 Torres Strait 135 27.31753 4.905275 57.61159 165.6437 41.11162 1438.907 E Gulf Carpentaria 92 20.12478 4.521789 57.92682 101.3192 39.94615 1358.169 S Gulf Carpentaria 85 18.90763 4.442651 56.78229 128.632 39.94615 1358.169 W Gulf Carpentaria 53 13.09727 3.970292 58.11159 96.66455 44.96413 944.2467 Gove region 13 4.678455 2.564949 58.03515 98.59855 58.26446 466.1157 Wessel Is 55 13.4753 4.007333 57.94481 190.8197 45.1309 992.8798 Darwin-Cobourg 395 65.89857 5.978886 58.8071 182.4731 38.59331 2122.632 Joseph Bonaparte Gulf 12 4.426726 2.484907 59.14003 69.50725 56.22146 618.4361 Bonaparte Arch 12 4.426726 2.484907 59.14003 69.50725 56.22146 618.4361 Broome region 84 18.73244 4.430817 59.29032 131.3253 43.06845 1292.053 N Sahul Shelf 124 25.51718 4.820282 59.55646 106.1754 42.52555 1743.547 S Sahul Shelf 2 1.442695 0.693147 61.47489 0 80.73744 161.4749 Dampier region 347 59.15213 5.849325 60.4828 144.1683 40.95334 2088.62 Exmouth region 45 11.55868 3.806662 56.47163 135.5934 41.33676 909.4088 Shark Bay 50 12.52549 3.912023 58.96874 147.4702 43.40138 1171.837 Houtman Abrolhos 130 26.50212 4.867534 55.45728 199.9991 39.00191 1794.088 Analysis (presumably there are data size limitations in the Primer software program). However, as the genus-level data were shown to be potentially useful surrogates of the species-level dataset, at the smaller locality spatial scale (γ-scale diversity) at least, this dataset was analysed for Average Taxonomic Distinctness (Delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (Lambda+) separately, to examine the effects of heterogeneity in taxonomic richness and uniqueness on the Taxonomic Distinctness Analysis statistics (Table 38 11, Figs 30A-b). Localities falling within the 95% probability funnel are not statistically significant from the general community structure for the whole dataset, whereas those falling outside the probability funnel deviate significantly from this general model. In the case of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (Fig. 30A), there is a clear sequence of localities with relatively high richness (e.g. Lizard Island region, Capricorn Bunker Group, Swain Reefs, Darwin-Cobourg Peninsula Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia region, Dampier region) to relatively low richness (e.g. Gold Coast region, Gulf of Carpentaria, Gove region) which nevertheless contain similar taxonomic community structure, and suggesting that samples are a true (or adequate) reflection of community structure for these particular localities. These data support the notion of several ‘biodiversity hotspots’ across the tropical faunas, detected in earlier analysis, supporting their recognition as biological phenomena rather than sampling artifacts. The exception is the locality of the Wessel Islands, delineated as a ‘hotspot’ by Hooper et al. (2002), which appears to differ substantially in community structure with relatively low taxonomic richness, and as such should probably be recognised as a species turnover / transition point, rather than a ‘biodiversity hotspot’. Conversely, there are several taxa that fall close to or outside of the probability funnel (e.g. Byron Bay, South Queensland Plateau, Whitsunday Islands, Torres Strait, Wessel Islands, Exmouth, Shark Bay, Houtman Abrolhos), with a range taxonomic richness values, but differing significantly from general community structure. These latter localities, not surprisingly, correspond to the species turnover points, or transition zones, detected in similarity/ MDS analyses and depicted in Fig. 27. Analysis Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness in relation to taxonomic richness (Fig. 30b) shows the Wessel Islands with significantly higher community heterogeneity, and several localities (Hervey Bay, Eastern and Southern Gulf of Carpentaria, North Sahul Shelf) with significantly lower heterogeneity than general community structure. One significant conclusion from this analysis, therefore, was the strengthening of the confidence limit for a transition zone at the Wessel Islands (Fig. 27). 3.3.2. Bioregions (ε-scale diversity) Species presence-absence data were amalgamated into larger-scale spatial units (ε-scale diversity) defined a priori by the IMCRA demersal bioregions Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Std. Error of Square the Estimate 1 .143 .020 -.010 2.2338 a Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+ ANOVA Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig. Regression 3.325 1 3.325 .666 .420 Residual 159.676 32 4.990 Total 163.001 33 Model 1 a Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b Dependent Variable: Delta+ Table 10. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD, Delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD, Lambda+) for family-level taxonomic presence-absence data for the 34 localities (γ-scale diversity). (provinces and biotones) (Fig. 1) (henceforth referred to as bioregions). Here we analyse only the tropical and subtropical components our datasets, excluding the southeastern temperate fauna of Sydney-Illawarra-Newcastle area (CEP bioregion), which has been dealt with in the smaller-scale (locality) analysis. Analysis of the larger scale bioregions is provided here in an attempt to provide material to assist with the characterisation of the existing IMCRA demersal bioregions, which should be used in conjunction with the subjective lists of species we have provided that are unique components of these bioregions. Within the tropical transect from the Byron Bay–Tweed River region to the Houtman Abrolhos (both recognised as tropical-temperate overlap zones: Wilson & Allen, 1987; including their sponge faunas: Davie & Hooper, 1998; Fromont, 1999), there are eight defined IMCRA demersal bioregions (Fig. 1), extending from the Central Eastern Biotome (CEB) to the Central Western Province (CWP), respectively. In this analysis we split the Northern Province (NP) into two regions, ENP and WNP, based on our knowledge of the sponge fauna which changes substantially between Cape York and Darwin, which provides us with a convenient vehicle to differentiate between eastern and western components of this province, although we do not necessarily advocate their recognition as separate bioregional provinces based solely 39 QM Technical Reports | 002 Table 11. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD, Delta+) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (Lambda+) for genus-level taxonomic presence-absence data for the 34 localities (γscale diversity), and signiicance levels based on comparisons to the general community structure. locality M delta+ value Delta+ signif. % lambda+ value Lambda+ signif. % Sydney region 80 66.37 8.4 168.80 29.6 Byron Bay 43 65.22 6.0 184.33 18.2 Gold Coast 28 67.58 73.5 179.31 31.6 Moreton Bay 99 67.34 37.2 139.73 47.0 Sunshine Coast 106 67.30 33.2 130.26 15.8 Hervey Bay 61 66.55 17.0 115.84 9.6 Capricorn-Bunkers 142 69.05 27.2 141.70 46.2 Swains 122 68.37 89.9 154.81 70.9 Northumberlands 28 66.15 35.2 108.90 24.2 Whitsundays 73 65.28 0.8 144.80 84.7 Pompeys 80 67.43 52.1 162.90 42.6 Townsville region 106 66.52 6.8 145.97 86.1 Cairns region 68 66.26 11.6 147.74 96.3 Low Isles 73 66.10 7.6 141.72 72.3 Lizard I. region 144 67.43 31.2 154.55 68.3 N Qld Plateau 55 67.82 75.9 142.93 88.5 S Qld Plateau 64 69.89 17.0 147.47 97.5 Far N Qld 81 66.57 14.8 144.00 80.7 Torres Strait 66 65.45 3.0 138.17 65.9 E Gulf Carpentaria 59 65.92 8.0 110.70 4.4 S Gulf Carpentaria 48 66.10 14.6 96.17 1.8 W Gulf Carpentaria 27 66.00 28.6 113.66 27.0 Gove region 10 65.00 37.6 172.24 46.2 Wessels 40 62.99 0.6 216.53 2.0 Darwin-Cobourg 138 66.11 0.4 131.45 13.8 J Bonaparte Gulf 12 67.63 86.9 68.14 15.8 Bonaparte Arch 12 67.63 91.3 68.14 14.8 Broome region 51 65.88 11.8 147.09 98.1 N Sahul Shelf 82 66.85 22.6 110.10 0.8 S Sahul Shelf 2 69.88 100.0 0.00 100.0 Dampier region 131 66.34 1.2 135.80 22.6 Exmouth region 35 64.96 7.6 132.59 65.9 Shark Bay 40 65.03 6.2 159.62 60.5 Houtman Abrolhos 77 63.97 0.2 153.29 79.1 on sponge data. Thus, nine tropical bioregions are delineated in this present study, with the term ‘tropical’ also encompassing subtropical faunas. Of the 2,249 species included in analyses, one (Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina (Lamarck, 1814)) occurs in all nine bioregions, two occur in eight (Echinodictyum mesenterinum (Lamarck, 1814), Spheciospongia papillosa (Ridley & Dendy, 1886)), 16 occur in seven, 18 occur in six, 35 occur 40 in five, 63 occur in four, 188 occur in three and 403 occur in two bioregions (Fig. 31; a list of species occurring in four or more bioregions are included in Appendix 4). Most species (1516 or 68%) are rare, occurring in only a single bioregion. Species richness and the number of unique species in each bioregion (Fig. 32, Table 12) appear to be substantially higher in east coast (including the CEB tropical-temperate transition zone), than in northern and west coast bioregions, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia with the major species turnover at Cape York indicated by an arrow in Fig. 32. Detecting gradients in species richness between east and west coast faunas, especially at this larger spatial scale, is partly exacerbated by differential collection efforts applied to each of the bioregions, and the patterns we present here ultimately require more rigorous testing by more complete taxonomic evaluation of the rich WAM collections, especially those from the north west coast (CWB and NWB bioregions in particular). From Fig. 32 it is indicated that the number of unique species bioregion Total no. of spp Total no. of unique spp % of unique spp No. sites collected CEB 791 442 55.88 159 NEP 548 253 46.17 350 NEB 766 472 61.62 409 Eastern NP 271 124 45.76 276 Western NP 387 171 44.19 148 NWB 250 86 34.40 78 NWP 391 220 56.27 213 CWB 33 10 30.3 17 CWP 145 94 64.83 36 Total 3582 Mean 398 208 48.82 1686 Number of shared species bioregion CEb NEP NEb E.NP W.NP NWb NWP CWb CWP CEB 791 264 280 66 67 62 66 5 32 NEP 24.56 548 296 58 65 58 54 5 27 NEB 21.93 29.08 766 96 90 79 83 5 36 31 E.NP 6.63 7.62 10.20 271 110 84 97 7 W.NP 6.03 7.47 8.47 20.07 387 110 138 10 33 NWB 6.33 7.84 8.43 19.22 20.87 250 112 10 29 NWP 5.91 6.10 7.73 17.17 21.56 21.17 391 16 58 CWB 0.61 0.87 0.63 2.36 2.44 3.66 3.92 33 11 CWP 3.54 4.05 4.11 8.05 6.61 7.92 12.13 6.59 145 Jaccard Similarity index (%) in each bioregion may be related to the total number of species collected and the collection effort (number of sites colleted within each region). Regression analysis of amalgamated larger-scale spatial data, however, shows significant differences in curves (Fig. 33; R2=0.9599, F=167.658, Prob.=3.81E-06), although individual ANOVA of factors are less significant: the number of unique species versus the total number of species collected (F=3.2353, Prob.=0.057); total number of species versus the number of sites collected (F=4.5769, Prob.=0.048); and with the strong positive relationship between the number of unique species and collection effort (F=0.0873, Prob.=0.7715), as discovered in earlier analyses and which has no immediately obvious biological basis. These analyses demonstrate the likelihood that some of these species rich bioregions represent real biological phenomena and are not simply statistical artifacts. Table 12. Large scale bioregions sampled for sponges (including temperate transitional bioregions). ‘Unique’ species refer to taxa found only within a particular bioregion. Table 13. Similarities between larger (ε-scale diversity) bioregions, indicating pairwise comparisons in the number of species co-occurring in both sites (upper part of matrix), the total number of species cooccurring in both sites (diagonal, bold font), and Jaccard Similarity index (%) (lower part of matrix, italic font). Similarities in species composition between bioregional faunas revealed highest percentage of similarity between the three tropical east coast bioregions (CEB, NEP, NEB: mean 10.32% similarity; upper part of Table 13 and lower part of Appendix 2A), without any apparent difference whether they were geographically contiguous or disjunct. In other words, about 10% of GBR species are widely distributed between all three bioregions, but with between only 1-4% similarity between GBR bioregions and those of the north and west coasts. By comparison, the four tropical bioregions on the west coast (NWB, NWP, CWB, CWP) had substantially lower levels of similarity between their faunas (mean 1.8% similarity; Appendix 2A), indicating fewer shared species between 41 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 29A. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of species level taxa for presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each locality (γ-scale diversity) is indicated in brackets. 42 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 29B. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of genus level taxa for presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each locality (γ-scale diversity) is indicated in brackets. 43 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 29C. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of family level taxa for presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each locality (γ-scale diversity) is indicated in brackets. 44 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 30A. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) related to generic diversity, superimposed on 95% probability funnels from the simulated dataset, for 34 smaller-scale locality data (γscale diversity). 45 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 30B. Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) related to generic diversity, superimposed on 95% probability funnels from the simulated dataset, for 34 smaller-scale locality data (γscale diversity). 46 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 31. Frequency distribution of sponge species co-occurring in one or more of the nine tropical bioregions. FIG. 32. Species richness (yellow area), number of unique species (red area) and number of sites collected in each bioregion (green area) for sponges from each major bioregion in a transect running across the tropics from the south east Queensland transition zone to the mid west coast transition zone. Arrow indicates major faunal transition. FIG. 33. Regression analysis of species richness (black), number of unique species (red) and number of sites collected in each bioregion (green ± 95% conidence limits on the mean) for sponges from each major bioregion, ordered by bioregions of increasing species richness. 47 QM Technical Reports | 002 in Fig. 34b) and the other west coast bioregions (blue circle). It emphases the closer relationship between west and north coast faunas than with any of the east coast faunas (red dot on Fig. 34A), emphasising the major faunistic changeover at the eastern NP-NEB boundary (i.e. Cape York). FIG. 34A-B. Cluster analysis and MDS ordination of Jaccard Similarity matrix data for the nine (ε-scale diversity) bioregions. adjacent west coast bioregions. Areas where species turnover was greatest had equivalent low levels of similarity in species composition: northern GBR (NEB) and the Gulf of Carpentaria (E.NP) with 3.54% similarity; Gulf of Carpentaria (E.NP) and the Wessel Islands-Darwin regions (W.NP) with 4.05% similarity; and the DarwinCobourg region (W.NP) and Joseph Bonaparte Gulf (NWB) with 4.05% similarity. Cluster analysis (using ranked similarities; Fig. 34A) and MDS ordination (Fig. 34b) performed on the Jaccard Similarity matrix of larger scale (ε-scale diversity) bioregion data (lower part of Table 13), further illustrates the major dichotomy in faunal relationships between east and west coast bioregions. The mid southwestern temperate transition zone (CWB) is not as strong as the other transitions, possibly due to comparatively low sample sizes and thus with low potential to have co-occurring species with any other bioregions (Table 13). Both MDS ordination and cluster analyses demonstrate the faunal relationships between the south west coast bioregion CWP (pink circle 48 Two-way nested Analyses of Similarity (ANOSIM) hypothesis tests were applied to the Jaccard similarity matrix to test the strength of this observed turnover between east and west coast faunas, examining the variation in biodiversity relationships as an indicator of potential dispersal and connectivity between these larger (ε-scale diversity) bioregional sponge communities (Table 14, Figs 35A-d). Bioregions were grouped into two sets of classes according to a priori criteria: (A) four latitudinal clusters, and (B) four longitudinal clusters, with the null hypothesis that there are no assemblage differences between groups of bioregions across these environmental gradients. The number and composition of these groups differs slightly from those assembled for the smaller-scale ANOSIM analysis because membership of the latter was based on arbitrary latitude and longitude quadrants, whereas membership of the nine bioregional units was determined a priori by the IMCRA demersal bioregionalisation process (compare Tables 4b and 14b). There were no significant differences between latitude groups using longitude groups as samples (R=0.625, Prob.=1.00) (i.e. betweengroup similarities were not significantly greater than within-group similarities), or where latitude groups were averaged across all longitude groups (R=0, Prob.=0.667), with significance levels in pairwise tests between groups Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia global R Significance Possible Actual statistic level % permutations permutations A. latitude (nested within longitude groups) global test: differences between latitude groups using longitude groups as samples: R = -0.625, Prob. = 100% (from 105 possible permutations, 105 actual permutations) global test: differences between longitude groups averaged across all latutide groups: R = 1, Prob. = 33.3% (from 3 possible permutations, 3 actual permutations) Pairwise tests between latitude groups 1,2 -0.75 100 3 3 1,3 -0.75 100 3 3 1,4 -0.5 100 3 3 2,3 -0.75 100 3 3 2,4 -0.5 100 3 3 3,4 -0.5 100 3 3 b. longitude (nested within Latitude groups) global test: differences between longitude groups using latitude groups as samples: R = 0.479, Prob. = 1.9% (from 105 possible permutations, 105 actual permutations) global test: differences between latitude groups averaged across all longitude groups: R = 0, Prob. = 66.7% (from 3 possible permutations, 3 actual permutations) Pairwise tests between groups of longitude classes 1,2 0.25 33.3 3 3 1,3 1 33.3 3 3 1,4 0.75 33.3 3 3 2,3 0.5 33.3 3 3 2,4 0.375 33.3 3 3 3,4 0 66.7 3 3 groups of bioregions consistent at 100%. Conversely, there were significant differences between longitude groups using latitude groups as samples (R=0.479, Prob.=0.019), although not statistically significant where longitude groups were averaged across all latitude groups (R=1, Prob.=0.333) probably due to crosstabulation of latitude and longitudinal factors, and significance levels from pairwise comparisons between groups ranging from 33.3-66.7%. These trends are illustrated in the histogram plots of factors, particularly the bimodal distribution of latitude groups averaged Table 14A. Tests of signiicance between global R-values from analysis of similarity (2-way nested ANOSiM tests), comparing bioregions (εscale diversity) grouped a priori along geographic gradients: A, latitude groups; b, longitude groups. Refer to Table 14b for locality membership of groups of bioregions. across longitude groups (Fig. 35). In other words, there were no significant faunistic changes (ß-diversity) that could be attributed solely (or predominantly) to the latitudinal gradient (similar to results from smaller-scale locality analyses), whereas there is a significant change across the longitudinal gradient (although not as strong as detected in the smaller-scale analyses) that reflects the faunistic changes from east to west coasts. Taxonomic Distinctness Analysis was conducted on species, genus and family level taxonomic hierarchies for 49 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 35A-D. Frequency histograms of analysis of similarity (2-way nested ANOSIM tests), comparing localities (εscale diversity) grouped a priori along geographic gradients. A, Differences between Longitude groups (averaged across all Latitude groups). B, Differences between Latitude groups (using Longitude groups as samples). C, Differences between Latitude groups (averaged across all Longitude groups). D, Differences between Longitude groups (using Latitude groups as samples). presence-absence data, amalgamated into larger (ε-scale diversity) bioregions, to test for levels of heterogeneity in taxonomic composition across the IMCRA demersal bioregions (with the null hypothesis being that all bioregions contain a uniform or homogeneous taxonomic composition with respect to the entire dataset). For species-level data (Fig. 36A), most sites fall within the 95% predicted range for AvTD (delta+), with only the two undersampled bioregions on the south west coast (CWP, CWB), both falling outside the M=100 simulated probability envelope but within an M=60 simulated range. Both these bioregions have relatively lower species richness (d), species diversity (H’), and AvTD (delta+) of all bioregions included in analyses, deviating the most from the general 50 geographic regional community pattern (Table 15). Similarly, both bioregions are marginally over-represented in terms of their habitat heterogeneity (or unevenness), as measured by relatively high VarTD (or lambda+) values (Fig. 36A), representing greater heterogeneous of all bioregions in terms of community structure. However, the contribution to overall community heterogeneity by the CWP and CWB bioregions is not statistically significant (Table 16). These patterns are repeated for genus-level taxonomic analysis (Fig. 36b, data in Table 17), with CWP and CWB bioregions again deviating most from general community patterns, with all other bioregions falling within, or close to, the M=80 95% probability envelope, but again these differences (community heterogeneity for these two bioregions) are not statistically significant (Table 18). At family-level taxonomic analysis (Table 19), however, only the east coast bioregions (NEB, NEP and CEB) and one west coast bioregion (NWP) fall within the 95% probability envelope at the M=40 level or above, with the remainder (all north coast and most west coast bioregions) deviating significantly (P=0.195; Table 20) from general community patterns, and with CWB and CWP being the most heterogenious with respect to other bioregions (Fig. 36C). These results indicated that the distribution of samples within species-, genus- and family-groups in the two west coast bioregions (CWB+CWP) differ to a greater or lesser extent from the tropical geographic region in general, although this heterogeneity is only markedly different (i.e. statistically significant) when data are analysed at the familylevel. These results simply reflect the lower taxonomic distinctness (AvTD) and higher unevenness (VarTD) of these two bioregions from the tropical fauna. Thus, with the exception of the southern west coast bioregions CWB and CWP at the species- and genuslevels, and all but the east coast tropical bioregions at the family-level, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia latitude groups Bioregion and localities membership (refer to Appendix 2C for extent of locality boundaries) Group1 (CEB, CWP, CWB) CEB (Byron, Gold Coast, Moreton Bay, Sunshine Coast, Hervey Bay), CWP (Houtman Abrolhos), CWB (Shark Bay) Group 2 (NEP, NWP) NEP (Capricorns, Swains, Northumberland, Whitsundays, Pompeys, Townsville, Sth Qld Plateau), NWP (Exmouth, Dampier, Port Hedland) Group 3 (NEB, NWB) NEB (Cairns, Low, Lizard, Far Nth Qld, Torres Straits, Nth Qld Plateau), NWB (Broome, Bonaparte Arch, J. Bonaparte Gulf, Sth Sahul, Nth Sahul Shelf) Group 4 (E.NP, W.NP) E.NP (E Gulf, S Gulf, W Gulf, Gove, Wessels), W.NP (Darwin, Cobourg) Table 14B. List of bioregion groups used in ANOSIM analyses. longitude groups Group 1 (CEB, NEP) CEB (Byron, Gold Coast, Moreton Bay, Sunshine Coast, Hervey Bay), NEP (Capricorns, Swains, Northumberland, Whitsundays, Pompeys, Townsville, Sth Qld Plateau) Group 2 (NEB, E.NP) NEB (Cairns, Low, Lizard, Far Nth Qld, Torres Straits, Nth Qld Plateau), E.NP (E Gulf, S Gulf, W Gulf, Gove, Wessels) Group 3 (W.NP, NWB) W.NP (Darwin, Cobourg), NWB (Broome, Bonaparte Arch, J. Bonaparte Gulf, Sth Sahul, Nth Sahul Shelf) Group 4 (NWP, CWB, CWP) NWP (Exmouth, Dampier, Port Hedland), CWP (Houtman Abrolhos), CWB (Shark Bay) the modelled 95% probability contour is a reasonable fit for all these sponge faunal distributions. smaller-spatial scale (e.g. oviparous vs. viviparous dispersal, demersal vs. pelagic larvae, etc.). 3.4. Consensus of datasets delineating bioregional transition zones. Nevertheless, our results (at both smaller and larger spatial scales) clearly demonstrate that there are major changes in the fauna along a transect running from the central east to central west coasts that are moreor-less consistent across taxonomic groups; species turnover along the west and north coasts is less prominent than on the east coast; and boundaries between localities/ bioregions based on sponge data are not as clearly defined on the west coast as on the east coast. Smaller-scale analysis indicates three major sponge provinces, with smaller transitions occurring within two of these. (1) Temperate-subtropical east coast fauna, with a strong boundary in the vicinity of the Tweed River marking a biogeographic transition between Solanderian and Peronian Provinces. (2) Tropical east coast fauna, containing (a) a southern component, with moderately hard boundary north of Hervey Bay-Fraser Island; (b) a Comparisons between amalgamating sponge species presence-absence data into smaller-scale locality groups (γ-scale diversity), and larger-scale IMCRA demersal bioregional groups (ε-scale diversity), produces patterns of richness and composition are not fully congruent, suggesting that sponge data do not fully conform to the current IMCRA demersal bioregional model. However, despite some level of incongruety between datasets, it is certainly not proposed that the IMCRA demersal bioregions be emended based on these sponge distribution patterns alone, but that additional data from other benthic marine phyla should be added to the matrix – although it is possible or even likely that different phyla will have different biodiversity patterns, particularly at the 51 5712.5080 39.6702 101.7881 4.9698 144 CWP 28.7737 62.8351 1601.8461 50.0577 106.0353 3.4657 32 CWB 8.9447 62.1976 12007.0388 31.1063 90.1432 5.9558 386 NWP 64.6425 63.9654 8622.3089 34.2155 82.4129 5.5294 252 NWB 45.3935 63.6691 11817.8494 8766.9899 32.9586 30.856 88.8545 100.5812 63.2340 63.3282 5.5834 5.9480 47.4613 64.2229 266 383 E.NP W.NP 21249.8855 27.7776 108.8366 6.6399 115.0624 NEB 765 64.2736 15993.4223 29.1319 115.5379 6.3081 549 NEP 86.8725 64.1745 21760.5199 27.4408 121.2264 6.6758 793 CEB 118.6371 65.0471 variation in taxonomic distinctness (Lambda+) Average taxonomic distinctness (Delta+) ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)) Margalef species richness (d) No. species (S) bioregion Table 15. Specieslevel taxonomic data: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for bioregional diversity (εscale diversity): species richness (S), Margalef species richness (d), ShannonWiener diversity index (H’(loge)), Average taxonomic distinctness (AvTD or ∆+[Delta+]), Variation in taxonomic distinctness (VarTD or Λ+ [Lambda+]), Average Phylogenetic diversity (Phi+ or φ+), and Total Phylogenetic diversity (sφ+), based on species presence/ absence data for each of the nine bioregions. Average Total phylogenetic phylogenetic diversity diversity (Phi+) (sPhi+) QM Technical Reports | 002 central component, with soft boundary between Mackay and Townsville; (c) a northern component, with one or more minor transitions in the Far Northern GBR, leading to (d) a major transition on the eastern edge (GBR side) of Cape York; and (e) the Coral Sea Territories on the Queensland Plateau with affinities to the western Pacific islands and north-central and southern 52 GBR sponges. Transitions within the GBR are probably driven by endogenous and exogenous current patterns, with a major hard boundary at Cape York that marks the biogeographic boundary between Dampierian and Solanderian Provinces. (3) Tropical northern and western fauna, with several transitions that are not completely resolved by our data: (a) the Gulf of Carpentaria which is markedly different from Torres Strait and Wessel Islands, and likely an ecological rather than biogeographic pattern; (b) a more diffuse species turnover zone in the vicinity of the Wessel Islands; (c) one or more probable transitions west of the Darwin region to the North West Cape region, not well defined by sponge data and certainly less dramatic than transitions on the east coast; (d) a significant boundary in the vicinity of Northwest Cape reflecting the differences between faunas to the north and south, but uncertain whether this is a soft or hard transition requiring significantly more data. Both smaller- and largerscale datasets also show that localities/ bioregions are relatively heterogeneous in terms of both species diversity and community structure, and are at best working hypotheses that incorporate some biogeographic, physical and other data into a model useful for planning and management. A striking example of this is the Great Barrier Reef province, which is presently recognised (at the larger bioregional spatial scale) to contain a single (central) bioregion (NEP) with two transitional ones north and south of it (NEB and CEB, respectively), whereas at the smaller spatial scale it clearly has the capacity to be further subdivided into more functional ecological units – although requiring testing from other phyla datasets and not solely based on sponge data. Thus, a major challenge Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Square Std. Error of the Estimate 1 .248 .062 -.072 .7963 a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b. Dependent Variable: Delta+ ANOvA Model 1 Regression Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig. .292 1 .292 .460 .519 .634 Residual 4.439 7 Total 4.731 8 Table 16. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD) for species-level taxonomic presence-absence data at the bioregional (ε-scale diversity) spatial scale.w a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b. Dependent Variable: Delta+ bioregion S H’(loge) delta+ lambda+ Phi+ sPhi+ CEB 793 6.675823 68.51379 145.6771 33.00778 6106.439 NEP 549 6.308098 68.18301 149.3755 33.75269 5400.431 NEB 765 6.639876 67.12695 148.6735 32.72435 6217.627 E.NP 266 5.583496 65.26415 135.5306 35.66499 3923.149 W.NP 383 5.948035 66.06909 134.3292 33.75701 4624.71 NWB 252 5.529429 66.20178 118.7929 34.61715 4119.441 NWP 386 5.955837 66.98651 137.8045 34.41584 4783.801 CWB 32 3.465736 65.19433 119.6194 48.65634 1167.752 CWP 144 4.969813 63.97436 166.5055 39.44462 3352.793 Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Square Std. Error of the Estimate 1 .029 .001 -.142 1.5712 a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b. Dependent Variable: Delta+ ANOvA Model 1 Sum of Squares Regression df Mean Square F 1.450E-02 1 1.450E-02 .006 Residual 17.281 7 2.469 Total 17.295 8 Sig. .941 Table 17. Genuslevel taxonomic data: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for bioregional (ε-scale diversity) spatial scale based on presence/ absence data for each of the nine bioregions. Refer to Table 7 for key to diversity indices. Table 18. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD) for genuslevel taxonomic presence-absence data at the bioregional (ε-scale diversity) spatial scale. a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b. Dependent Variable: Delta+ 53 QM Technical Reports | 002 Table 19. Familylevel taxonomic data: Taxonomic Distinctness analyses statistics for bioregional (ε-scale diversity) spatial scale based on presence/ absence data for each of the nine bioregions. Refer to Table 7 for key to diversity indices. Table 20. Regression analysis of Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD) for familylevel taxonomic presence-absence data at the bioregional (ε-scale diversity) spatial scale. bioregion S H’(loge) delta+ lambda+ Phi+ sPhi+ CEB 793 6.675823 63.62065 199.8102 38.39704 2649.396 NEP 549 6.308098 63.58688 204.5322 39.41616 2443.802 NEB 765 6.639876 61.97097 195.3575 39.00191 2652.13 E.NP 266 5.583496 57.97985 141.2177 40.60712 1949.142 W.NP 383 5.948035 58.77822 185.0934 38.7641 2093.261 NWB 252 5.529429 58.63446 124.3492 40.60712 1949.142 NWP 386 5.955837 61.98192 157.0176 41.49891 2240.941 CWB 32 3.465736 56.85859 126.8926 45.77947 824.0305 CWP 144 4.969813 56.75602 209.9284 39.93828 1917.038 Regression Model Summary Model R R Square Adjusted R Square Std. Error of the Estimate 1 .476 .227 .116 2.6086495 a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+ ANOvA Model 1 Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig. Regression 13.979 1 13.979 2.054 .195 Residual 47.635 7 6.805 Total 61.615 8 a. Predictors: (Constant), Lambda+. b. Dependent Variable: Delta+ remains to acquire a better knowledge of the distribution and relationships of a whole range of marine phyla in order to assign any confidence levels to the bioregions proposed or supported by this present study, and to test these sponge data with trends seen in other phyla. 4. CONClUSiONS 4.1. Sponge datasets from the QM collections, and augmented by some data of selected taxa (‘surrogate species’) from the NTM, WAM and AIMS collections, were databased, validated (including identifications), mapped (in GIS), and interpreted within a community structure for tropical Australia. ‘Surrogate’ species were originally selected from a set of criteria that focussed on the Northern Planning Area (Gulf of Carpentaria region), based on the bioregional priorities of the 54 National Oceans Office at the outset of this project, but subsequently expanded to include the entire Australian tropical sponge faunas (including comparison with some contiguous faunas in the Indo-Malay Archipelago and the western Pacific islands). These data were unified in a single database (CSIRO ‘Biolink’) using a contemporary higher classification based on a recent major review of the phylum. Where data were unidentified to an Operational Taxonomic Unit (OTU) or species level, they were differentiated using a unique species number identifier with accompanying ‘mudmaps’ (i.e. brief digitized descriptions and illustrations of the major morphological diagnositic characters for each taxon). Although highly desirable, incorporation of the ABIF sponge records (i.e. an on-line database listing all published sponge species in the Australian fauna and their Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 36A. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of species-level taxa for bioregional presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each (ε-scale diversity) bioregion is indicated in brackets. 55 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 36B. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of genus-level taxa for bioregional presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each (ε-scale diversity) bioregion is indicated in brackets. 56 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 36C. Average Taxonomic Distinctness (AvTD or delta +) and Variation in Taxonomic Distinctness (VarTD or lambda +) plots of family-level taxa for bioregional presence-absence data, superimposed on 95% probability ellipses from simulated data for each sublist (M=20-100). Number of species in each (ε-scale diversity) bioregion is indicated in brackets. 57 QM Technical Reports | 002 known distributions) was not possible because these database records are not yet accompanied by locality position coordinates, and therefore not compatible with GIS analysis used in this project (i.e. having only descriptors of type and other locality records). This was a major shortcoming of the current project because it excluded the potentially more extensive sponge distributional data from the published literature, given the stricter (numerical) data standards required for GIS database analyses, and well beyond the resources available for this project. 4.2. Descriptive (i.e. more subjective) and numerical analyses of sponge distribution data showed significant heterogeneity within the Australian tropical coastal and shelf faunas, signifying environmental and/ or historical distribution gradients influencing modern-day distributions. While small numbers of (morpho) species appeared to have extensive distributions across the tropics, or span several adjacent (IMCRA-defined) bioregions, the majority of species occurred in only one of few bioregions, and a number of these were determined to be useful indicators for characterising the regions themselves (i.e. repeating geographic patterns across many taxonomic groups), and thus useful for the processes of bioregionalisation. Some of these patterns are undoubtedly linked to biogeographic trends, including historical distributions such as east-west species pairs, but this aspect was not the focus of the present analysis which considered only the present-day distributions without seeking biotic or abiotic reasons for these observed patterns. It is possible that some of these distributions may serve as useful surrogates for more integrative bioregionalisation analyses in conjunction with other biotic and physical data in GIS analyses. Raw specimen data have been supplied to Geosciences Australia and the National Oceans Office, and periodically updated datasets will be made available upon request as new material is added to the 58 database and taxonomic refinements are made to the sponge dataset. 4.3. Geographic trends deteted initially in the descriptive analyses of sponge distributions were subsequently generally well supported by numerical (biodiversity) analyses. These biodiversity analyses were able to identify a number of prominent sponge localities and transition zones, based on taxonomic richness, diversity and faunistic relationships between sites/ localities/ bioregions, and a bioregional model based on sponge data was presented. Data were analysed in smaller-scale spatial units (localities, groups of collection sites amalgamated into contiguous regions based on similarity and MDS analyses) and also larger scale (bioregions), the latter testing the IMCRA demersal bioregions and providing data to support (or refute) existing boundaries. Conversely, it was not possible within the timeframe of this project, or using the software available, to include the added dimension of depth into GIS or numerical analyses, although CAAB modelled distributions of surrogate ‘key’ species data were compiled and will be freely available on www.ozcam. gov.au. Although a highly desirable outcome of the project, to compare shallow coastal, continental shelf and deeper-water distribution patterns, most existing sponge datapoints comprise coastal or shelf species, most above 50m depth, some to 80m depth, but relatively few yet collected from the continental slope or deeper sea bed, and where these deeper-water collection do exist they are confined to one or few point samples. It was also not possible to include all these data (i.e. actual and CAAB modelled species distributions for individual species, and accompanying morphological ‘mudmap’ descriptions of them) into a single report – which would run into many thousands of figures and pages. This information will be made available on the web via OZCAM. 4.4. Uncertainties (and/or errors) in the Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia sponge database were assessed and qualified in the form of Confidence Limits for particular variables: global position coordinates, depth range distributions, and taxonomic identifications. It is this latter category which still presents the greatest challenges for sponge bioregionalisation and biogeography analyses. Despite recent major advances in the higher systematics of sponges the task of discriminating species-level relationships remains a major impediment in our attempts to combine all available sponge datasets (held in Australian museums and other marine collection agencies), into a single accessible (and meaningful) database. The further development and utilisation of ‘mudmaps’ (i.e. to allow non-specialists to participate in future sponge distributional mapping), and an arbitrary species numbering system (i.e. that would differentiate each (morpho)species as unique) will provide an interim mechanism to discriminate species-level taxa (OTUs) as the ‘same or different’ across all collections from the Australian tropical bioregions – irrespective of whether or not species yet have scientific names applied to them – while awaiting the arduous task of formally describing the very many species known to live in the Australian fauna. It is anticipated that this system (or something similar) will be adopted by current and future workers studying this fauna, once it is made available on-line via OZCAM, and thus progress the concept of a national sponge taxonomic database. Using this technique the distribution database for all sponge taxa has the potential ability to be expanded across all continental and territorial waters provided that adequate resources become available, and institutions make an appropriate commitment, to document existing collections (particularly southern Australian museums), and to capture their data in a digital format that complies with the present data standards (as a minimum). The other major limitation with respect to existing sponge datasets includes an incomplete geographical gap in our knowledge of several significant faunas: in particular the Great Australian Bight (GABB bioregion), the southern part of the south west coast of Western Australia (SWP bioregion), and most deeper water faunas (off the continental shelf). Existing data for these are patchy or nonexistent, or where collections of these do exist they have not yet been adequately worked up to an acceptable taxonomic level that would enable differentiation at the species (or OTU) level. A discussion of current strengths and weaknesses in our present sponge knowledge and the collections, analysed in the context of both taxonomic and geographic coverage, is provided in Hooper & Wiedenmayer (1994) and ABIF-Fauna (2004), although significant collections have been acquired of the northeast coast and adjacent western Pacific island faunas since 1994. 4.5. The use of Australian sponge data as models for the bioregionalisation of coastal and shelf faunas, with some biogeographic interpretation applied to analyses, has been demonstrated in several earlier studies at small (point sample) and larger (continental) scales of diversity, identifying areas of heterogeneity and some environmental correlates. As noted in these earlier analyses, sponge distributions do not necessarily conform to those of other marine phyla – such as molluscs, echinoderms, scleractinian corals, tunicates – with possible reasons including their different dispersal and recruitment strategies, non temperature dependence for reproduction (cf. scleractinian corals), short larval mobility and longevity etc. In any case, inclusion of Phylum Porifera in marine bioregionalisation (and biogeographic) analysis provides an alternative perspective to traditional concepts of marine distributions. Sponge data have also been used during the initial phase of identifying representative areas in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority’s Representative Areas Program (non-reef areas) for the GBR 59 QM Technical Reports | 002 World Heritage Area bioregionalisation (http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au/), although the fundamental dataset was deficient and these deficiencies are now being addressed through the GBR Seabed Biodiversity Mapping Project (http:// www.reef.crc.org.au/resprogram/ programC/seabed/index.htm). In contrast, the present analysis applied a much larger dataset to the tropical Australian fauna (including subtropical and temperate overlap zones), using GIS mapping tools, and numerical (biodiversity) analysis that provided some level of biological interpretation beyond mere ‘dots on maps’. Shortcomings in the present analysis, as noted above, include: the lack of analysis of depth-related distributions (although CAAB distributions for key surrogate species were modelled but not interpreted (in Appendix 7), and data for deeper-water faunas are generally poor in existing datasets); and omission of published species distributions due to the non-GIS compliant format of the existing ABIF database (www.environment.gov.au/ biodiversity/abrs/online-resources/ abif/fauna/afd/PORIFERA/), both of which were both beyond the scope of software and resources available for this particular project. In addition, some interpretation of the application of biodiversity/ bioregional data analyses at small spatial scales to marine management and reserve design was made by Hooper & Kennedy (2002) concerning critical marine reserve size as being inclusive of genetic diversity. 4.6. Scope for the further interpretation of sponge data in future GIS analyses includes: (1) the differential depth distribution profiles across continental shelf and slope – although existing data are patchy at best; and (2) more comprehensive GIS and numerical analyses of species turnover across the tropical gradient, especially at the major transition zones identified here, and also for east-west species pairs identified in this study. This latter aspect will help define more precisely 60 the boundaries between the major bioregions. 4.7. One major anticipated outcome of the current project is the likelihood that the current database will develop into a national marine sponge dataset on the OZCAM web site, as part as Australia’s commitment to the Global Biodiversity Information Facility (GBIF) as a partnership between the QM, AIMS, MAGNT and WAM. As noted, institutional commitment and some additional institutional (and other) resources will be required to complete this project, including incorporation of the ABIF data into a GIS database. 5. ACKNOWlEdgEMENTS The authors are most grateful to the following for their invaluable assistance during the many facets of this project. Dr Belinda Alvarez de Glasby (Museums and Art Galleries of the Northern Territory, Darwin) for providing data points of key taxa from the MAGNT collections for the OZCAM database. Dr Chris Battershill, Mr Casten Wolff and Ms Libby Evans-Illidge (Australian Institute of Marine Science, Townsville) for providing data points of key taxa from the AIMS collections for the OZCAM database. Dr Jane Fromont (Western Australian Museum, Perth) for providing data points of key taxa from the WAM collections for the OZCAM database. Dr Tony Rees (CSIRO Marine & Atmospheric Research, Hobart), for producing numerous CAAB modelled distribution maps of surrogate sponge species, that will be placed on-line with the sponge data on OZCAM. Staff of the former National Oceans Office, Hobart, now Marine Division, Department of Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts, Canberra (in particular Dr Sally Troy, Dr Vicki Nelson, Mr Adam Jagla, Ms Miranda Carver), for funding and assistance during the course of this project, and members of the National Bioregionalisation Working Group for useful comments and discussions on marine bioregionalisation. Staff of the Biodiversity Program, Queensland Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Museum, for assistance with updating and ground-truthing the sessile marine database and digitizing ‘mudmaps’ (Ms Andrea Crowther, Ms Michela Mitchell, Dr Monika Schlacher). Dr Rob Van Soest (University of Amsterdam) and Dr Gary Poore (Museum Victoria) for their most useful comments and suggestions during the referee process. 6. REFERENCES ABIF-Fauna. (2004). (www. e n v i r o n m e n t.g o v.a u /biodiversity/ abrs/online-resources/abif/fauna/afd/ PORIFERA/)l. 2004. Battershill, CN & Bergquist, PR (1990). The influence of storms on asexual reproduction, recruitment, and survivorship of sponges. In Rützler, K (ed.) New Perspectives in Sponge Biology, pp. 397-403. (Smithsonian Institution Press: Washington D.C.). Clarke, KR. & Gorley, RN (2001). Primer v5: User Manual/ Tutorial. (Primer-E: Plymouth.) Clarke, KR & Warwick, RM (1998). A taxonomic distinctness index and its statistical properties. Journal of Applied Ecology 35: 523-531. Clarke, KR & Warwick, RM (2001). A further biodiversity index applicable to species lists: variation in taxonomic distinctness. Marine Ecology Progress Series 216: 265-278. Clifford, HT & Stephenson, W (1975). An Introduction to Numerical Classification. (Academic Press: New York). Colwell, R. K. (2004). EstimateS: Statistical estimation of species richness and shared species from samples. Version 7. User’s Guide and application published at: http:// purl.oclc.org/estimates. (University of Connecticut: Storrs, CT 06869-3043, USA) Colwell, RK & Coddington, J.A. (1994). Estimating terrestrial biodiversity through extrapolation. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society (Series B) 345: 101-118. Davie, PJF & Hooper, JNA (1998). Patterns of biodiversity in the marine invertebrate and fish communities of Moreton bay. In: Tibbets, IR, Hall, NJ & Dennison, WD (eds.) Moreton Bay and Catchment. pp. 331-346. (University of Queensland Press: Brisbane). Davis, AR, Ayre, DJ, Billingham, MR, Styan, CA & White, GA (1996). The encrusting sponge Halisarca laxus: population genetics and association with the ascidian Pyura spinifera. Marine Biology 126: 27-33. Epp, L (2003). Phylogeographie Indo-Pazifischer Leucettidae (Porifera: Calcarea). Diplomarbeit. Abteilung Geobiologie. (Georg-AugustUniversität Göttingen: Germany). Faulkner, J (2002). Marine natural products. Natural Products Reports 19: 1-48. Fromont, J (1999). Demosponges of the Houtman Abrolhos. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 44: 175-184. Gray, JS (2001). Marine diversity: the paradigms in patterns of species richness examined. Scientia Marina 65 (Suppl. 2): 41-56. Hooper, JNA (1994). Coral reef sponges of the Sahul Shelf - a case for habitat preservation. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 36: 93-106. Hooper, JNA & Kennedy, JA (2002). Small-scale patterns of sponge biodiversity (Porifera) on Sunshine Coast reefs, eastern Australia. Invertebrate Systematics 16: 637-653. Hooper, JNA, Kennedy, JA, ListArmitage, SE, Cook, SD & Quinn, R (1999). Biodiversity, species composition and distribution of marine sponges in northeast Australia. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 44: 263-274. Hooper, JNA, Kennedy, JA & Quinn, RJ (2002). Biodiversity ‘hotspots’, patterns of richness and endemism, 61 QM Technical Reports | 002 and taxonomic affinities of tropical Australian Sponges (Porifera). Biodiversity and Conservation 11: 851885. Hooper, JNA & Lévi, C (1994). Biogeography of Indo-west Pacific sponges: Microcionidae, Raspailiidae, Axinellidae. In Soest, RWM Van, Kempen, TMG, Van & Braekman, J-C (eds.), Sponges in Time and Space, pp. 191-212. (Balkema: Rotterdam). Hooper, JNA & Wiedenmayer, F (1994). Porifera. In Wells, A. (ed.) Zoological Catalogue of Australia, pp. 1-624. (CSIRO Australia: Melbourne). Izsak, C & Price, ARG (2001). Measuring β-diversity using a taxonomic similarity index, and its relation to spatial scale. Marine Ecology Progress Series 215: 69-77. Kohn, AJ (1997). Why are coral reef communities so diverse ? In Ormond, RFG, Gage, JD & Angel, MV (eds.) Marine Biodiversity: Patterns and Processes, pp. 201-215. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). Larcombe, P, Carter, RM, Dye, J, Gagan, MK & Johnson, DP (1995). New evidence for episodic post-glacial sealevel rise, central Great Barrier Reef, Australia. Marine Geology 127: 1-44. Munro, MHG, Blunt, JW, Dumdei, EJ, Hickford, SJH., Lill, RE, Li, S, Battershill, CN & Duckworth, A. R. (1999). The discovery and development of marine compounds with pharmaceutical potential. Journal of Biotechnology 70: 15-25. O’Hara, TD & Poore, GCB (2000). Patterns of distribution for Southern Australian marine echinoderms and decapods. Journal of Biogeography 27(6): 1321-1335 Roberts, DE & Davis, AR (1996). Patterns in sponge (Porifera) assemblages on temperate coastal reefs off Sydney, Australia. Marine and Freshwater Research 47: 897-906. Soest, RWM Van (1994). Demosponge distribution patterns. In Soest, RWM 62 Van, Kempen, TMG Van & Braekman, J-C (eds.), Sponges in Time and Space, pp. 213-224 (Balkema: Rotterdam). Usher, KM, Sutton, DC, Toze, S, Kuo, J & Fromont, J (2004). Biogeography and phylogeny of Chondrilla species (Demospongiae) in Australia. Marine Ecology Progress Series 270: 117127. Warwick, RM & Clarke, KR (1998). Taxonomic distinctness and environmental assessment. Journal of Applied Ecology 35: 532-543. Warwick, RM & Clarke, KR (2001). Practical measures of marine biodiversity based on relatedness of species. In: Gibson, RN, Barnes, M & Atkinson, RJA (eds) Oceanography and Marine Biology: an Annual Review. Vol. 39, pp. 207-231 (Taylor & Francis: London). Wilkinson, CR & Cheshire, AC (1989). Patterns in the distribution of sponge populations across the central Great Barrier Reef. Coral Reefs 8: 127-134. Wilson, BR & Allen, GR (1987). Major components and distribution of marine fauna. In Dyne, GR & Walton, DW (eds.), Fauna of Australia. General Articles. 1A, pp. 43-68. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra). Wörheide, G (1998). The reef cave dwelling ultraconservative coralline demosponge Astrosclera willeyana Lister 1900 from the Indo-Pacific. Micromorphology, ultrastructure, biocalcification, isotope record, taxonomy, biogeography, phylogeny. Facies 38: 1-88. Wörheide, G, Degnan, BM, Hooper, JNA & Reitner, J (2002a). Phylogeography and taxonomy of the Indo-Pacific reef cave dwelling coralline demosponge Astrosclera willeyana - new data from nuclear internal transcribed spacer sequences. In Moosa, KM, Soemodihardjo, S, Soegiarto, A, Romimohtarto, K, Nontji, A, Soekarno & Suharsono (eds.), Proceedings of the 9th International Coral Reef Symposium, pp. 339-346. Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia (Ministry for Environment, Indonesian Institute of Sciences, International Society for Reef Studies: Jakarta). Wörheide, G, Hooper, JNA & Degnan, BM (2002b). Phylogeography of western Pacific Leucetta ‘chagosensis’ (Porifera: Calcarea) from ribosomal DNA sequences: implications for population history and conservation of the Great Barrier Reef World Heritage Area (Australia). Molecular Ecology 11: 1753-1768. Wörheide, G, Solé-Cava, A & Hooper, JNA (2005). Molecular marine biodiversity and ecology of sponges: patterns, implications and outlooks. Journal of Integrative and Comparative Biology 45(2): 377-385. Zea, S (1993). Recruitment of demosponges (Porifera, Demospongiae) in rocky and coral reef habitats of Santa Marta, Colombian Caribbean. Marine Ecology 14: 1-21. Zea, S (2002). Patterns of sponge (Porifera, Demospongiae) distribution in remote oceanic reef complexes of the southwestern Carribbean. Revista de la Academia Colombiana de Ciencias Exactas, Físicas y Naturales 25: 579592. 63 QM Technical Reports | 002 APPENdiX 1. list of sponge species chosen as a subset of the entire sponge database as surrogates for the present analysis, representing a collaborative study between Australian sponge collection and research institutions (QM, AIMS, MAgNT, WAM). Refer to Appendix 7 for PdF file of CAAb modelled species distributions for each of these surrogate species. 64 Family genus and Species Author Petrosiidae Dysideidae Iotrochotidae Neopetrosia exigua Dysidea herbacea Iotrochota baculifera Axinellidae Cymbastela stipitata ) Tetillidae Petrosiidae Ianthellidae Microcionidae Aplysinidae Isodictyidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Thorectidae Cinachyrella australiensis Xestospongia testudinaria Ianthella basta Clathria (Thalysias) reinwardti Aplysina ianthelliformis Coelocarteria singaporensis Trikentrion labelliforme Reniochalina stalagmitis Clathria (Wilsonella) tuberosa Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina Axinella 26 Phyllospongia lamellosa (Kirkpatrick 1900) (Keller) 1889 Ridley 1884 (Bergquist & Tizard, 1967 (Carter) 1886 (Lamarck) 1814 (Pallas) 1776 Vosmaer, 1880 (Lendenfeld) 1888 (Carter) 1883 Hentschel, 1912 Lendenfeld, 1888 (Bowerbank, 1875) (Lamarck, 1814) Microcionidae Clathria (Thalysias) lendenfeldi Chalinidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Halichondriidae Thorectidae Niphatidae Raspailiidae Tedaniidae Desmoxyidae Clionaidae Clionaidae Microcionidae Clionaidae Microcionidae Ianthellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Rhabderemiidae Axinellidae Haliclona cymaeformis Echinodictyum mesenterinum Raspailia (Raspailia) vestigifera Axinella 35 Halichondria stalagmites Thorectandra excavata Gelliodes ibulatus Raspailia (Raspaxilla) compressa Tedania anhelans Myrmekioderma granulata Speciospongia vagabunda Speciospongia cf. vagabunda Clathria (Isociella) eccentrica Cliona orientalis Antho_(Acarnia) ridleyi ) Ianthella labelliformis Phakellia carduus Axinella 112 Echinodictyum nidulus Clathria (Thalysias) abietina Reniochalina 122 Phakellia 129 Rhabderemia sorokinae Phakellia 131 Raspailiidae Echinodictyum asperum Phloeodictyidae Spirastrellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Oceanapia 135 Spirastrella 150 Echinodictyum cancellatum Axinella aruensis (Esper) 1794 Ridley & Dendy, 1886 (Esper) 1794 (Lamarck, 1814) Dendy, 1896 (Hentschel) 1912 (Ridley) 1884 (Carter) 1881 Bergquist, 1970 (Schmidt) 1862 (Esper) 1830 Ridley 1884 Ridley 1884 (Burton, 1934) Thiele, 1900 (Hentschel, 1912 (Pallas) 1766 (Lamarck, 1814) Hentschel, 1911 (Lamarck, 1814) Hooper 1990 (Ridley & Dendy, 1886) (Lamarck, 1814) Hentschel, 1912 Sp # (Mudmap #) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 34 35 39 51 53 54 56 63 78 86 93 97 99 104 107 112 120 121 122 129 130 131 133 135 150 152 153 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Crellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Druinellidae Ianthellidae Mycalidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Clionaidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Darwinellidae Darwinellidae Dysideidae Raspailiidae Desmacellidae Axinellidae Dictyonellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Crella spinulata Axinella 156 Reniochalina 172 Pseudoceratina 190 Ianthella cf. labelliformis Mycale (Mycale) cf. ridleyi Clathria (Thalysias) darwinensis Ectyoplasia tabula Pione hixoni Raspailia (Clathriodendron) arbuscula Axinella 217 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) darwinensis Dendrilla rosea Aplysilla sulphurea Dysidea 229 Raspailia_(Parasyringella) nuda Neoibularia irata Phakellia 244 Rhaphoxya cf. pallida Axinella 254 Clathria (Thalysias) coppingeri Spongiidae Rhopaloeides odorabile Thorectidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Callyspongiidae Desmacididae Mycalidae Chondrosiidae Microcionidae Spongiidae Axinellidae Theonellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Fascaplysinopsis reticulata Raspailia (Clathriodendron) melanorhopsa Axinella 267 Callyspongia (Cladochalina) cf. mannus Iotrochota coccinea Mycale (Arenochalina) mirabilis Psammoclema 271 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) intermedia Hyattella intestinalis Reniochalina 275 Theonella swinhoei Reniochalina 285 Reniochalina 287 Raspailiidae Thrinacophora cervicornis Microcionidae Desmacididae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Niphatidae Axinellidae Geodiidae Ancorinidae Axinellidae Plakinidae Microcionidae Dictyonellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Desmoxyidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Clathria (Thalysias) hesperia Phoriospongia 293 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) desmoxyiformis Clathria (Thalysias) cancellaria Endectyon thurstoni Niphates 307 Axinella 308 Pachymatisma 311 Stelletta clavosa Reniochalina 315 Plakortis (Dercitopsis) cf. mammillaris Clathria (Thalysias) procera Stylissa Flabelliformis Phakellia dendyi Raspailia (Raspaxilla) wardi Higginsia scabra Axinella 346 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) kerontria Reniochalina 352 (Hentschel) 1911 (Pallas) 1776 (Lendenfeld) 1888 Hooper, 1996 (Lamarck, 1814) Lendenfeld 1886 (Lendenfeld, 1888) Hooper, 1991 Lendenfeld, 1883 Schulze 1878 Hentschel, 1911 Wilkinson 1978 Ridley, 1884 Thompson, Murphy, Bergquist & Evans, 1987 (Hentschel) 1912 Hooper, 1991 (Lendenfeld) 1887 (Carter) 1886 (Lendenfeld) 1887 (Whitelegge, 1902) (Lamarck) 1814 Gray 1868 Ridley & Dendy, 1887 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1991 (Lamarck, 1814) (Dendy, 1887) Sollas 1888 (Lendenfeld) 1906 (Ridley, 1884) (Hentschel) 1912 Bergquist, 1970 Hooper, 1991 Whitelegge 1907 Hooper, 1991 154 156 172 190 196 203 208 210 213 216 217 218 221 224 229 230 243 244 252 254 259 262 264 265 267 268 269 270 271 272 274 275 280 285 287 288 292 293 298 300 304 307 308 311 313 315 326 329 336 339 341 343 346 350 352 65 QM Technical Reports | 002 66 Axinellidae Microcionidae Pseudoceratinidae Microcionidae Desmoxyidae Iotrochotidae Petrosiidae Callyspongiidae Callyspongiidae Tetillidae Microcionidae Suberitidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Tetillidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Hymedesmiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Clionaidae Tedaniidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Reniochalina 353 Holopsamma laminaefavosa Clathria (Thalysias) hallmanni Higginsia Mixta Iotrochota 377 Xestospongia Bergquistia Callyspongia (Callyspongia) carens Callyspongia (Euplacella) 387 Cinachyrella enigmatica Antho (Antho) tuberosa Aaptos aaptos Axinella 412 Phakellia stelliderma Raspailia_(Parasyringella) australiensis Cinachyrella 415 Raspailia (Raspaxilla) reticulata Reniochalina cf.stalagmitis Phakellia 418 Echinodictyum conulosum Hamigera Strongylata Clathria (Isociella) skia Clathria (Wilsonella) australiensis Clathria (Clathria) rubens Cliona patera Tedania 433 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) barba Raspailia (Raspailia) phakellopsis Clathria (Clathria) conectens Acarnidae Acarnus bergquistae Chondropsidae Axinellidae Psammoclema chaliniformis Axinella 444 Axinellidae Axinella labellata Axinellidae Phakellia 447 Carter, 1885 Pseudoceratina 364 353 359 364 Hooper, 1996 (Hentschel) 1912 Fromont 1991 Pulitzer-Finali 1982 (Burton 1934) (Hentschel, 1911) Schmidt 1864 Levi & Levi 1989 Ridley, 1884 Hooper, 1991 Lendenfeld, 1888 Kieschnick, 1900 Burton 1934 Hooper, 1996 (Carter, 1885) (Lendenfeld, 1888) (Hardwicke) 1822 (Lamarck, 1814) Hooper, 1991 (Hallmann, 1912) Van Soest, Hooper and Hiemstra 1991 (Lendenfeld) 1889 (Ridley & Dendy, 1886) 372 374 377 383 386 387 390 393 406 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 426 427 430 431 432 433 434 437 440 441 443 444 445 447 Hooper & Levi, 1993 (Whitelegge, 1906) Microcionidae Clathria (Thalysias) hirsuta Microcionidae Axinellidae Callyspongiidae Agelasidae Tedaniidae Axinellidae Dictyonellidae Axinellidae Clathria (Axosuberites) canaliculata Ptilocaulis 454 Callyspongia 456 Agelas gracilis Tedania 462 Axinella 463 Rhaphoxya cf. pallida Axinella 467 Microcionidae Holopsamma pluritoxa Callyspongiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Dactylia radix Holopsamma crassa Echinoclathria nodosa Echinodictyum austrinus Spirastrellidae Spirastrella papillosa Microcionidae Pseudoceratinidae Microcionidae Echinochalina (Echinochalina) tubulosa (Pulitzer-Finali, 1982) (Lendenfeld) 1888 Carter, 1885 Carter, 1885 Hooper, 1991 Ridley & Dendy 1886 (Hallmann, 1912) Pseudoceratina clavata Pulitzer-Finali 1982 Holopsamma macropora Axinellidae Cymbastela notiaina (Lendenfeld, 1888) Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 Whitelegge 1897 (Dendy) 1896 449 453 454 456 459 462 463 465 467 468 471 476 478 479 480 482 484 493 494 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Trachycladidae Thorectidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Halichondriidae Axinellidae Clathrinidae Spongiidae Axinellidae Dysideidae Axinellidae Mycalidae Crellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Thorectidae Callyspongiidae Niphatidae Thorectidae Petrosiidae Thorectidae Microcionidae Trachycladus laevispirulifer Phyllospongia papyracea Clathria (Dendrocia) pyramida Clathria (Clathria) noarlungae Phakellia 508 Hymeniacidon 509 Cymbastela concentrica Clathrina 519 Spongia hispida Axinella 521 Euryspongia cf. arenaria Cymbastela 524 Mycale (Arenochalina) lammula Crella incrustans Holopsamma ramosa Clathria (Thalysias) cactiformis Echinodictyum clathrioides Clathria (Thalysias) major Echinoclathria leporina Clathria (Thalysias) styloprothesis Clathria (Thalysias) spinifera Amphinomia sulphurea Axinella 559 Axinella 579 Carteriospongia foliascens Siphonochalina deiciens Niphates 586 Aplysinopsis reticulata Petrosia (Petrosia) cf crassa Ledenfeldia plicata Clathria (Thalysias) toxifera Raspailiidae Echinodictyum rugosum Phloeodictyidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Dysideidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Thorectidae Axinellidae Verticillitidae Astroscleridae Oceanapia ramsayi Clathria (Thalysias) phorbasiformis Clathria (Thalysias) tingens Phakellia 611 Axinella 612 Raspailia_(Parasyringella) elegans Axinella 616 Axinella 620 Dysidea 630 Phakellia 643 Phakellia 646 Phakellia 647 Clathria (Clathria) transiens Luffariella geometrica Phakellia 654 Vaceletia crypta Astrosclera willeyana Acanthochaetidae Acanthochaetetes wellsi Axinellidae Agelasiidae Agelasiidae Axinellidae Dragmacidon 659 Agelas cf. mauritianus Agelas axifera Dragmacidon australis Axinellidae Phakellia pulcherrima Carter 1879 (Esper) 1806 Lendenfeld, 1888 Hooper, 1996 (Lendenfeld, 1887) Lamarck 1814 Bergquist 1961 (Lamarck) 1814 (Carter) 1886 (Hallmann, 1912) (Lamarck, 1814) Hentschel, 1911 Hentschel, 1912 (Lamarck, 1814) Hooper, 1996 (Lindgren, 1897) Hooper, 1991 (Pallas) 1766 Pulitzer-Finali 1982 (Lendenfeld) 1889 (Carter) 1880 Esper 1806 (Hentschel, 1912) Ridley and Dendy, 1886 (Lendenfeld) 1888 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 (Lendenfeld, 1887) Hallmann, 1912 Kirkpatrick 1900 Vacelet 1979 Lister 1900 Hartman & Goreau 1975 Carter 1883 Hentschel 1911 ( Bergquist, 1970) (Ridley & Dendy) 1886 496 500 501 503 508 509 514 519 520 521 522 524 526 537 543 545 546 547 549 551 552 554 559 579 580 582 586 589 590 591 602 603 604 606 610 611 612 613 616 620 630 643 646 647 650 653 654 655 656 657 659 660 661 662 663 67 QM Technical Reports | 002 68 Axinellidae Cymbastela coralliophila Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Dictyonellidae Leucettidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Raspailia (Raspailia) wilkinsoni Endectyon elyakovi Acanthella constricta Pericharax heterorhaphis Antho (Isopenectya) chartacea Clathria (Microciona) aceratoobtusa Ectyoplasia vannus Phakellia 705 Axinella 706 Phakellia 707 Ceratopsion palmata Plocamione pachysclera Dragmacidon 712 Clathria (Microciona) grisea Axinellidae Cymbastela marshae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Mycalidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Plakinidae Axinella 728 Axinella 730 Holopsamma favus Clathria (Axosuberites) 741 Clathria (Axosuberites) patula Mycale (Mycale) pectinicola Clathria (Isociella) selachia Ceratopsion montebelloensis Axinella 766 Axinella 770 Axinella 774 Plakortis nigra Ancorinidae Stelletta splendans Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Thorectidae Ancorinidae Thorectidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Aplysinellidae Microcionidae Axinella 780 Reniochalina 781 Ceratopsion axifera Clathria (Wilsonella) claviformis Clathria (Thalysias) erecta Phakellia 785 Carteriospongia labellifera Melophlus sarassinorum Hyrtios erecta Reniochalina 798 Clathria (Wilsonella) abrolhosensis Axinella 810 Axinella 812 Aplysinella 814 Holopsamma sp._indeterminate_816 Microcionidae Clathria (Thalysias) cf.hirsuta Microcionidae Desmacididae Microcionidae Mycalidae Callyspongiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Chalinidae Axinellidae Clathria (Dendrocia) myxilloides Psammoclema 827 Echinoclathria chalinoides Mycale (Arenochalina) cf. mirabilis Dactylia 833 Clathria (Wilsonella) ensiae Phakellia 844 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) 850 Haliclona (Haliclona) 854 Axinella 859 Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 Hooper, 1991 Hooper, 1991 Pulitzer-Finali 1982 (Polejaeff) 1883 (Whitelegge, 1907) (Carter, 1887) Hooper, 1991 Hooper, 1991 (Levi & Levi) 1983 (Hentschel, 1911) Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 (Carter, 1885) Hooper, 1996 Hentschel 1911 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1991 Levi 1959 (de Laubenfels, 1954) (Hentschel, 1912) Hentschel, 1912 (Thiele, 1899) (Bowerbank) 1877 Thiele 1899 (Keller) 1889 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 Hooper & Levi, 1993 Dendy, 1896 (Carter) 1885 (Lendenfeld) 1887 Hooper, 1996 664 665 666 667 668 670 671 703 705 706 707 709 711 712 714 725 728 730 739 741 741 747 754 761 766 770 774 775 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 788 794 796 798 807 810 812 814 816 821 826 827 828 830 833 838 844 850 854 859 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Tethyidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Tethya 862 Phakellia 863 Axinella 866 Dragmacidon 867 Clathria (Clathria) murphyi Echinoclathria subhispida Axinella 882 Axinellidae Cymbastela hooperi Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Chondrosiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Clathria (Wilsonella) cf.guettardi Echinoclathria riddlei Raspailia (Clathriodendron) cacticutis Clathria (Thalysias) costifera Echinoclathria egena Phoriospongia cf. kirki Phakellia 903 Axinella 905 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) 910 Desmoxyidae Didiscus aceratus Axinellidae Cymbastela cantharella Microcionidae Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) laboutei Callyspongiidae Dictyonellidae Petrosiidae Dictyonellidae Callyspongia 916 Rhaphoxya systremma Xestospongia nigricans Stylissa carteri Microcionidae Clathria (Clathria) kylista Microcionidae Dictyonellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Desmacellidae Suberitidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Dysideidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Clathria (Thalysias) corneolia Stylissa massa Clathria (Thalysias) labellifera Clathria (Thalysias) araiosa Neoibularia hartmani Homaxinella domantayi Axinella 931 Ptilocaulis 932 Dysidea arenaria Phakellia conulosa Raspailia (Parasyringella) 949 Chalinidae Reniera chrysa Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Phloeodictyidae Raspailiidae Rhabderemiidae Raspailiidae Desmacididae Callyspongiidae Microcionidae Coelosphaeridae Ancorinidae Ianthellidae Niphatidae Microcionidae Coelosphaeridae Axinellidae Axinella 955 Auletta 960 Phakellia 961 Clathria (Thalysias) 970 Oceanapia sagittaria Raspailia (Clathriodendron) 973 Rhabderemia indica Axechina raspailoides Desmacidon 980 Callyspongia 981 Clathria (Thalysias) wesselensis Coelocarteria 988 Ancorina 989 Ianthella quadrangulata Amphimedon terpensis Clathria (Thalysias) craspedia Lissodendoryx (Ectodoryx). 1001 Phakellia stipitata (Carter, 1881) Hooper, 1996 Carter, 1885 Van Soest et al 1996 (Topsent, 1933) Hooper, 1996 (Carter, 1885) Hallmann, 1912 Wiedenmayer, 1989 (Bowerbank) 1841 (Ridley & Dendy) 1886 (Levi) 1983 Hooper & Levi, 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 (Lindgren) 1897 (Dendy) 1889 Hooper & Levi, 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 (Carter, 1887) Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 (Levi) 1961 Bergquist 1965 Dendy, 1922 De Laubenfels, 1954 (Sollas) 1902 Dendy 1905 Hentschel, 1912 Hooper 1996 Bergquist 1993 Fromont 1993 Hooper, 1996 862 863 866 867 868 880 882 883 885 894 895 897 901 902 903 905 910 913 914 915 916 919 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 930 931 932 940 948 949 950 955 960 961 970 972 973 976 977 980 981 982 988 989 993 996 997 1001 1004 69 QM Technical Reports | 002 70 Ancorinidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Petrosiidae Niphatidae Chalinidae Microcionidae Chalinidae Niphatidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Stelleta 1005 Ceratopsion clavata Echinochalina (Protophlitaspongia) bargibanti Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) favulosa Phakellia 1013 Phakellia 1014 Axinella 1015 Axinella 1016 Petrosia 1021 Cribrochalina 1023 Haliclona 1031 Clathria (Thalysias) aphylla Haliclona 1043 Gelliodes 1049 Clathria (Thalysias) coralliophila Raspailia_(Parasyringella) 1054 Axinellidae Cymbastela vespertina Niphatidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Niphates 1056 Ptilocaulis epakros Clathria (Clathria) menoui Reniochalina condylia Microcionidae Clathria (Clathria) bulbosa Microcionidae Leucettidae Halichondriidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) tuberosa Leucetta microraphis Hymeniacidon 1066 Clathria (Wilsonella) litos Phakellia mauritiana Clathria (Axosuberites) lambei Clathria (Clathria) laevigata Clathria (Clathria) chelifera Clathria (Clathria) 1074 Clathria (Thalysias) cervicornis Thorectidae Strepsichordaia lendenfeldi Chondropsidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Agelasidae Ancorinidae Dysideidae Phoriospongia 1080 Raspailia (Raspaxilla) 1081 Ptilocaulis fusiformis Raspailia (Raspaxilla) clathrioides Dragmacidon debitusae Ceratopsion clavata Axinella 1089 Agelas mauritiana Rhabdastrella globostellata Dysidea granulosa Tethyidae Tethya australis Callyspongiidae Spongiidae Niphatidae Hymedesmiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Callyspongia 1116 Hippospongia elastica Niphates 1122 Phorbas 1134 Echinoclathria waldoschmitti Ectyoplasia frondosa Raspailia (Raspailia) atropurpurea Raspailia (Raspailia) echinata Raspailia (Raspailia) gracilis Raspailia (Raspailia) pinnatiida Raspailia (Raspailia) tenella Thiele, 1898 Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 (Thiele, 1903) Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper & Levi 1993 Hooper & Levi, 1993 Hooper, 1996 (Haeckel) 1872 Hooper & Levi 1993 Dendy 1921 (Koltun) 1955 Lambe 1893 (Hentschel) 1911 (Thiele, 1903) Bergquist, Ayling & Wilkinson 1988 Levi, 1967 (Levi, 1967) Hooper & Levi 1993 Thiele 1898 Carter 1883 Carter 1883 Bergquist 1965 Bergquist & KellyBorges 1991 (Lendenfeld) 1889 de Laubenfels 1954 (Lendenfeld) 1887 (Carter) 1885 Whitelegge 1907 (Lendenfeld, 1888) (Carter) 1885 (Lendenfeld) 1888 1005 1008 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1021 1023 1031 1040 1043 1049 1051 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1060 1061 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1073 1074 1075 1077 1080 1081 1082 1084 1085 1088 1089 1094 1100 1106 1115 1116 1121 1122 1134 1141 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Irciniidae Callyspongiidae Raspailiidae Irciniidae Chondropsidae Leucettidae Clionaidae Irciniidae Aplysinellidae Clionaidae Aplysinidae Microcionidae Chalinidae Dysideidae Microcionidae Phloeodictyidae Halichondriidae Irciniidae Axinellidae Irciniidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Irciniidae Halichondriidae Axinellidae Ancorinidae Druinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Niphatidae Irciniidae Coelosphaeridae Ancorinidae Thorectidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailia (Raspaxilla) frondula Raspailia (Parasyringella) clathrata Raspailia (Hymeraphiopsis) irregularis Endectyon fruticosa aruensis Endectyon xerampelina Eurypon graphidiophora Ceratopsion dichotoma Cyamon aruense Echinodictyum arenosum Echinodictyum carlinoides Echinodictyum costiferum Echinodictyum lacunosum Psammocinia 1175 Callyspongia (Euplacella) 1176 Echinodictyum 1178 Psammocinia 1181 Psammoclema 1183 Pericharax 1187 Cliona 1189 Psammocinia 1191 Aplysinella 1194 Spheciospongia areolata Aplysina 1198 Holopsamma 1202 Haliclona 1205 Dysidea 1211 Clathria (Wilsonella) 1212 Oceanapia 1220 Halichondria 1227 Ircinia 1228 Dragmacidon 1239 Ircinia 1242 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) 1245 Clathria (Clathria) angulifera Ircinia 1255 Halichondria bergquistae Phakellia 1270 Disyringa (Tribrachion) schmidtii Pseudoceratina 1279 Clathria (Clathria) basilana Phakellia 1285 Cribrochalina 1293 Ircinia 1294 Coelosphaera 1299 Stelleta 1308 Fasciospongia 1318 Ceratopsion aurantiaca Axinella 1333 Axinella 1341 Clathria (Axosuberites) thetidis Clathria (Clathria) striata Holopsamma arborea Holopsamma rotunda Petrosiidae Neopetrosia paciica Callyspongiidae Spongiidae Callyspongiidae Arenosclera 1363 Hyattella 1366 Dactylia 1368 (Whitelegge) 1907 Ridley 1884 Hentschel 1914 (Carter) 1885 (Lamarck) 1814 Hentschel 1911 (Whitelegge) 1907 Hentschel 1912 Dendy 1896 (Lamarck) 1814 Ridley 1884 Kieschnick 1898 (Dendy 1897) Dendy, 1896 Hooper et al. 1995 (Weltner 1882) Levi 1961 (Lendenfeld, 1888) (Hallmann, 1920) Whitelegge, 1907 (Lendenfeld, 1888) (Hallmann, 1912) (Kelly-Borges & Bergquist 1988) 1159 1160 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1175 1176 1178 1181 1183 1187 1189 1191 1194 1195 1198 1202 1205 1211 1212 1220 1227 1228 1239 1242 1245 1246 1255 1269 1270 1274 1279 1280 1285 1293 1294 1299 1308 1318 1328 1333 1341 1342 1343 1344 1358 1362 1363 1366 1368 71 QM Technical Reports | 002 72 Phloeodictyidae Callyspongiidae Callyspongiidae Sycettidae Leucettidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Spongiidae Thorectidae Desmacididae Dysideidae Dysideidae Crellidae Crambeidae Dysideidae Levinellidae Callyspongiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Aka 1373 Siphonochalina 1374 Dactylia 1376 Sycon cf. gelatinosum Leucetta chagosensis Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) bispiculata Aulospongus samariensis Clathria (Microciona) illawarrae Axinella 1490 Axinella 1491 Coscinoderma mathewsi Dactylospongia elegans Liosina paradoxa Dysidea 1519 Dysidea 1524 Crella 1525 Monanchora (Ectyobatzella) 1541 Dysidea 1547 Levinella prolifera Euplacella 1559 Antho (Isopenectya) punicea Reniochalina 1607 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) felixi Echinodictyum 1620 Echinoclathria 1628 Echinoclathria bergquistae Echinoclathria digitata Clathria (Thalysias) fusterna Clathria (Microciona) lizardensis Auletta 1638 Phakellia 1639 Axinella 1640 Endectyon 1641 Reniochalina 1642 Reniochalina 1643 Raspailia (Parasyringella) 1644 Clathria (Axosuberites) 1645 Clathria (Microciona) 1646 Microcionidae Clathria (Microciona) mima Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Cymbastela 1655 Axinella 1659 Clathria (Microciona) 1665 Antho (Isopenectya) saintvincenti Raspailia (Raspailia) 1695 Raspailia (Raspaxilla) 1696 Echinoclathria levii Echinoclathria notialis Echinoclathria parkeri Echinoclathria inornata Echinoclathria confragosa Echinoclathria axinelloides Esperiopsidae Ulosa spongia Phloeodictyidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Aka 1738 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) isaaci Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) collata Clathria (Isociella) 1758 Blainville, 1834 Dendy 1913 (Dendy, 1895) Hooper et al, 1998 Hooper, 1996 (Lindenfeld) 1886 (Thiele) 1899 Theile, 1899 (Dendy) 1913 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 (Lendenfeld, 1888) Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 (de Laubenfels, 1954) Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 (Hallmann) 1912 (Hallmann) 1912 (Dendy, 1896) (de Laubenfels, 1954) Hooper, 1996 Hooper, 1996 1373 1374 1376 1390 1402 1413 1422 1474 1490 1491 1493 1514 1518 1519 1524 1525 1541 1547 1554 1559 1571 1607 1610 1620 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1650 1655 1659 1665 1685 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1702 1703 1728 1738 1754 1755 1758 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Raspailiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Halichondriidae Axinellidae Raspailia (Raspailia) 1761 Clathria (Microciona) 1763 Raspailia_(Parasyringella) 1765 Axinella 1769 Phakellia 1770 Raspailia (Raspailia) 1772 Amorphinopsis 1785 Reniochalina 1795 Microcionidae Clathria (Clathria) faviformis Microcionidae Dysideidae Microcionidae Dysideidae Chalinidae Microcionidae Esperiopsidae Tetillidae Microcionidae Irciniidae Raspailiidae Halichondriidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Niphatidae Irciniidae Chalinidae Microcionidae Holopsamma 1830 Eurospongia deliculata Clathria (Microciona) 1839 Dysidea 1845 Haliclona 1853 Echinoclathria 1855 Ulosa 1856 Cinachyrella 1870 Clathria (Microciona) 1875 Ircinia 1876 Eurypon 1877 Axinyssa 1878 Clathria (Microciona) 1882 Eurypon 1889 Clathria (Microciona) 1890 Clathria (Dendrocia) dura Clathria (Microciona) 1940 Niphates 1943 Ircinia 1944 Halilclona 1954 Clathria (Microciona) 1957 Thorectidae Candidaspongia labellata Podospongiidae Diacarnus levii Niphatidae Spongiidae Halichondriidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Callyspongiidae Niphates 1980 Spongia 1983 Halichondria 1984 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) 1991 Thrinacophora 1993 Echinodictyum 2001 Callyspongia 2022 Druinellidae Aplysinella rhax Microcionidae Axinellidae Clathria (Microciona) 2033 Reniochalina 2036 Microcionidae Clathria (Microciona) richmondi Microcionidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Thorectidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 2057 Axinella 2083 Echinodictyum 2088 Axinella 2108 Clathria (Microciona) 2114 Auletta 2136 Clathria (Microciona) 2145 Axinella 2159 Fascaplysinopsis 2170 Clathria (Microciona) 2176 Clathria (Microciona) 2177 1761 1763 1765 1769 1770 1772 1785 1795 Lehnert & van Soest, 1996 Bergquist, 1995 Whitelegge, 1901 Bergquist, Sorokin & Karusu, 1999 Kelly-Borges & Vacelet 1995 1820 1830 1833 1839 1845 1853 1855 1856 1870 1875 1876 1877 1878 1882 1889 1890 1921 1940 1943 1944 1954 1957 1958 1960 1980 1983 1984 1991 1993 2001 2022 (de Laubenfels, 1954) 2027 2033 2036 Hooper, KellyBorges and Kennedy, 2000 2055 2057 2083 2088 2108 2114 2136 2145 2159 2170 2176 2177 73 QM Technical Reports | 002 74 Niphatiidae Axinellidae Rhabderemiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Desmacididae Microcionidae Cribrochalina 2178 Axinella 2189 Rhabderemia 2195 Phakellia 2202 Axinella 2205 Clathria (Thalysias) 2207 Clathria (Thalysias) 2211 Raspailia (Raspaxilla) 2264 Clathria (Microciona) 2265 Axinella 2267 Axinella 2281 Clathria (Microciona) 2292 Clathria (Microciona) 2295 Clathria (Microciona) 2310 Clathria (Microciona) 2317 Echinodictyum 2319 Clathria (Thalysias) 2322 Aulospongus 2349 Phakellia 2356 Raspailia (Parasyringella) 2357 Clathria (Thalysias) 2373 Clathria (Clathria) 2376 Iotrochota 2386 Clathria (Thalysias) 2413 Raspailiidae Eurypon hispida Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Agelasidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Tetillidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Clathria (Microciona) 2431 Clathria (Thalysias) 2432 Clathria (Thalysias) 2433 Clathria (Thalysias) 2441 Clathria (Clathria) 2454 Agelas 2480 Raspailia_(Parasyringella) 2482 Clathria (Microciona) 2489 Clathria (Thalysias) 2530 Clathria (Axosuberites) nidiicata Clathria (Thalysias) 2583 Cymbastela 2606 Auletta 2613 Echinodictyum 2627 Axinella 2635 Auletta 2636 Tetilla 2655 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) 2688 Clathria (Thalysias) 2692 Clathria (Microciona) 2701 Clathria (Clathria) 2711 Raspailia (Raspailia) 2714 Clathria (Microciona) 2723 Clathria (Axosuberites) 2731 Ceratopsion cf. montebelloensis Phakellia 2755 Echinodictyum 2789 Ptilocaulis 2791 Ptilocaulis 2800 Raspailia_(Parasyringella) 2803 Ceratopsion 2806 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 2819 2178 2189 2195 2202 2205 2207 2211 2264 2265 2267 2281 2292 2295 2310 2317 2319 2322 2349 2356 2357 2373 2376 2386 2413 de Laubenfels, 1954 Kirkpatrick, 1907 Hooper, 1991 2414 2431 2432 2433 2441 2454 2480 2482 2489 2530 2574 2583 2606 2613 2627 2635 2636 2655 2688 2692 2701 2711 2714 2723 2731 2732 2755 2789 2791 2800 2803 2806 2819 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Microcionidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Chondropsidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 2822 Axinella 2823 Ceratopsion 2825 Clathria (Microciona) 2844 Ceratopsion 2846 Ptilocaulis 2856 Ptilocaulis 2866 Aulospongus 2876 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) oxeata Clathria (Isociella) 2897 Axinella 2938 Axinella 2950 Raspailia (Raspailia) 2953 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 2959 Axinella 2962 Ceratopsion 2964 Psammoclema 2980 Raspailia (Raspailia) 3003 Phakellia 3004 Clathria (Clathria) hispidula Cymbastela 3009 Phakellia columnata Cymbastela 3052 Raspailia (Raspailia) 3054 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 3088 Echinodictyum 3089 Reniochalina 3092 Phakellia 3096 Phakellia 3102 Axinella 3108 Raspailia (Raspaxilla) clathrioides Raspailia (Raspailia) 3189 Auletta 3196 Clathria (Dendrocia) 3197 Clathria (Wilsonella) 3214 Axinella 3249 Auletta 3256 Cymbastela 3287 Raspailia (Clathriodendron)) 3311 new genus? 3324 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) 3333 Phakellia 3356 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 3446 Phakellia 3459 Axinella 3461 Raspailia (Raspailia) 3463 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) 3482 Clathria (Clathria) 3488 Ptilocaulis 3490 Dragmacidon 3493 Ceratopsion 3496 Ceratopsion 3520 Raspailia (Clathriodendron) 3554 Raspailia (Raspailia) 3578 Echinoclathria 3587 Clathria (Microciona) 3589 Axinella 3611 (Burton, 1934) (Ridley, 1884) Burton, 1928 (Levi) 1967 2822 2823 2825 2844 2846 2856 2866 2876 2878 2897 2938 2950 2953 2959 2962 2964 2980 3003 3004 3005 3009 3016 3052 3054 3088 3089 3092 3096 3102 3108 3115 3189 3196 3197 3214 3249 3256 3287 3311 3324 3333 3356 3446 3459 3461 3463 3482 3488 3490 3493 3496 3520 3554 3578 3587 3589 3611 75 QM Technical Reports | 002 Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae 76 Phakellia 3612 Cymbastela 3613 Cymbastela 3614 Axinella 3616 Echinoclathria 3617 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 3643 Raspailia (Hymeraphiopsis) 3644 Clathria (Axosuberites) 3678 Clathria (Clathria) biclathria Clathria (Clathria) basilana Clathria (Thalysias) distincta Clathria (Clathria) echinonematissima Microcionidae Clathria (Dendrosia) elegantula Microcionidae Clathria (Axosuberites) macropora Microcionidae Clathria (Clathria) inanchorata Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Clathria (Clathria) meyeri Clathria (Clathria) multipes Clathria (Clathria) nexus Clathria (Clathria) oxyphila Clathria (Clathria) partita Clathria (Clathria) perforata Clathria (Clathria) piniformis Clathria (Clathria) raphana Clathria (Dendrocia) scabida Clathria (Clathria) squalorum Clathria (Clathria) wilsoni Clathria (Dendrocia) imperfecta Microcionidae Clathria (Axosuberites) cylindrica Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Axinellidae Clathria (Isociella) macropora Clathria (Thalysias) arborescens Clathria (Thalysias) aruensis Clathria (Thalysias) calochela Clathria (Thalysias) cratitia Clathria (Thalysias) dubia Clathria (Thalysias) fasiculata Clathria (Thalysias) juniperina Clathria (Thalysias) longitoxa Clathria (Thalysias) nuda Clathria (Thalysias) paucispina Clathria (Thalysias) placenta Clathria (Thalysias) ramosa Clathria (Thalysias) topsenti Clathria (Thalysias) cf. “coralliophila” Clathria (Clathria) arcuophora Clathria (Thalysias) nidiicata Clathria (Clathria) paucispicula Echinochalina (Echinochalina) australiensis Holopsamma elegans Holopsamma simplex Ceratopsion 3762 Echinochalina_(Protophlitapongia) 3763 Cymbastela 3767 Ptilocaulis 3816 Auletta 3817 Cymbastela 3818 Axinella 3832 Hooper, 1992. Levi, 1961 Thiele, 1903 Carter, 1881 Ridley & Dendy, 1886 Ledenfeld 1888 Ridley and Dendy, 1886 Bowerbank 1877 Hallman 1912 Koltun 1964 Hallman 1912 Hallman 1912 Ledenfeld 1887 Carter 1885 Lamark 1813 Carter 1885 Wiedenmayer, 1984 Wiedenmayer 1989 Dendy 1896 Ridley and Dendy 1886 Lendenfeld, 1886 Ridley 1884 Hentschel 1912 Hentschel 1913 Esper 1797 Kirkpatrick 1900 Wilson 1925 Lamark 1814 Hentschel 1912 Hentschel 1912 Ledenfeld 1888 Lamarck 1814 Kieschnick 1896 Thiele 1899 Burton, 1928 Whitelegge 1907 Kirkpatrick (Burton) 1932 Ridley, 1884 Ledenfeld 1888 Ledenfeld 1885 3612 3613 3614 3616 3617 3643 3644 3678 3684 3689 3690 3691 3692 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3705 3706 3709 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3723 3725 3728 3730 3731 3732 3735 3736 3737 3743 3744 3747 3752 3753 3762 3763 3767 3816 3817 3818 3832 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Axinellidae Rhabderemiidae Rhabderemiidae Microcionidae Raspailiidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Microcionidae Reniochalina 3833 Rhabderemia 3834 Rhabderemia 3835 Clathria (Dendrocia) 3837 Raspailia (Raspailia) 3838 Clathria (Isociella) 3840 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 3843 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) 3844 Clathria (Clathria) cf. paucispicula Clathria (Thalysias) rubra Burton 1932 Lendenfeld 1888 3833 3834 3835 3837 3838 3840 3843 3844 3946 3947 APPENdiX 2.A. Similarities between larger scale (ε-scale diversity) IMCRA bioregions, indicating pairwise comparisons in the number of species co-occurring in both bioregion (upper part of matrix), the total number of species co-occurring in both bioregion (diagonal, bold font), and percentage of species co-occurring in both bioregion (lower part of matrix). bioregion NEB CEB NEP NWP W.NP E.NP NWB CWP CWB NEb CEb NEP NWP W.NP E.NP NWb CWP CWb 766 10.32 10.91 3.06 3.32 3.54 2.91 1.33 0.18 280 791 9.73 2.43 2.47 2.43 2.28 1.18 0.18 90 67 65 138 387 4.05 4.05 1.22 0.37 79 62 58 112 110 84 250 1.07 0.37 36 32 27 58 33 31 29 145 0.41 5 5 5 16 10 7 10 11 33 296 264 548 1.99 2.39 2.14 2.14 0.99 0.18 83 66 54 391 5.08 3.57 4.13 2.14 0.59 96 66 58 97 110 271 0.31 1.14 0.26 77 No. % unique unique species species No. genera No. unique genera % unique genera 69 66 4 6 18 28 33 1 3 42 12 29 22 0 0 84 239 73 31 78 3 4 Sunshine Coast (Mooloolaba to Noosa) , Qld 26 238 61 26 92 1 1 6 24°30’ - 26°00’ S 152°00’ - 154°00’ E CEB Hervey Bay – Fraser Island region, Qld 31 111 15 14 39 1 3 7 23°00’ - 24°30’ S 151°30’ - 153°00’ E NEP Capricorn-Bunkers to Keppel Is, Southern section GBR, Qld 72 410 157 38 118 5 4 8 21°30’ - 23°00’ S 151°00’ - 153°00’ E NEP Swain Reefs, outer Southern section GBR, Qld 70 329 55 17 93 1 1 9 149°-151°00’ E NEP Northumberland Islands Group, Southern section GBR, Qld 1 36 7 19 29 0 0 10 20°00’ - 21°00’ S 148°00’ - 149°30’ E NEP Whitsunday Is. , Central section GBR, Qld 52 189 71 38 69 0 0 11 20°30’ - 21°30’ S 149°50’ - 151°50’ E NEP Pompey Reefs, outer Southern section GBR, Qld 11 162 19 12 77 0 0 12 18°00’ - 20°00’ S 146°00’ - 150°50’ E NEP Townsville region (Orpheus, Palm, Slashers, Myrmedon, Broadhurst, Hook, Old, Stanley Rfs) – Central section GBR, Qld 127 325 95 29 77 0 0 13 16°30’ - 18°00’ S 145°30’ - 147°00’ E NEB Cairns region (Batt, Oyster, Sudbury, Opal Rfs) – Cairns section GBR, Qld 73 143 26 18 65 3 5 14 16°00’ - 16°30’ S 145°20’ - 146°30’ E NEB Low Islets – Cairns section GBR, Qld 34 157 36 23 62 1 2 longitude range iMCRA bioregion name locality Name No sites sampled in this locality No. species 1 33°00’ - 35°00’ S 150°00’ - 154°00’ E CEP Sydney, Illawarra, Newcastle regions, NSW 41 178 123 2 28°05’ - 29°00’ S 153°30’ - 154°30’ E CEB Northern NSW – Byron Bay region, NSW 9 64 3 27°50’ - 28°05’ S 153°00’ - 154°30’ E CEB Gold Coast – Tweed River to S. Stradbroke I., Qld 9 4 26°50’ - 27°50’ S 153°00’ - 154°00’ E CEB Moreton Bay, Stradbroke & Moreton Islands, Qld 5 26°00’ - 26°50’ S 153°00’ - 154°00’ E CEB local. No. latitude range 21°30’-22°20’ S QM Technical Reports | 002 78 APPENDIX 2 B. Small scale (γ-scale diversity) localities sampled for sponges in northern Australia extending into temperate/ transitional faunal zones. ‘Unique’ species and genera refer to taxa found only within a particular locality. 15 14°00’ - 16°00’ S 144°30’ - 146°00’ E NEB Lizard, Direction Is, Ribbon, NoName, Yonge Rfs – Cairns section GBR, Qld 131 503 171 34 104 1 1 16 13°30’ - 16°00’ S 146°30’ - 147°30’ E Coral Sea Northern section Queensland Plateau, Coral Sea -Osprey, Bougainville Rfs 22 106 45 42 51 0 0 17 20°00’ - 23°00’ S 153°00’ - 157°00’ E Coral Sea Southern section Queensland Plateau, Coral Sea - Wreck, Cato, Saumarez Reefs 17 101 27 27 62 1 2 18 11°00’ - 14°30’ S 142°30’ - 144°30’ E NEB Far Northern section GBR (Cockburn, Flinders, Howick Rfs, Turtle Group, Shelburne Bay) , Qld 80 196 35 18 71 1 1 Torres Straits region, Qld 69 150 54 36 41 0 0 E.NP East Gulf of Carpentaria, Qld 49 94 13 14 56 1 2 21 15°00’ - 18°00’ S 135°00’ - 142°00’ E E.NP South Gulf of Carpentaria, Qld/ NT 37 85 23 27 31 0 0 22 13°00’ - 15°00’ S 135°00’ - 139°00’ E E.NP 40 53 11 21 27 0 0 23 12°00’ - 13°00’ S 135°00’ - 138°00’ E E.NP Gove region, NT 17 39 0 0 25 0 0 24 10°45’ - 12°00’ S 135°00’ - 137°00’ E E.NP Wessel Islands, NT 133 315 69 22 116 3 3 25 10°45’ - 13°00’ S 130°00’ - 135°00’ E W.NP Darwin and Cobourg Peninsula regions, NT 148 418 177 42 111 1 1 26 13°00’ - 15°30’ S 127°00’ - 130°30’ E NWB Joseph Bonaparte Gulf, NT/WA 13 13 0 0 17 0 0 27 13°00’ - 15°30’ S 124°10’ - 127°00’ E NWB Bonaparte Archipelago, WA 16 26 0 0 9 0 0 28 15°25 - 18°00’ S 121°00’ - 125°30’ E NWB Broome region, Northwest Shelf, WA 19 99 25 25 48 3 6 29 11°00’ - 13°30’ S 122°00’ - 124°10’ E Sahul Shelf N Sahul Shelf (Ashmore, Cartier, Hibernia Reefs) 30 125 39 31 77 2 3 30 17°00’ - 18°00’ S 118°45’ - 119°45’ E Sahul Shelf S Sahul Shelf (Rowley Shoals) 4 5 0 0 20 2 10 31 18°00’ - 22°30’ S 115°00’ - 120°00’ E NWP Dampier and Port Headland regions, Northwest Shelf, WA 179 380 155 41 129 6 5 West Gulf of Carpentaria, NT 32 21°00’ - 23°00’ S 113°00’ - 115°00’ E NWP Exmouth Gulf region, WA 34 88 44 50 16 0 0 33 23°00’ - 27°00’ S 112°00’ - 115°00’ E CWB Shark Bay region, WA 17 50 15 30 38 3 8 34 27°00’ - 29°00’ S 112°00’ - 115°00’ E CWP Houtman Abrolhos, WA 36 173 85 49 49 2 4 79 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 NEB 20 11°00’ - 15°00’ S 139°00’ - 142°30’ E Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia 19 09°30’ - 11°00’ S 141°30’ - 143°30’ E 22.0 Hervey Bay 10.6 8.0 Sunshine Coast 14.3 15.4 23.9 Moreton Bay 22.6 11.8 22.2 Sydney-Illawarra 9.4 7.3 2.3 8.3 N Qld Plateau 0.0 0.0 7.4 11.8 6.9 0.8 S Qld Plateau 1.3 1.5 5.8 12.1 10.3 1.6 13.8 Shark Bay 5.5 6.7 3.8 4.9 4.5 2.0 1.3 1.4 36.2 10.4 Gove region 0.0 0.0 1.6 3.3 1.8 1.2 0.0 0.0 9.5 E Gulf Carpent. 7.9 6.1 8.9 8.6 8.5 1.6 2.0 1.1 8.5 S Gulf Carpent 4.1 1.6 5.1 6.9 5.4 2.5 1.0 6.6 5.9 8.2 29.4 W Gulf Carpent 5.3 2.2 7.4 6.3 6.0 1.0 0.0 2.7 13.6 12.1 26.2 29.0 Wessel Is 3.5 2.1 6.1 8.3 7.4 1.0 3.7 5.3 13.3 14.7 17.7 10.0 Cairns GBR 5.0 2.9 8.6 18.1 13.4 3.2 9.8 20.4 2.7 1.8 7.3 5.4 7.9 9.1 FarN Qld GBR 9.7 7.5 16.4 19.5 17.2 5.4 10.3 13.2 5.1 3.8 19.3 13.9 15.1 13.9 Lizard I GBR 4.6 2.8 12.2 22.1 16.8 3.2 15.8 16.8 3.9 1.3 9.4 6.6 6.2 7.3 22.7 29.5 Low Is GBR 1.0 2.3 12.4 16.5 13.3 1.4 16.0 20.2 5.5 4.2 9.0 6.5 9.8 14.0 25.2 24.5 25.2 Torres Straits 6.2 4.6 16.3 13.6 14.3 2.8 5.0 8.6 6.5 2.7 20.3 20.9 18.1 11.6 17.1 27.0 17.0 13.5 Capricorn GBR 5.8 3.7 16.9 23.5 18.6 3.7 12.2 17.8 3.2 1.0 4.6 5.1 3.2 4.5 18.1 19.1 27.7 17.4 11.9 Northumberland GBR 4.2 2.6 9.6 11.2 9.6 0.0 8.5 13.5 2.3 0.0 4.7 0.0 9.0 6.6 17.8 9.9 8.0 16.8 8.2 8.5 5.7 13.0 28.6 Swains GBR 4.4 4.1 15.9 22.7 19.3 3.5 18.0 21.9 2.8 2.5 4.0 3.6 5.0 6.1 24.8 22.2 35.7 25.3 13.7 37.9 Townsville GBR 4.7 2.2 14.9 24.6 18.5 2.0 19.7 23.8 4.2 2.4 6.0 5.6 5.5 12.2 30.2 29.1 38.1 32.4 18.7 33.2 12.9 15.3 42.0 Whitsundays GBR 4.1 2.3 14.7 17.4 14.9 2.8 13.3 17.2 5.4 2.7 2.6 10.0 5.3 10.5 24.8 21.4 23.7 30.1 17.8 20.3 18.7 26.9 38.0 Pompeys GBR 3.6 3.0 13.2 20.3 15.4 2.5 17.2 25.5 4.7 3.4 4.7 8.1 6.5 9.2 28.4 23.4 27.8 31.4 17.5 32.1 17.2 45.9 43.4 40.4 Broome region 1.4 0.0 5.2 6.3 3.4 0.8 0.0 2.2 14.9 8.2 19.3 10.7 14.6 21.6 4.4 7.8 6.6 7.4 11.0 3.0 1.7 2.6 5.6 6.4 4.9 Bonaparte Arch 0.0 3.8 0.0 1.6 0.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.2 8.0 5.8 8.2 6.2 6.0 1.8 3.8 0.8 1.4 2.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Joseph Bonaparte Gulf 0.0 3.8 0.0 1.6 0.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.2 8.0 5.8 8.2 6.2 6.0 1.8 3.8 0.8 1.4 2.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.2 100.0 Dampier region 2.9 2.1 8.8 10.3 10.3 3.2 2.6 3.6 11.1 3.3 20.0 12.5 11.5 16.9 8.1 18.3 12.1 9.6 15.4 7.9 3.7 8.9 11.6 7.9 7.5 23.7 3.9 Exmouth region 3.8 2.4 3.9 6.5 5.4 1.0 1.3 1.4 25.3 3.4 10.2 4.6 12.2 24.0 6.9 8.4 3.9 6.8 5.6 2.8 7.4 2.9 4.2 5.6 3.9 12.4 7.0 7.0 14.3 N Sahul Shelf 2.2 1.2 12.8 11.8 11.2 2.2 11.3 10.9 6.9 1.5 8.3 5.7 6.8 16.8 13.5 17.0 13.9 14.9 15.4 9.0 6.3 13.1 16.0 16.2 15.4 12.5 2.9 2.9 14.9 4.2 3.9 5.9 S Sahul Shelf 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Houtman Abrolhos 5.3 2.4 4.2 4.4 5.8 6.4 1.7 2.6 20.0 1.4 8.1 5.6 7.7 5.4 1.7 3.6 5.1 3.1 6.0 3.1 1.2 3.2 4.3 3.0 2.7 8.4 1.4 1.4 20.1 12.6 6.3 0.0 Darwin-Cobourg 2.2 1.4 11.5 10.2 10.2 2.6 3.2 4.1 7.6 4.9 20.5 13.8 10.7 16.4 4.9 15.9 14.0 12.2 15.8 8.2 4.6 10.0 13.9 13.6 9.7 19.6 3.9 3.9 34.2 9.5 18.9 0.0 10.7 APPENDIX 3. Jaccard Similarity index (%) for pairwise comparisons between small scale (γ-scale diversity) localities sampled for sponges in northern Australia (including temperate transitional zones) Houtman Abrolhos S Sahul Shelf N Sahul Shelf Exmouth Dampier Joseph Bonaparte Gulf Bonaparte Arch Broome Pompeys GBR Whitsundays GBR Townsville GBR Swains GBR Nth’land GBR Capricorn GBR Torres Straits Low Is GBR Lizard I GBR Far N Qld GBR Cairns GBR Wessel Is W Gulf Carpent S Gulf Carpent E Gulf Carpent Gove region Shark Bay S Qld Plateau N Qld Plateau Sydney-Illawarra Moreton Bay Sunshine Coast Hervey Bay Gold Coast Byron Bay LOCALITY Byron Bay Gold Coast APPENdiX 4. list of species occurring in four or more tropical Australian bioregions. NEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 NEb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 E.NP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 W.NP 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 NWb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 NWP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CWb 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 T o t a l CWP bioregions 1 9 1 8 1 8 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 1 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 1 7 0 7 0 7 1 7 0 7 0 7 1 6 0 6 1 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 81 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 CEb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia SpeciesName Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina (Lamarck, 1814) Echinodictyum mesenterinum (Lamarck, 1814) Spheciospongia papillosa (Ridley & Dendy, 1886) Acanthella cavernosa Dendy, 1922 Cinachyrella australiensis (Carter, 1886) Dysidea cf.avara (Schmidt, 1862) Echinodictyum asperum (Ridley & Dendy, 1886) Higginsia mixta (Hentschel, 1912) Hyattella intestinalis (Lamarck, 1814) Ianthella basta (Pallas, 1776) Ianthella cf.flabelliformis (Pallas, 1776) Ianthella flabelliformis (Pallas, 1776) Iotrochota baculifera Ridley, 1884 Ircinia 1 Ircinia 1255 Myrmekioderma granulata (Esper, 1830) Oceanapia 135 Rhabdastrella globostellata (Carter, 1883) Xestospongia testudinaria (Lamarck, 1813) Agelas axifera Hentschel, 1911 Aka mucosa (Bergquist, 1965) Aplysina ianthelliformis (Lendenfeld, 1888) Callyspongia (Toxochalina) schulzei Kieschnick, 1900 Carteriospongia foliascens (Pallas, 1766) Cinachyrella_(Raphidotethya) enigmatica (Burton, 1934) Ciocalypta tyleri Bowerbank, 1873 Clathria (Thalysias) lendenfeldi Ridley & Dendy, 1886 CEB 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 NEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 NEB 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 E.NP 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 W.NP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 NWB 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NWP 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 CWB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 T o t a l CWP bioregions 1 6 1 6 0 6 1 6 0 6 0 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 0 6 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 5 QM Technical Reports | 002 82 SpeciesName Crella_(Crella) spinulata (Hentschel, 1911) Dendrilla rosea Lendenfeld, 1883 Fascaplysinopsis reticulata (Hentschel, 1912) Haliclona (Haliclona) cymaeformis (Esper, 1794) Ianthella quadrangulata Bergquist & Kelly Borges, 1995 Lamellodysidea herbacea (Keller, 1889) Oceanapia ramsayi (Lendenfeld, 1888) Pachymatisma 311 Pericharax 58 Plakortis nigra Levi, 1959 Reniochalina stalagmitis Lendenfeld, 1888 Aaptos aaptos (Schmidt, 1864) Agelas mauritiana (Carter, 1883) Axinella aruensis Hentschel, 1912 Axinella flabellata (Ridley & Dendy, 1886) Cinachyrella 333 Clathria (Thalysias) abietina (Lamarck, 1814) Clathria (Thalysias) reinwardti Vosmaer, 1880 Craniella 402 Dactylospongia elegans (Thiele, 1899) Dragmacidon australis ( Bergquist, 1970) Dysidea granulosa Bergquist, 1965 Echinochalina (Echinochalina) intermedia (Whitelegge, 1902) NEP 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 NEB 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 E.NP 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 W.NP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 NWB 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 NWP 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CWB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T o t a l CWP bioregions 0 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 1 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 83 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 CEB 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia SpeciesName Echinodictyum cancellatum (Lamarck, 1814) Echinodictyum conulosum Kieschnick, 1900 Ectyoplasia tabula (Lamarck, 1814) Halichondria (Halichondria) stalagmites (Hentschel, 1912) Higginsia scabra Whitelegge, 1907 Hyrtios erecta (Keller, 1889) Lendenfeldia plicata (Esper, 1806) Mycale (Arenochalina) mirabilis (Lendenfeld, 1887) Neopetrosia exigua (Kirkpatrick, 1900) Niphates 307 Pericharax heteroraphis (Polejaeff, 1883) Phakellia 646 Phyllospongia lamellosa (Esper, 1794) Phyllospongia papyracea (Esper, 1806) Pseudoceratina 190 Pseudoceratina 364 Raspailia (Raspailia) vestigifera Dendy, 1896 Reniochalina 122 Spheciospongia vagabunda (Ridley, 1884) Stelletta 1005 Stelletta clavosa (Sollas, 1888) Stylissa flabelliformis (Hentschel, 1912) Thorectandra excavatus (Ridley, 1884) CEB 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 NEP 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 NEB 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 E.NP 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 W.NP 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 NWB 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 NWP 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 CWB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T o t a l CWP bioregions 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 1 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 1 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 QM Technical Reports | 002 84 SpeciesName Trikentrion flabelliforme Hentschel, 1912 Acanthella constricta Pulitzer-Finali, 1982 Agelas cf.mauritiana (Carter, 1883) Aka 332 Amphimedon 167 Anomoianthella popeae Bergquist, 1980 Astrosclera willeyana Lister, 1900 Axechina raspailioides Hentschel, 1912 Axinella 26 Callyspongia (Callyspongia) 138 Callyspongia (Callyspongia) 369 Caulospongia perfoliata (Lamarck, 1813) Ceratopsion palmata Hooper, 1991 Chondrilla 14 Cinachyrella 376 Cinachyrella schulzei Keller, 1880 Clathria (Thalysias) procera (Ridley, 1884) Clathria (Thalysias) tingens Hooper, 1996 Cliona 17 Cliona 76 Cliona orientalis Thiele, 1900 Cliona patera (Hardwicke, 1822) Coelocarteria singaporensis (Carter, 1883) NEP 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 NEB 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 E.NP 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 W.NP 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 NWB 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 NWP 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 CWB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 T o t a l CWP bioregions 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 0 4 1 4 1 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 85 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 CEB 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia SpeciesName Crella_(Crella) 1525 Cymbastela coralliophila Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 Cymbastela vespertina Hooper & Bergquist, 1992 Desmapsamma 241 Dictyodendrilla 362 Disyringia dissimilis (Ridley, 1884) Dysidea 16 Dysidea arenaria (Bergquist, 1965) Echinodictyum nidulus Hentschel, 1911 Ectyoplasia vannus Hooper, 1991 Esperiopsis 48 Fasciospongia 290 Gelloides fibulatus Ridley, 1884 Halichondria (Halichondria) 1227 Halichondria (Halichondria) 179 Halichondria (Halichondria) bergquistae Hooper et al., 1997 Halichondria (Halichondria) phakellioides Dendy & Frederick, 1924 Haliclona (Haliclona) 1381 Haliclona (Haliclona) 36 Haliclona (Haliclona) 384 Hymeniacidon 1066 Iotrochota 377 CEB 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 NEP 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 NEB 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 E.NP 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 W.NP 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 NWB 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 NWP 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CWB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 T o t a l CWP bioregions 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 0 4 1 4 0 4 QM Technical Reports | 002 86 SpeciesName Iotrochota coccinea (Carter, 1886) Ircinia 1228 Ircinia 1944 Liosina paradoxa Theile, 1899 Mycale (Mycale) 80 Mycale (Mycale) pectinicola Hentschel, 1911 Oceanapia 1220 Phakellia 244 Phakellia stipitata (Carter, 1881) Phoriospongia 293 Pseudoceratina 1279 Spirastrella 150 Spongia 1983 Spongia hispida Lamarck, 1813 Stelletta splendens (de Laubenfels, 1954) Stylissa carteri (Dendy, 1889) Tethya coccinea Bergquist & Kelly-Borges, 1991 Thrinacophora cervicornis Ridley & Dendy, 1887 Trachycladus laevispirulifer Carter, 1879 Xestospongia 158 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia APPENdiX 5. Metadata for the sponge dataset to accompany NOO, gA and OZCAM databases Sponge Specimen Point database Data Type Biolink Relational Database Marine Planning Region Eastern-central Marine Region (ECMR) North-east Marine Region (NEMR) North-west Marine Region (NWMR) now housed at the Queensland Museum Brisbane campus; the Northern Territory Museum sponge dataset (1982-1991), with some additional records of selected (surrogate) species collected since 1991, and some Western Australian Museum records of selected species. Majority of records from tropical Australia but with additional material from the Indo-west Pacific islands and Antarctica. Northern Marine Region (NMR) South-east Marine Region (SEMR) South-west Marine Region (SWMR) Western-central Marine Region (WCMR) Custodian Queensland Museum Jurisdiction Australia Attributes Taxonomic names, authorities, unique specimen and registration numbers, collection date, collector, collection method, locality, latitude, longitude, position source, position error, depth minimum, depth maximum, depth source, depth error, habitat, storage site, storage condition, identified by, date of identification, identification accuracy and collection notes. limitations Originator Organisations (sources of the base data) Queensland Museum Contact Queensland Museum Queensland Centre for Biodiversity PO Box 3300, Variable taxonomic rigor applied across the collections (different identifiers), method of fixing locality records (GPS, gazetteer etc.) and depth recording (sounder, dive computer etc.), with coding applied for these variables within a defined confidence interval. documentation links www.Qmuseum.qld.gov.au South Brisbane, Qld, 4101, Australia www.Qmuseum.qld.gov.au _________________________________ h t t p : / / w w w. q m u s e u m . q l d . g o v. a u / organisation/sections/sessilemarineinverte brates/spong.pdf data links h t t p : / / w w w. q m u s e u m . q l d . g o v. a u / organisation/sections/sessilemarineinverte This is a dataset of sponge distributions in tropical brates/spong.pdf and subtropical Australia collected by the Queensland http://www.marine.csiro.au/caab/ Museum (1991- present); the US National Cancer Institute shallow water collection contract (sponges) http://www.ozcam.gov.au/ undertaken by James Cook University and the Australian Institute of Marine Science (1988-1991) Abstract 87 QM Technical Reports | 002 location Keywords Australia ANZliC geographic Extent Names (Category, [Jurisdiction], Name) Australia, [Australia], Australia under a revised classification published in Systema Porifera (2002). Data confidence levels were determined for location, depth and identifications. The creation of GIS distribution maps and Predictive distribution maps were then carried out on selected key taxa. Numeric spatial scale denominator: Projection details geographic Extent 7.24 S 97.29 E 156.5 E 41.14 S Positional accuracy The majority of locations and depths are recorded in precise latitudes and longitudes (decimal degrees), and metres respectively. The accuracies of the locations are split into 5 groups ___________________________________ (1) Excellent (GPS to 2 to 3 decimals and depth from dive computer) (2) Good (GPS to 1 decimal place and depth from Subject Categories and dive computer or depth sounder) Search Word(s) (3) Satisfactory (Locality determined from map, general Keywords depth from dive computer or sounder) Porifera, Sponges, Biodiversity (4) Poor (Locality and depth determined from anecdotal evidence from collector or ANZliC Search Words gazetter) __________________________________ (5) Doubtful (anecdotal evidence questionable, or antiquated record from museum register) beginning date: 1 Jan 1982 Ending date: 22 July 2004 Progress: Complete Maintenance Those locations without precise latitudes and and Update Frequency: Not speciied Stored longitudes are given a rating (0) Unknown origin, as Data Format(s) these collections locations were either not recorded or recorded as simply e.g. “Queensland”. Biolink Relational Database Attribute accuracy Stored data volume Variable 220 MB Available Format Type(s) logical consistency report Biolink Export: ASCII text, RTF, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Access, Microsoft Word, XML, Bitmap Distribution maps Completeness Access constraint Complete ____________________________________ Metadata Access Not all attributes available to the public __________________________________ lineage The Sponge Dataset was created from conversion of R:Base databases from Queensland Museum and Northern Territory Museum Data. The specimens were reclassified 88 Public Metadata Entry Created 22 Jul 2004 by Merrick Ekins Metadata last Updated Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia APPENdiX 6. descriptive analysis of giS bioregionalisation trends for sponge groups. Taxa are ordered phylogenetically, corresponding to the structure of Systema Porifera (Hooper & Van Soest, 2002). Phylum Porifera grant, 1836 (5 spp, 2 named), Plakinastrella (3 spp, Class demospongiae Sollas, 1885 Subclass homoscleromorpha Order homosclerophorida dendy, 1905 Family Plakinidae Schulze, 1880 1. Plakortis, Corticium, Oscarella, Plakinastrella and Plakinolopha spp (Fig. 37) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, peaks in diversity on GBR and with north and south GBR bioregions delineated by species composition; west coast fauna under-represented in Plakinidae samples. Summary details: Database records of Plakortis (11 spp, 3 named), Corticium 1 named), Oscarella (3 unnamed spp) and Plakinolopha (1 unnamed sp.) are primarily tropical, with one species (Plakortis nigra) recorded from the south west coast (SWB) to the southern GBR (NEP), and another species (Corticium simplex) with a wide north west and north coast distribution (NWP-NP). Peaks of diversity in Plakinidae occur in the northern GBR (NEB: 5 spp) and southern GBR (NEP: 4 spp), with only two species overlapping in species composition and delineating northern and southern GBR bioregions. Several species are markers for specific bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Oscarella sp. #3270, Plakortis sp. #3200 -south GBR (NEP): Oscarella sp. #2182, Plakortis sp. #2788 FIG. 37. Plakortis (circles), Corticium, Oscarella (squares), Plakinastrella and Plakinolopha spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) 89 QM Technical Reports | 002 -south east Queensland (CEB): Plakortis sp. #2674, Plakinastrella sp. #2677 Subclass Tetractinomorpha Order Spirophorida bergquist & hogg, 1969 Family Tetillidae Sollas, 1886 2. Cinachyrella spp (Fig. 38) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, dominated by three abundant and widely distributed species; east and west coast faunas differentiated at the eastern part of NP; peaks of diversity on the northern GBR and north west coast, with north and south GBR bioregions not well differentiated. FIG. 38. Cinachyrella spp (QM Biolink database) Summary details: Cinachyrella (37 spp, only 3 named so far) is dominated in database records by the three named species (C. australiensis, C. schulzei and C. (Rhaphidotethya) enigmatica), which extend across tropical Australia from the north west coast (NWP) to south east Queensland (CEB). Several or possibly many of the unnamed species being significantly variable forms (‘morphospecies’) of C. australiensis. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity (for ‘morphospecies’) occur on the northern GBR (NEB: 13 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 9 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 8 spp), north coast (NP: 10 spp), northwest coast (NWP: 13 spp). Each of these bioregions is differentiated mostly by rare species, but several broad groups of bioregions have shared species: north west coast to north coast (NWP-NP: Cinachyrella spp #205, #333), north and south GBR and south east Queensland (CEBNEB: Cinachyrella spp #376, #1725, #1881, 90 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG 39. Cinachyra , Paratetilla (squares), Craniella (triangles) and Tetilla spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) #1870), with a few species markers for specific bioregions. Northern and southern GBR bioregions not clearly differentiated, but east and west coast faunas distinctive and species turnover at the eastern NP. -north GBR (NEB): Cinachyrella spp #1536, #1729 -south GBR (NEP): Cinachyrella sp. #1885 -south east Queensland (CEB): Cinachyrella sp. #180 -north west coast (NWP): Cinachyrella sp. #404 -south west coast (SWB): Cinachyrella sp. #299 3. Craniella, Cinachyra, Paratetilla and Tetilla spp (Fig. 39) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, with distinct east and west coast faunas, with species turnover at the eastern part of NP; northern GBR has distinct, highly abundant species not found in the southern GBR; west coast fauna more homogeneous in species distributions. Summary details: Craniella (8 spp, 1 named), Cinachyra (1 named sp.), Paratetilla (1 unnamed sp.) and Tetilla (8 spp, 1 named) are represented in the database by predominantly tropical species, with distinctive east and west coast faunas (at eastern NP). Genera have relatively low diversity but populations of three species are abundant in particular bioregions: Tetilla sp. #2655 (north and south GBR: NEB-NEP), #3172 (northern GBR: NEB) and Craniella sp. #402 (north west and north coasts: NWP-NP). A few species are markers for bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Craniella simillima -south GBR (NEP): Tetilla sp. #2485 -Darwin region (western part of NP): T. dactyloidea -north west coast (southern part of NWP): Cinachyra uteoides Order Astrophorida Sollas, 1888 Family Ancorinidae Schmidt, 1870 4. Ancorina spp (Fig. 40) bioregional trends: Highest diversity in temperate waters (BassP & TasP); low diversity on GBR; distinctive bioregional distributions of species in 91 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 40. Ancorina spp (QM Biolink database) north coast (NP), south west coast (SWB) and Tasmanian provinces (TasP). Summary details: Thirteen species are recorded although only one can be presently assigned to a named taxon. Distinct regionalisation of species with little or no apparent sympatry. Highest species diversity (6 spp) in FIG. 41. Disyringa (dissimilis, schmidti) and Ecionemia spp (all other spp) (QM Biolink database) 92 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 42. Rhabdastrella spp (QM Biolink database) the TasP and BassP regions. Species indicative for NP (Ancorina sp.#989), SWP & SWB (A. brevidens and Ancorina sp. #746), GulfP (Ancorina sp. #835), and BassP & TasP regions (Ancorina sp. #3292). GBR with few records (record of the predominantly SWB species A. brevidens possibly a cryptic sibling (sister) species with conspecificity yet to be tested using genetic markers). 5. Disyringa and Ecionemia spp (Fig. 41) bioregional trends: Disyringa and Ecionemia with distinctly different distributions, tropical and temperate, respectively; both genera indicative of NP-NWP and TasP and SWB-CWP bioregions. Summary details: Disyringa exclusively tropical, represented by two geographically sympatric species (D. dissimilis and D. schmidti) characteristic of NP and NWP bioregions, usually at depths greater than 40m. Ecionemia exclusively temperate, predominantly shallow water (<30m depth), located on the SE coast (TasP: three species; E. geodides, Ecionemia spp #3622 & #3660) and SW coast (SWB & CWP: two species: E. acervus and Ecionemia sp. #768). 6. Rhabdastrella spp (Fig. 42) bioregional trends: R. globostellata indicative of tropical-temperate boundary; no differentiation of northern or southern GBR, or east coast – west coast faunas. Summary details: Five species are represented in the database, three occurring in the southern GBR and south east Queensland bioregions (NEP-CEB), with only one currently assigned to a named taxon. One widespread tropical (CEB to NWP), R. globostellata (formerly widely misidentified in the literature as Jaspis stellifera), with an extensive Indo-west Pacific distribution; two rare species (Rhabdastrella spp #2473 and #2671) and one temperate species restricted to TasP (Rhabdastrella sp. #3524). 7. Stelletta spp (Fig. 43) bioregional trends: Several species indicative of the tropical – temperate boundaries, with one restricted to the GBR, Coral Sea and other western Pacific coral reefs; no clear differentiation of north and south GBR bioregions, but east and west coast faunas distinctive and species turnover at eastern NP boundary. Summary details: Highly speciose family of sponges with 38 species 93 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 43. Stelletta spp (QM Biolink database) coast (CEB to NEB) and throughout the tropical western Pacific islands. Highest diversity is on the GBR (13 spp), but with no apparent differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions. Distinctive species turnover at eastern NP boundary, with clearly different east and west coast faunas. Family geodiidae gray, 1867 8. Erylus, Geodia, Caminus & Pachymatisma spp (Fig. 44) recorded for Australia, of which only seven can be presently assigned reliably to a named taxon. Two species with widespread tropical distributions (S. clavosa and Stelletta sp. #1005) from NWP to CEB and extending further into the Indo-west Pacific, one warm and cool temperate (S. purpurea) from CEP to CWB, and one species (S. splendens, formerly incorrectly allocated in the literature to Jaspis) widely distributed on the north eastern 94 bioregional trends: Southern GBR with highest diversity of Erylus and Geodia spp., and clearly differentiated from northern GBR; Pachymatisma found only from the northern and west coast regions (NP-CWP); clear eastwest coast differentiation, with species turnover at eastern NP boundary; most species have relatively deeper water (>40m depth) distributions. Summary details: Six species of Erylus, 12 species of Geodia and one species of Caminus are recorded in the Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 44. Erylus (circles), Geodia (triangles), Caminus and Pachymatisma (squares) spp (QM Biolink database) Order hadromerida Topsent, 1894 Family Clionaidae d’Orbigny, 1851 9. Cliona spp (Fig. 45) database for the Australian and Coral Sea region. Erylus (4 species) and Geodia (4 species) are most diverse in the central and southern GBR region (NEP, CEB) and Coral Sea territories, with four species also known for the central western coast (CWP & CWB). Three species of Geodia (spp #535, #1329, #3528) occur exclusively in temperate western and eastern coastal regions (SWB, GulfP, SEB and TasP). Pachymatisma sp. #311 is found exclusively from Torres Straits, Wessel Islands and Darwin regions (NP), Northwest Shelf (NWP) and Abrolhos Islands (CWP). bioregional trends: Widespread, highly speciose; three trends apparent: (1) northern and western deeper water muddy bottom substrates (NP to NWP); (2) shallow water coralline substrata in the southern and central GBR (CEB to NEP); and (3) shallow water rocky substrata in southern waters (BassP, TasP); clear differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions, south GBR having highest diversity, northern GBR fauna extending into the eastern part of NP (unlike most other sponge groups). Summary details: Cliona is highly diverse, with 41 (morpho)species recorded, of which only five can be presently assigned reliably to a known taxon. The genus consists of alpha (boring or excavating), beta (thickly encrusting) and gamma (massive, papillose) growth stages that frequently (but not exclusively) invade and bioerode coralline substrata. Species are most diverse on the central and 95 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 45. Cliona spp (QM Biolink database) southern GBR (NEP – CEB), and several widespread, biogeographically disjunct species (e.g. C. margaritifera, C. celata) are records of edible or pearl oyster infections associated with commercial oyster leases, and thus FIG. 46. Neamphius (squares), Axos (circles) and Hemiasterella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) 96 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 47. Polymastia (circles and triangles), Atergia and Pseudotrachya spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) alpha, beta and gamma growth stages. Cliona sp. #3297 is a cool temperate shallow water species (<20m depth) occurring in the BassP/ TasP region, found on rock substrate. It is known so far only from beta and gamma growth stages. Family Alectonidae Rosell, 1996 & Family hemiasterellidae lendenfeld, 1889 contain no useful bioregionalisation information (i.e. translocation of oyster spat and shell responsible for observed distributions). Other species contain significant data for bioregionalisation, with three species characteristic of particular bioregions: the massive, soft shelly or muddy bottom dwelling Cliona patera occurs in the NP – NWP regions, offshore in shallow to deeper waters (15-60m depth). It was at one time thought to have been fished out by trawler activity but has been rediscovered and now known to be relatively widely distributed from data collected by the northern prawn fishery surveys during the past decade. It is known only in the massive (gamma) stage. Cliona orientalis occurs in the southern and central GBR (CEB-NEP) in predominantly shallow waters (<40m depth) and is a known ‘parasite’ of scleractinian corals. It is known from 10. Neamphius (Alectonidae), Axos and Hemiasterella spp (Hemiasterellidae) (Fig. 46) bioregional trends: Distinctive east and west coast faunas, with species turnaround at the Wessel Islands (central NP); Neamphius characteristic of northern GBR (NEB), Axos of north western regions (NP to NWP) and Hemiasterella has highest diversity in central western coast (SWB to NWP), with one species characteristic of the southern GBR (NEP-CEB). Summary details: Neamphius is represented by a single described species found in the northern sector of the GBR (NEB), the Coral Sea and elsewhere in the tropical western Pacific. Axos consists of two described, geographically sympatric sibling species extending along the tropical north western coasts, from NP to 97 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 48. Spirastrella spp (QM Biolink database) with fewer tropical species which have wider distributions (CEB to NWP). NWP. The genus is possibly endemic to these provinces. Hemiasterella is represented by eight so-far unnamed species with the highest diversity on the central western coast, from SWB to NWP, and one species (Hemiasterella sp. #2839) characteristic of the central and southern GBR sector (NEP to CEB). Family Polymastiidae gray, 1867 11. Polymastia, Atergia Pseudotrachya spp (Fig. 47) and bioregional trends: Species more abundant, higher diversity and with higher levels of apparent endemism in temperate waters (TasP, BassP), 98 Summary details: Seventeen species of Polymastia, one species of Atergia and one of Pseudotrachya are reported, of which only four can be presently assigned to a known taxon. Highest diversity occurs in the TasP and BassP regions (9 species), which are reportedly abundant there, none of which have been recorded to date outside these regions. Two species are more widely distributed in the tropics (Polymastia spp #483 and #1277) but neither is sufficiently abundant to deduce any bioregional distributional patterns. Pseudotrachya sp. #1306 is characteristic of the western NP region. Family Spirastrellidae Ridley & dendy, 1886 12. Spirastrella spp (Fig. 48) bioregional trends: Peaks in diversity correspond to general bioregional sponge ‘hotspots’ models, occurring at the southern end of the NEP-CEB, western end of the NP and southern end of NWP; species composition differentiates northern and southern sectors of GBR. Summary details: Twenty six species of Spirastrella are recorded, of which Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 49. Trachycladus (triangles) and Timea spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) only two can be currently assigned to a named taxon. Species records are predominantly tropical, with peaks of diversity in the southern GBR (CEB – 7 species), Darwin region (eastern NP – 7 species) and Port Hedland region (mostly offshore, southern NWP – 5 species), with no or few species common between regions. Only one species (Spirastrella sp. #150) is widely distributed across northern to central western coasts (NP to SWB). No overlap in species composition between southern (CEB) and northern GBR (NEB), with 3 species recorded for the latter. Family Trachycladidae hallmann, 1917 & Family Timeidae Topsent, 1928 13. Trachycladus (Trachycladidae) and Timea spp (Timeidae) (Fig. 49) bioregional trends: Trachycladus is temperate and indicative of tropicaltemperate boundary. Timea is tropical, associated with coralline substratum. Summary details: Two named species of Trachycladus and two unnamed species (possibly variations in morphotypes), and three species of Timea are recorded, showing markedly different distributions. Trachycladus laevispirulifer is widely distributed, both geographically and bathymetrically, throughout temperate Australia (CWP, CEP), extending slightly into the subtropical overlap (CWB, CEB). It is found from moderately deeper coastal waters (~20m depth) to much deeper waters (~400m depth), including from the Norfolk Rise off New Caledonia. It is a reasonable indicator species for the tropical – temperate overlap zones. By contrast, Timea spp have only been recorded so far from the tropical eastern and northern coasts, with one species (Timea sp. #1389) occurring along the length of the GBR (CEB to NEB), and two other species restricted to the southern GBR (CEB) and Darwin region (eastern NP). The three Timea species collected here are associated with dead coral (bioeroding species). Family Suberitidae Schmidt, 1870 14. Aaptos, Caulospongia, Homaxinella and Pseudospongosorites spp (Fig. 50) bioregional trends: Aaptos 99 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 50. Aaptos (squares), Caulospongia (circles), Homaxinella (triangles) and Pseudosuberites spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) demonstrates a wide tropical distribution (one species), and two peaks of biodiversity on the GBR and Bass Strait regions, each with different (non overlapping) species compositions. Caulospongia is endemic to west and southwest coasts. Summary details: Nine species of Aaptos (only one assigned to a named taxon) shows a predominantly eastern and north coast distribution, with highest diversity in temperate (TasP & BassP – four species) and tropical GBR regions (CEB, NEP, NEB – four species), with one species (A. aaptos) widely distributed from NWP on the west coast to CEB on the east coast and elsewhere in the western Pacific. Temperate species have more restricted distributions. Four species of Homaxinella (two named) 100 were recorded from only TasP (one species) and NWP (three species), with no species in common between regions. Four species of Caulospongia (all named) are thought to be endemic to the western and southwestern coasts, with one (C. perfoliata) widely distributed from the northwest (NWP) to the southern coast (GulfP), and others found only in the southwest (C. biflabellata) or central west coast (two species). Only one species of Pseudospongosorites (not yet assigned to a named taxon) was recorded in TasP. 15. Rhizaxinella, Terpios Suberites spp (Fig. 51) and bioregional trends: No broad (gamma) scale regional trends, but several species groups characterize particular meso-scale bioregions, with little or no overlap in species composition between regions. Two regions, one tropical (NP) and one temperate (BassP-TasP) have highest species diversity. Summary details: Twenty nine species of Suberites (only four currently assigned to a named taxon), two species of Rhizaxinella (both unnamed), and eight species of Terpios (all unnamed) were recorded, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 51. Rhizaxinella (squares), Terpios (squares) and Suberites spp (circles, crosses & triangles) (QM Biolink database) -BassP-SEB (Suberites perfectus) -TasP (Rhizaxinella sp. #3289, Suberites spp #450, #3290, #3542, #3601 and S. cupuloides). Family Tethyidae gray, 1848 16. Tethya and Xenospongia spp (Fig. 52) none of which are widely distributed in any Australian coastal waters and very few span more than one bioregion. Consequently, several species can characterize particular bioregions. Meso-scale regional species diversity is highest in two regions, TasP-BassP regions (7 species) and NP (7 species), with other faunas having fewer species: CEP (4 species), NEP (5 species), NEB (4 species) and GulfP (3 species). -CWP-CWB (Suberites sp. #704) -NWP (Suberites ramulosus cylindrifera and sp. #327) -NP (Suberites spp #983 and #231, Terpios sp. #1297) -NEB (Suberites spp #3806, #998, #1615) -NEP (Terpios spp #2184 and #2597, Suberites sp. #2854) -CEB (Suberites sp. #2909, Terpios sp. 439) -CEP (Suberites spp #3570 and #3571, Terpios spp #2619 and #2862) -GulfP (Suberites spp #870, #873 and #876) bioregional trends: No broad (gamma) scale regional trends, but several species groups characterize particular meso-scale bioregions, with little or no overlap in species composition between regions. Three tropical regions (CEBNEP, NP and NWB-NWP) have highest species diversity. Summary details: Twenty eight species of Tethya (only eight currently assigned to a known taxon), and one species of Xenospongia are recorded, with some species showing distinct bioregionalisation. Species diversity and species composition varies between regions, but most species are restricted to one (or two adjacent) bioregions, and some species present may characterize these regions. Xenospongia patelliformis is more widely distributed, found on soft bottoms (muddy, soft shelly subtrata) in relatively deeper (>20-50m), interreef, tropical waters from north eastern (NEP) to north western coasts (NWP). 101 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 52. Tethya (circles, triangles) and Xenospongia spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) spp #148, #200, #219, #862) -NWB-NWP (8 spp – Tethya spp #310, #939) -SWB (2 spp – T. robusta) -GulfP (1 -TasP (4 spp – Tethya spp #2276, #3600, #3366, and T. cf. aurantium) -CEB-NEP (6 spp – T. bergquistae, T. hooperi, T. pulitzeri, Tethya spp #2594, #2993) -NEB (3 spp – Tethya spp #3415, #2249) -NP (7 spp – T. coccinea, Tethya FIG. 53. Chondrilla spp (QM Biolink database) 102 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 54. Chondrosia spp (QM Biolink database) sp. – Tethya sp. #544). Order Chondrosida bouryEsnault & lopès, 1985 Family Chondrillidae gray, 1872 17. Chondrilla spp (Fig. 53) bioregional trends: Species composition delineates distinct tropical northern – north eastern (CEB – NP) and temperate bioregions, with northern and southern GBR regions having different species composition. Summary details: Seventeen species of Chondrilla are recorded from this region of which only two can be presently assigned to a named taxon with any reliability. One species (Chondrilla sp. #14) has a relatively wide north eastern – northern distribution, from CEB to NP, whereas all others appear to be relatively restricted in their ranges, with several species indicative of particular bioregions: C. australiensis from southwestern Australia, SWP to GulfP; Chondrilla sp. #2523 in the southern part of CEB; Chondrilla sp. #3599 from TasP; Chondrilla sp. #2398 from the Gulf of Carpentaria (NP). The highest species diversity (seven species) is recorded from the GBR, with four species occurring in northern (NEB) and southern regions (NEP & CEB), of which only one (Chondrilla sp. #14) is common to both. 18. Chondrosia spp (Fig. 54) bioregional trends: No useful bioregionalisation data from this genus. Summary details: Ten species of Chondrosia have been collected for the region, only one of which can be currently assigned to a known taxon. One morphospecies (C. corticata) appears to be widespread, occurring in BassP, NP and also in New Caledonia, whereas others are restricted to particular bioregions. 103 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 55. Astrosclera (circles), Acanthochaetetes (squares) and Vaceletia spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) ‘Coralline sponges’ Subclass Tetractinomorpha Order hadromerida Topsent, 1894 Family Acanthochaetetidae Fischer, 1970 Subclass Ceractinomorpha Order verticillitida Termier & Termier, 1977 Family verticillitidae Steinmann, 1882 Order Agelasida verrill, 1907 Family Astroscleridae lister, 1900 19. ‘Coralline sponges’: A c a n t h o c h a e t e t e s (Acanthochaetetidae), Vaceletia (Verticillidae) and Astrosclera spp (Astroscleridae) (Fig. 55) bioregional trends: Exclusively coral reef species living in cryptic habitats. All species show similar patterns of bioregionalisation, based on distribution of coral reef habitats in which they are found, except for the deeper water (>600m) of Vaceletia spp. Summary details: These sponges 104 are often referred to as coralline or hypercalcified sponges, but are phylogenetically not closely related. They are found exclusively in shaded coralline overhangs and caves, throughout the GBR and Coral Sea, with records also known for northwestern Australian coral reefs. A single morphospecies of Astrosclera is known throughout the Indo-west Pacific, although preliminary genetic evidence and subtle morphometric differences have been indicated for widely disjunct regional populations, from the Red Sea to Tahiti (Wörheide et al. 2002). Acanthochaetetes wellsi has a similar macrohabitat distribution, although it requires greater shade than A. willeyana and is not as prevalent. Vaceletia consists of a single described species and several new species, with even more restricted geographic and microhabitat distributions, occurring mainly in deep caves on reefs of the Coral Sea and less frequently on the GBR itself. Family Agelasidae verrill, 1907 20. Agelas spp (Fig. 56) bioregional trends: Marked eastwest species turnover boundary at Torres Straits (NP), with diversity Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 56. Agelas spp (QM Biolink database) highest in the southern GBR and south east Queensland bioregions (NEP, CEB) Summary d e t a i l s : N i n e t e e n species of Agelas occur within tropical Australasia, of which seven are currently assigned to a name species with any confidence (the remainder possibly new or variable morphotypes of other species). The genus is often a dominant member of the coral reef associated sponge fauna, particularly on the deeper reef slopes. Three of these species (Agelas mauritiana, A. axifera and A. gracilis) have more-orless widespread tropical distributions, with the former predominately in eastern Australia, and with the Torres Straits being a marked transition zone between eastern and western faunas. The GBR has the highest diversity of species (12 species), with six in the far north (NEB) and nine in the southern portion of the region (NEP, CEB). None have been so far recorded south of the Tweed River, although two species are known in the literature to occur in the CEP region. Four species are recorded for the northern and western tropical faunas, one unique to the region (Agelas sp. 3398). Subclass Ceractinomorpha Order Poecilosclerida Topsent, 1928 Suborder Microcionina hajdu, van Soest & hooper, 1994 Family Acarnidae dendy, 1922 21. Acarnus, Cornulum, Damiria, Iophon, Megaciella, Zyzzya spp (Fig. 57) bioregional trends: Distinct regionalization of Acarnus spp, including north-south differentiation of GBR, with other genera markers for a few temperate bioregions. Summary details: Acarnus (9 spp, 5 named), Cornulum (1 unnamed sp.), Damiria (3 unnamed spp), Iophon (1 named sp.), Megaciella (2 unnamed spp), Zyzzya (6 spp, 2 named) with both tropical and temperate (Acarnus) or predominantly temperate distributions (other genera). One widespread 105 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 57. Acarnus (circles), Cornulum, Damiria, Iophon, Megaciella (squares) and Zyzzya spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) burrowing limestone substrates. Distinct regionalization of Acarnus species, with differentiated north-south GBR faunas. Other genera characteristic of a few temperate bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Acarnus hoshinoi, A. ternatus, Acarnus sp. #1226, Zyzzya sp. #1653. -south GBR FIG. 58. Antho (Antho) (circles), A. (Isopenectya) (triangles), A. (Acarnia) (circles), Clathria (Axosuberites) spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) species (Zyzzya fuliginosa) excavating/ 106 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia (CEB-NEP): Acarnus sp. #1887, 2158, Zyzzya criceta, Zyzzya sp. #819 -north coast (NP): Acarnus wolffgangi -south east coast (CEP-TasP): Acarnus sp. #1927 -central south east coast (CEPSEB): Damiria sp. #1179 -south west coast (SWB): Damiria sp. #1679, Cornulum sp. #1678 Family Microcionidae Carter, 1875 22. Antho (Antho), A. (Isopenectya), A. (Acarnia), Clathria (Axosuberites) spp (Fig. 58) bioregional trends: No peaks in diversity, predominantly temperate, markers for some southern bioregions. Summary details: Antho (8 spp, 5 named) and Clathria (Axosuberites) (5 spp, 3 named) have the highest diversity in any world faunas (Hooper, 1994) but are neither diverse nor abundant, but some species are markers for particular bioregions, predominantly temperate: -north GBR (NEB): A. punicea -north coast (NP): A. ridleyi, Antho sp. #3796 -south east coast (CEP-TasP): C. (Axosuberites) thetidis -Tasmania (TasP): C. (Axosuberites) sp. #3678 -central south east coast (CEP): A. chartacea, C. (Axosuberites) canaliculata -south west coast (CWP-SWB-GABB): A. tuberosa, C. (Axosuberites) patula -GulfP: A. saintvincenti 23. Clathria (Clathria), Clathria (Dendrocia) and Clathria (Isociella) spp (Fig. 59) bioregional trends: Peaks in diversity on southern GBR, central south east coast and southern Gulf, with a widely distributed temperate species and two widely distributed GBR species. Species markers for several temperate bioregions. Summary details: Clathria (Clathria) (16 spp, 12 named), Clathria (Dendrocia) (5 spp, 3 named) and Clathria (Isociella) (5 spp, 3 named) are among the better known sponge groups in Australia, showing peaks in diversity in the GBR (mainly southern and central region: CEB, NEP – 12 spp), central south east coast (CEP – 6 spp) and southern Gulf (GulfP – 3 spp), with no overlap in species composition between each bioregion. Two species are widespread and abundant on the GBR: C. (C.) kylista and C. (C.) conectens, and one species is widespread across southern Australia: C. (D.) pyramida. Other species are clear markers for particular bioregions, mainly in temperate Australia. Only a single species present in the north coast (NP) region (Clathria (Isociella) eccentrica) also found on the GBR. -north GBR (NEB): C. (C.) basilana, C. (Dendrocia) spp #3197, #3837, C. (Isociella) skia, C. (Isociella) sp. #3640 -south and central GBR (CEB-NEP): C. (C.) kylista, C. (C.) conectens, C. (C.) angulifera, C. (C.) hispidula, C. (Clathria) spp #2711, #3488, C. (Isociella) sp. #2897 -central south east coast (CEP): C. (Dendrocia) dura, C. (Clathria) rubens, C. (C.) striata -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassPTasP): C. (Clathria) transiens -southern Gulf (GulfP): C. (C.) noarlungae -south west cape (SWP): C. (C.) murphyi -central west coast (CWP): C. (Isociella) selachia 24. Clathria (Microciona) spp (Fig. 60) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, highly diverse in and indicative for the GBR faunas, with differentiation between north and south GBR bioregions. Summary details: Records of this subgenus are predominantly tropical, with only one widely distributed species (C. (M.) aceratoobtusa) from central south east coast (CEP) to tropical north coast (NWB), thinly encrusting on a variety of substrates but particularly coral reefs, hence highest diversity is in the GBR (16 spp), with differences in species composition between north and south GBR faunas. -entire GBR (CEB-NEB): C. (M.) aceratoobtusa, C. (Microciona) spp #1182, #2114 -north GBR (NEB): C. (M.) lizardensis, C. (Microciona) sp. #2265 107 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 59. Clathria (Clathria) (circles), Clathria (Dendrocia) (triangles) and Clathria (Isociella) spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) FIG. 60. Clathria (Microciona) spp (QM Biolink database) 108 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Fig. 61. Clathria (Thalysias) spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) also occurs in all tropical bioregions. Several species support established bioregional patterns: -south GBR (CEB-NEP): C. (M.) mima, C. (Microciona) sp. #1839, #1890, #1957, #2177, #2844 25. Clathria (Thalysias) spp (Figs 61-73) bioregional trends: Highest diversity on the GBR, north coast and north west coast regions, with major species turnover at the eastern NP boundary and the Gulf of Carpentaria with distinctively different suite of species separating east and west coast faunas; no clear differentiation of north and south GBR bioregions. Summary details: Clathria (Thalysias) contains 31 described species in Australian waters (and 12 additonal unnamed species, not shown on these maps), with peaks in diversity on the GBR region (NEB-CEB: 14 spp), the Darwin-Cobourg Peninsula region (west NP: 9 spp), the Gove Peninsula region (central NP: 7 spp), and the Northwest Shelf region (NWP: 11 spp). Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina -tropical Australia: C. (Thalysias) lendenfeldi, C. (Thalysias) major, C. (Thalysias) reinwardti, C. (Thalysias) tingens, C. (Thalysias) vulpina -entire GBR (CEB-NEB): C. (Thalysias) hirsuta, C. (Thalysias) vulpina -north GBR (NEB): C. (Thalysias) cervicornis, C. (Thalysias) sp. #2692 -central and south GBR (NEPCEB): C. (Thalysias) craspedia, C. (Thalysias) sp. #2583 -Cape York - Gulf of Carpentaria (east NP): C. (Thalysias) fusterna, C. (Thalysias) procera -Darwin and Gove Peninsulas (west NP): C. (Thalysias) darwinensis, C. (Thalysias) erecta, C. (Thalysias) hallmanni, C. (Thalysias) wesselensis -north and northwest coasts (NPNWP): C. (Thalysias) abietina, C. (Thalysias) toxifera -northwest shelf (NWP): C. (Thalysias) hesperia, C. (Thalysias) coppingeri, C. (Thalysias) spinifera -south west coast (SWB): C. (Thalysias) cancellaria, C. (Thalysias) styloprothesis -south east coast (CEP-TasP): C. (Thalysias) costifera -temperate Australia (TasP – SWP): C. (Thalysias) cactiformis 109 QM Technical Reports | 002 Fig. 62. Clathria (Thalysias) spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) Fig. 63. Highest species richness (red ellipse) of Clathria (Thalysias) within the Northern Planning Area (red square) (QM Biolink database). Special analysis of Northern Planning Area. Ten species occur in the NPA, of which seven are found in the Groote Eylandt, Gove and Wessel Island regions (Fig. 63) (C. (T.) abietina, C. (T.) fusterna, C. (T.) lendenfeldi, C. (T.) procera, C. (T.) toxifera, C. (T.) wesselensis, C. (T.) vulpina) [C. (T.) coppingeri, C. (T.) major, C. (T.) 110 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Fig. 64. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) abietina (Lamarck). Fig. 65. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) fusterna Hooper [this species is unique to the NPA] Fig. 66. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) lendenfeldi (Ridley) Fig. 67. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) major Hentschel Fig. 68. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) procera (Ridley) 111 QM Technical Reports | 002 Fig. 69. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) toxifera (Hentschel) Fig. 70. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) wesselensis Hooper [this species is unique to the NPA] Fig. 71. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) vulpina (Lamarck) Fig. 72. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) coppingeri (Ridley) Fig. 73. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Clathria (Thalysias) reinwardti Vosmaer 112 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 74. Clathria (Wilsonella) (circles) and Echinoclathria spp (squares and triangles) (QM Biolink database) reinwardti not occurring in this zone]. These data corroborate this region as a ‘biodiversity hotspot’ within the NPA. Of these species two are unique to the NPA (C. (T.) fusterna and C. (T.) wesselensis). Actual datapoints and CAAB modelled distributions for these ten key Clathria (Thalysias) species found in the NPA are presented in the following figures (Figs 64-73): 26. Clathria (Wilsonella) Echinoclathria spp (Fig. 74) and bioregional trends: Distinct tropical and temperate species, with highest diversity in temperate bioregions, and several species clear markers for particular bioregions (GulfP, TasP, NEB). Summary details: Clathria (Wilsonella) (10 spp, 8 named) and Echinoclathria (15 spp, 12 named) are predominantly temperate species, although several are exclusively tropical, with peaks of diversity in the southern Gulf (GulfP: 7 spp), Tasmania (TasP: 8 spp), and far north GBR (NEB: 4 spp). Only one species (C. (Wilsonella) australiensis) is widely distributed throughout temperate coastal Australia (CEB – SWB). Several species are markers for particular bioregions: -entire GBR (NEP-NEB): Echinoclathria bergquistae -north GBR (NEB): E. levii, E. digitata -south GBR (NEP-CEB): Echinoclathria sp. #1855, 3587 -north coast (NP): C. (Wilsonella) tuberosa, C. (W.) claviformis -south west coast (SWB): C. (Wilsonella) abrolhosensis -southern Gulf (GulfP): E. parkeri, E. notialis, E. nodosa -Tasmania (TasP): E. riddlei, E. levii, E. egena, E. axinellioides -south east coast (TasP-CEP): E. leporina -south coast (TasP-GulfP): C. (Wilsonella) ensiae, E. subhispida 2 7 . E c h i n o c h a l i n a (Echinochalina) and Echinochalina (Protophlitaspongia) spp (Fig. 75) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical east coast, with distinct tropical and temperate faunas, with highest diversity on southern GBR – southeast 113 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 75. Echinochalina (Echinochalina) (circles) and Echinochalina (Protophlitaspongia) spp (squares and triangles) (QM Biolink database extend into both bioregions, and the central GBR to southeast Queensland coast (Tweed River) has highest diversity of Echinochalina species (13 spp). Qld coast, and clearly differentiated northern and southern GBR faunas with only two species common to all the GBR. Summary details: Echinochalina is a highly diverse, predominantly tropical east coast Australian genus with incursions into the southwestern and northwestern Pacific, and highest diversity on the GBR (20 spp). Two subgenera are recognized with E. (Echinochalina) having 15 spp (5 named), and E. (Protophlitaspongia) having 14 spp (8 named) in the database (several additional species are recorded around the Pacific rim. One species (E. (E.) tubulosa) is recorded from both temperate and tropical faunas (GulfP – NEB), whereas all others are restricted to either fauna. Northern and southern GBR faunas are clearly differentiated by their species composition, although several species 114 -entire GBR (NEB-CEB): E. (E.) intermedia, E. (P.) isaaci, -north GBR (NEB): E. (E.) barba, E. (E.) felixi, E. (Echinochalina) sp. #2099, #2959, #3844, E. (P.) collata, E. (Protophlitaspongia) sp. #3333 -central-south GBR (NEP): E. (Echinochalina) sp. #2819, #2822, E. (P.) oxeata, E. (P.) laboutei, E. (Protophlitaspongia) sp. #1991, #2688, #3482 -southeast Qld (CEB): E. (P.) favulosa, E. (Protophlitaspongia) sp. #3763 -far south east coastal (BassP-TasP): E. (Echinochalina) sp. #3466, #3643, E. (P.) bispiculata 28. Holopsamma spp (Fig. 76) bioregional trends: Endemic Australian genus predominant in temperate waters, with highest diversity in the south east coast (GulfP to CEP) and a few species unique to particular bioregions. Summary details: Holopsamma (10 spp, 8 named, 2 unnamed) is a peculiar ‘honeycombed reticulate’ sponges that incorporates copious amounts of detritus into its fibre skeleton in addition to its normal mineral skeleton Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 76. Holopsamma spp (QM Biolink database) Family Raspailiidae hentschel, 1923 components. The genus is endemic to the Australian fauna with few incursions into the tropics (including one dubious record of H. macropora from Cape York which is probably a cryptic sibling species of the southern Gulf species). Peaks of diversity occur in the southern Gulf (GulfP: 4 spp), Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP, TasP: 4 spp), south east coast – central east temperate coast (SEB-CEB: 6 spp). Two species are widely distributed and geographically sympatric throughout temperate waters (H. arborea, H. favus) from CEP to CWB, two are common in south east coastal waters (H. laminaefavosa, H. rotunda) from Bass Strait to Fraser Island (BassP – CEB), and one from the southern Gulf (GulfP) to the Tweed River (H. crassa). Other species appear to be unique to particular bioregions: -south GBR (NEP-CEB boundary): Holopsamma sp. #1830 -south east Qld (CEB): H. pluritoxa -southern Gulf (GulfP): H. macropora, Holopsamma sp. indeterminate #816 [missing all native spicules] -Great Australian Bight (GABB): H. ramosa 29. Axechina, A m p h i n o m i a , Ceratopsion, Trikentrion spp (Fig. 77) bioregional trends: Distinctive east and west coast faunas with species turnover at eastern part of NP; southern GBR with higher diversity and different species composition than northern GBR. Summary details: Axechina (1 named sp.), Amphinomia (1 named sp.), Ceratopsion (10 spp, 5 unnamed) and Trikentrion (1 named sp.) are a predominantly tropical group of sponges with one genus and species (Amphinomia sulphurea) apparently endemic to northwest Australia (NWPNP). The three genera with only single species in Australian waters are all restricted to north west and north Australia, with Axechina raspailioides and Trikentrion flabelliforme also relatively abundant at collection sites. By comparison, Ceratopsion is most diverse in the southern GBR (6 spp), with two species showing relatively wide distributions: C. palmata across the north west and north (NWP-NP), and C. clavata along the length of the GBR and into the western Pacific. 115 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 77. Axechina (triangles), Amphinomia (triangles), Ceratopsion (circles) and Trikentrion spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) Ceratopsion aurantiaca extends into temperate waters off the Sydney coast, where it was originally described, but has been recently found in the southern GBR and Solomon Islands. Apart from the southern GBR few species are unique to any bioregion: -south GBR (NEP): Ceratopsion spp #3496, #2806, #2825, #2846 -north west coast (NWP): C. montebelloensis 30. Echinodictyum spp (Figs 7884) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical but extending along entire extent of west coast, with highest diversity on the tropic on both sides of the coast. Several species widely distributed in tropics but several others are indicators of southern GBR (NEP-CEB), northern Gulf (NP), north west coast and south west coast bioregions. Summary details: Echinodictyum (Demospongiae, Poecilosclerida, Microcionida, Raspailiidae) is only moderately diverse in Australian waters (17 spp, 9 named), but sometimes 116 highly abundant at particular collection sites, especially on the north and northwest coasts. Database records indicate peaks of diversity on the tropic of the northwest coast (NWP: 6 spp), and the tropic of the southern GBR (8 spp), with three species common to both diversity ‘hotspots’. The genus is predominantly tropical with incursions deep into the south west coast (although there are undoubtedly collections in southern Australian museums which contain species of Echinodictyum but which have not yet been identified as such). Three species are widely distributed throughout tropical Australia: E. mesenterinum (SWB – CEB), E. conulosum (NWP – CEB), E. asperum (NWP – CEB); one species is widely distributed on the north and north west coasts: E. cancellatum (NWP – NP, with incursion into the top of NEB); and one species is disjunct in distribution, occurring on both central west and east coasts: E. nidulus (SWB-CWB & NEP). Several species are markers for particular bioregions: -south GBR to south east Qld (NEP – CEB): Echinodictyum spp #1178, #1620, #2001, #2088, #2789, #3089 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): E. carlinoides -north west coastal (NWP): E. rugosum Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia Fig. 78. Echinodictyum spp (QM Biolink database) -mid to south west coastal (southern part of NWP - SWP): E. clathrioides -south west coast (SWB): E. austrinum Special analysis of Northern Planning Area. Of the 17 Echinodictyum species five occur in the NPA, all of which are found only in the Groote Eylandt, Gove and Wessel Island regions (red elliptical in Fig. 79) (E. asperum, E. cancellatum, E. carlinoides, E. conulosum, E. Fig. 79. Highest species richness (red ellipse) of Echinodictyum within the Northern Planning Area (red square) (QM Biolink database) 117 QM Technical Reports | 002 Fig. 80. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Echinodictyum mesenterinum (Lamarck). Small green crosses represent collecting sites. Fig. 81. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Echinodictyum cancellatum (Lamarck). Fig. 82. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Echinodictyum asperum (Lamarck). Fig. 83. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Echinodictyum carlinoides (Lamarck). Fig. 84. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Echinodictyum conulosum (Kieschnick) 118 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 85. Ectyoplasia (circles), Eurypon, Lithoplocamia, Plocamione (squares) and Thrinacophora spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) mesenterinum), representing a putative ‘biodiversity hotspot’ in the NPA. By comparison the Gulf of Carpentaria, Torres Strait and areas west of the Wessel Islands have fewer species of Echinodictyum. There are no unique Echinodictyum species in the NPA. Actual datapoints and CAAB modelled distributions for these five key Echinodictyum species found in the NPA are presented in the following figures (Figs 79-84). 31. Ectyoplasia, Eurypon, Lithoplocamia, Plocamione and Thrinacophora spp (Fig. 85) bioregional trends: Exclusively tropical records, one genus abundant and restricted to north and west coasts and another with east-west species pair bounded by Cape York (NP). Summary details: Ectyoplasia (2 named spp), Eurypon (2 unnamed spp), Lithoplocamia (1 named sp.), Plocamione (1 unnamed sp.) and Thrinacophora (2 spp, 1 named), are exclusively tropical but not diverse. Ectyoplasia is restricted to the north and northwest coasts, with both species geographically sympatric in their distributions (NWP to NP, with small incursions into CWP in the south west). Thrinacophora is represented by an east-west species pair, with the boundary at Cape York (NP), although T. cervicornis was also recently recorded from the southern Papuan Barrier Reef (NWP-NP), and Thrinacophora sp. #1993 found only on the GBR (NEP, NEB). 32. Raspailiids with rhabdostyles (Aulospongus, Endectyon, Raspailia (Raspaxilla) spp) (Fig. 86) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical distributions, two species with widely disjunct mid-east and mid-west distributions; north-south differentiation of the GBR indicated. Summary details: Aulospongus (3 spp, 1 named), Endectyon (3 spp, 2 named) and Raspailia (Raspaxilla) (7 spp, 4 named) have a common character in the form of rhabdostyles echinating their skeletons, but are otherwise not closely related. None are diverse or abundant at any site, and are restricted mainly to the tropics. Several species distributions support bioregional boundaries, including northsouth differentiation of the GBR. Two species (R. (Raspaxilla) compressa, Endectyon elyakovi) have widely 119 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 86. Aulospongus (squares), Endectyon (triangles), Raspailia (Raspaxilla) spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) disjunct distributions on west (NWPCWP) and east (CEB) coasts. -north GBR (NEB): R. (Raspaxilla) reticulata, R. (Raspaxilla) sp. #2264, Aulospongus sp. #2349 -south GBR (NEP, CEB): R. (Raspaxilla) sp. #1081, #1696 -north west coast (NWP): R. (Raspaxilla) wardi, Endectyon thurstoni 33. Raspailia (Clathriodendron, Hymeraphiopsis, Parasyringella, Raspailia) spp (Fig. 87) bioregional trends: Equally diverse in tropics and temperate waters, although records are depauperate for south west and southern Australian coasts. Several species indicative of bioregional distributions, and species composition supports differentiation of north and south bioregions on GBR. Summary details: Raspailia is a moderately highly diverse group of species divided into subgenera (see also R. (Raspaxilla) included in analysis above): Clathriodendron (11 spp, 6 named), Hymeraphiopsis (1 unnamed sp.), Parasyringella (3 named spp) and Raspailia (16 spp, 5 named). 120 Species are equally diverse in tropical and temperate bioregions, although so far there are no database records yet from the south west and south coasts (SWB to WBassB). One species (R. (Raspailia) vestigifera) is widely distributed in the tropics, from central west coast (CWP) to the Wessel Islands (NP), and two others (R. (Parasyringella) australiensis, R. (Clathriodendron) arbuscula) from the southern GBR (NEP) and south east Queensland (CEB) extending into the Gulf of Carpentaria (NP). Several groups of species are markers for particular bioregions: -north GBR (NEB: 6 spp): with bioregional markers R. (R.) wilkinsoni, R. (Raspailia) spp #3189, #1695 -south GBR (NEP: 4 spp): R. (Raspailia) spp #3003, #3054, #3463 -south east Queensland (CEB: 4 spp): R. (Raspailia) spp #2714, #2953 -north coast (NP: 7 spp): R. (Parasyringella) nuda, R. (Clathriodendron) keriontria, R. (Clathriodendron) darwinensis -north west coast (NWP: 6 spp): R. (Parasyringella) elegans, R. (Clathriodendron) melanorhops, R. (Clathriodendron) desmoxyiformis -central south east coast (CEP: 3 spp): R. (R.) gracilis, R. Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 87. Raspailia (Clathriodendron (squares), Hymeraphiopsis (squares), Parasyringella (triangles) and Raspailia spp (circles)) (QM Biolink database) (Rhabdermia, Ulosa)), north east and north coast (from GBR to Darwin (Coelocarteria)), and north west and north coast (from central west to northern GBR (Esperiopsis). Northsouth GBR bioregional split not well supported. (Raspailia) spp # 1695, #3578 -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP, TasP: 5 spp): R. (C.) cacticutis, R. (Clathriodendron) spp #850, #910, #3554, #3644 Family Rhabderemiidae Topsent, 1928 & Suborder Mycalina hajdu, van Soest & hooper, 1994 Family Esperiopsidae hentschel, 1923 & Family isodictyidae dendy, 1924 34. Rhabderemiidae (Microcionina), Esperiopsidae and isodictyidae spp (Mycalina) (Fig. 88) bioregional trends: Heterogeneous group showing differing distributions, ranging from north east coast (from GBR and western Pacific island rim Summary details: Database records of Rhabderemiidae (Rhabderemia (4 spp, 1 named)), Esperiopsidae (Amphilectus (1 unnamed spp), Esperiopsis (5 spp unnamed), Ulosa (10 spp, 1 named), and Isodictyidae (Coelocarteria (5 spp, 1 named)) are predominantly tropical, with differing patterns of distribution. Rhabderemia is restricted to the GBR and western Pacific island arc with 3 spp in the southern GBR. Coelocarteria has one widely distributed tropical species (C. singaporensis) from the southern GBR (CEB) to the Darwin region (west NP), with another sibling species (Coelocarteria sp. #1445) restricted to soft sediments in the Gulf of Carpentaria (east NP). Esperiopsis has one species (E. sp. #48) extending from the central west coast (CWP) to the northern GBR (NEB). Ulosa spongia has a similar distribution to Rhabderemia spp, extending along the GBR into the 121 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 88. Rhabderemiidae (triangles), Esperiopsidae (squares), Isodictyidae spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) bioregional trends: Higher diversity on east than west coasts, and in tropics than temperate regions; differentiation between north and south GBR; few species shared between bioregions. Pacific rim. Species diversity of all taxa is highest in the southern GBR (NEP: 9 spp), but species composition only weakly supports north-south split in GBR bioregions. -north GBR (NEB): Rhabderemia sp. #3834 -south GBR (NEP, CEB): Rhabderemia spp #2195, #2196, Amphilectus sp. #3487, Ulosa spp #2472, #1851, #1856, #2804 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): Coelocarteria sp. #1445 -Darwin region (NP): Ulosa sp. # 41 -north west coastal (NWP): Esperiopsis sp. #334 -Bass Strait (BassP): Coelocarteria sp. #892, Esperiopsis sp. #888 Family Desmacellidae Ridley & Dendy, 1886 35. Biemna, Sigmaxinella, Desmacella and Neofibularia spp (Fig. 89) 122 Summary details: Species of Desmacellidae are frequently toxic, and often associated with coral substrate. Records contain four genera, Biemna (21 spp, 4 named), Sigmaxinella (2 named spp), Desmacella (3 spp, 1 named) and Neofibularia (9 spp, 3 named), which are diverse and abundant in several localities. Peaks in diversity increase around the coast from west to east: north west coast (NWP: 5 spp), Darwin region (NP: 3 spp), north GBR (NEB: 7 spp) and south GBR (NEP: 9 spp). Tropical and temperate faunas are clearly differentiated by their species composition, including separation of northern and southern GBR faunas, and few species occur in more than one bioregion. -north GBR (NEB): Biemna spp #2260, #1662, #1611, #3451, Desmacella sp. #808 -south GBR (NEP): Biemna spp #817, #2467, #1977, Neoibularia irata, N. hartmani, Neoibularia spp #2589, #2206 -south east Queensland (CEB): Biemna Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 89. Biemna (circles), Sigmaxinella (triangles), Desmacella (triangles), Neoibularia spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) show peaks in diversity at the far north GBR and Tasmania, respectively. Northern and southern GBR bioregions are clearly differentiated. microstrongyla, Neoibularia sp. #2765 -central south east coast (CEP): Desmacella sp. #1915 -Tasmania (TasP): Biemna rufescens, Biemna sp. #3451, #3288 -southern Gulf (GulfP): Biemna tubulata -north and north west coasts (NPNWP): Biemna saucia -north coast (NP): Biemna sp. #188, Neoibularia sp. #3795, Sigmaxinella labellata -north west coast (NWP): Biemna sp. #317, #410, #793, #1977, Desmacella ithystela, Sigmaxinella soelae Family Podospongiidae de Laubenfels, 1936 36. Podospongiidae spp (Fig. 90) bioregional trends: Exclusively or predominantly tropical (Diacarnus) and temperate sponges (Sigmosceptrella) Summary details: Database records of Diacarnus (11 spp, 3 named), Podospongia (1 unnamed sp.) and Sigmosceptrella (6 spp, 2 named) show markedly different distributions. Diacarnus is exclusively tropical, distributed throughout the GBR and the Pacific island rim, with highest diversity in the far north GBR (6 spp). There is clear differentiation of the northern and southern GBR bioregions. Podospongia is exclusively deep water, and Sigmosceptrella is temperate, with the exception of a single record of an undescribed species from Cape York, and has a peak in diversity in Tasmania (TasP: 5 spp). Family Mycalidae Lundbeck, 1905 37. Mycale (Arenochalina), Mycale (Carmia) and Phlyctaenophora spp (Fig. 91) bioregional trends: Equal diversity 123 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 90. Diacarnus (circles), Podospongia (squares) and Sigmosceptrella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) in temperate as in tropical bioregions; no clear delineation between north-south GBR bioregions in terms of species composition; several species characterise particular bioregions. S u m m a r y details: Mycale (Arenochalina) (13 spp, 2 named), M. (Carmia) (15 FIG. 91. Mycale (Arenochalina) (circles), Mycale (Carmia) (triangles) and Phlyctaenophora spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) 124 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia spp, 4 named) and Phlyctaenophora (Barbozia) (2 spp, 1 named) are distributed equally in tropical and temperate Australia, although database records are presently depauperate for the south west coast. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Only one species (M. (Arenochalina) mirabilis) has a widespread tropical and temperate distribution, from the southern Gulf (GulfP) throughout eastern Australia to Cape York (NEB), with a single record from the north west coast (NWP). No clear differentiation between north and south GBR bioregions is indicated, although GBR bioregions have marginally higher diversity. Other species appear to be more restricted to one or few bioregions: -GBR (NEB-CEB: 10 spp): M. (C.) tylostrongyla, M. (Carmia) sp. #1822 -central south east coast (CEP: 6 spp): M. (C.) spongiosa -south east and south coasts (CEP-GulfP): M. (A.) lammula, M. (Carmia) sp. #842 -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP-TasP: 5 spp): M. (Carmia) sp. #3651 -southern Gulf and western Bass Strait (GulfP-WBassB: 4 spp): M. (A.) sp. #829 -north coast (NP-NWB: 3 spp): M. (C.) sp. #239 -north west coast (NWP: 2 spp) -south west coast (SWB: 3 spp): M. (C.) istulata, M. (C.) sulcata 38. Mycale (Acamasina), Mycale (Aegogropila), Mycale (Mycale) and Mycale (Oxymycale) spp (Fig. 92) bioregional trends: Highest diversity in tropics; substantially different species compositions differentiate south and north GBR bioregions, east and west coast faunas, and tropical and temperate bioregions. Summary details: Together these subgenera contain a highly diverse assemblage of species, some of which are also abundant at some site (e.g. Northwest Cape to the Port Hedland region on the mid north west coast, NWP, has exceptionally high biomass of Mycale spp; CSIRO Marine Research survey data). Database records of M. (Acamasina) contains 1 unnamed sp.; M. (Aegogropila) with 18 spp, 2 named; M. (Mycale) with 19 spp, 4 named; and M. (Oxymycale) with 5 unnamed spp. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Records contain predominantly tropical species, with peaks of diversity occurring in the southern portion of the north west coast (CWB, NWP: 10 spp), Darwin region (western part of NP: 9 spp), far northern GBR (NEB: 9 spp), central and southern GBR (NEP, CEB: 9 spp), and fewer species in the central south east coast (CEP: 6 spp), and Bass Straight and Tasmanian bioregions (BassP, TasP: 6 spp). Northern and southern bioregions of the GBR are clearly differentiated based on species composition. One species (M. (M.) spp #80) is widely distributed across tropical Australia, from the southern GBR (CEB) to north west coastal (NWP); one spans the west and north coasts, from the south west coast to Cape York (SWB – NP: M. (M.) pectinicola); and two span the north west coast to the Gulf of Carpentaria (NWP-NP: M. (M.) ridleyi, M. (Aegogropila) sp. #358). Other species are more restricted to one or few bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): M. (Aegogropila) spp #1217, #251, M. (M.) horrida -south GBR (NEP, CEB): M. (M.) spp #1117, M. (Aegogropila) parishii -north coast (NP): M. (M.) spp #250, #251 -north west coast (CWB, NWP): M. (Aegogropila) spp #396, #763, M. (Acamasina) sp. #710 -central south east coast (CEP): M. (Aegogropila) ancorina, M. (A.) spp #1482, #3572, M. (M.) cylindrica -Bass Straight and Tasmanian bioregions (BassP, TasP): M. (Aegogropila) sp. # 3299, M. (M.) spp #889, #909 -southern Gulf (GulfP): M. (M.) sp. #822 Suborder Myxillina Hajdu, Van Soest & Hooper, 1994 Family Chondropsidae Carter, 1886 39. Psammoclemma spp (Fig. 93) bioregional trends: The genus provides good corroboration of north east, south east and southern bioregions; genus predominantly 125 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 92. Mycale (Acamasina) (squares), Mycale (Oxymycale) (squares), Mycale (Aegogropila) (circles) and Mycale (Mycale) spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) presented here. eastern Australian in distribution; north and south GBR bioregions differentiated; peaks of diversity in one tropical bioregion (southern GBR) and one temperate fauna (Tasmania – Bass Strait). Summary details: Records of Psammoclemma are highly diverse, consisting of 59 spp (only 2 so far named), with two peaks in diversity: one tropical (southern GBR (NEP), with 20 spp), and one temperate (Tasmania-Bass Strait (BassP, TasP), with 19 spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps 126 East and south east coastal faunas are far more diverse than northern and western coastal faunas. There is a distinct boundary between GBR and southern faunas, with an overlap zone in south east Queensland, and only a few species overlap in their distributions between tropical and temperate faunas. North and south GBR bioregions are clearly differentiated in terms of species diversity and species composition, but mainly of rare species. One species (Psammoclemma sp. #271) occurs throughout the tropical east and temperate southeast coasts, from the southern Gulf (GulfP) to far north Queensland (NEB); one (Psammoclemma densum) occurs extensively throughout temperate and subtropical waters (southern NWP – southern NEP); one (Psammoclemma sp. #59) highly disjunct tropical – warm temperate from SWB, NP to Norfolk Ridge; five (Psammoclemma spp Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 93. Psammoclemma spp (QM Biolink database) #391, #2980, #1372, #1375, #2910) are widely distributed along the length of the GBR (NEB-CEB); and three (Psammoclemma spp #481, #827, #839) are widely distributed throughout the south east coast, from the Great Australian Bight (GABB) to central south east coast (CEB). Several species exhibit bioregional distributions: distinct -north GBR (NEB: 10 spp): Psammoclemma chaliniformis -central and south GBR (NEP: 20 spp): Psammoclemma sp. #2978, #2979 -south east Queensland (CEB: 9 spp): Psammoclemma sp. #1801 -wider south east coast (CEP-SEB): Psammoclemma sp. #1240 -central south east coast (CEP: 5 spp): Psammoclemma sp. #1183 -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassPTasP: 19 spp): Psammoclemma spp #900, #1304, #3427 -southern Gulf (GulfP: 11 spp): Psammoclemma sp. #485 -central south west coast (NWP-SWB): Psammoclemma sp. #248 -north coast (NP): Psammoclemma sp. #84 40. Phoriospongia, Chondropsis and Batzella spp (Fig. 94) bioregional trends: Predominantly eastern Australian, Phoriospongia and Batzella tropical and temperate, Chondropsis with exclusively temperate distributions; peaks in diversity on the southern GBR, central south east coast and Tasmania-Bass Strait; north and south GBR bioregions clearly 127 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 94. Phoriospongia (circles), Chondropsis (squares) and Batzella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) species diversity and species composition. One widely distributed species (Phoriospongia sp. #293) in tropical waters, extending into the central south east coast. differentiated. Summary details: Phoriospongia (29 spp, only 1 named so far), Chondropsis (12 unnamed spp) and Batzella spp (9 unnamed spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Predominantly eastern Australian distribution, in tropical and temperate waters. Phoriospongia and Batzella, and Chondropsis with markedly different distributions, with the latter confined to Bass Strait – Tasmanian region. Peaks in diversity on the southern GBR (NEP: 12 spp), central south east coast (CEP: 9 spp), and Tasmania – Bass Strait (TasP, BassP: 12 spp) with little overlap in species composition. North and south GBR bioregions clearly differentiated in 128 -north GBR (NEB): Phoriospongia spp #1298, #3093 -south GBR (NEP): Phoriospongia spp #1827, #1831, #1838, #2160, -south east Queensland (CEB): Phoriospongia sp. #1080 -central south east coast (CEP): Phoriospongia spp #1456, #1462, #1483 -Tasmania and Bass Strait (BassP, TasP): Chondropsis spp #3447, #3553 41. Strongylacidon Psammoclemma spp (Fig. 95) and bioregional trends: Confined to eastern Australian region; north and south GBR differentiated in terms of species diversity; highest diversity in southern GBR; little overlap in species between bioregions. Summary details: Strongylacidon (16 spp, 3 named) and a peculiar Psammoclemma + macroalgal complex Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 95. Strongylacidon (circles), and Psammoclemma spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) (with a single unnamed sp.) neither diverse nor abundant, confined to the eastern Australian fauna, but with temperate and tropical distributions. Peak in diversity in the southern GBR (NEP: 6 app). Only one species (S. stelliderma) distributed across more than one bioregion, but confined to southern waters (GulfP – TasP). Several species characteristic of particular bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): S. inaequalis, Strongylacidon sp. #1619 FIG. 96. Coelosphaera (circles), Histodermella (squares) and Inlatella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) 129 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 97. Lissodendoryx (Acanthodoryx (triangles), Anomodoryx (triangles), Ectyodoryx (squares), Lissodendoryx (circles) and Waldoschmidtia spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) -south GBR (NEP): Strongylacidon spp #2181, #2588, #2796, #2840 -south east Queensland (CEB): Strongylacidon sp. #1398, #2900 -central south east coast (CEP): Strongylacidon sp. #1484 -Tasmania (TasP): Strongylacidon sp. #904, #3443 Family Coelosphaeridae Dendy, 1922 42. Coelosphaera, Histodermella and Inflatella spp (Fig. 96) bioregional trends: Highest diversity in the Gulf of Carpentaria (NP); north and south GBR bioregions differentiated. Summary details: Coelosphaera (9 unnamed spp), Histodermella (2 unnamed spp) and Inflatella (3 unnamed spp) have only a single widely distributed species (Coelosphaera #1299) across the north coast (NWP – NP), and one species (Coelosphaera sp. #469) with disjunct tropical distribution on west and east coasts (NWP, NEP). Highest 130 diversity is in the Gulf of Carpentaria (NP: 4 spp), reflecting the habitat preferences of Coelosphaera for soft substrates. North and south GBR bioregions differentiated. Few other patterns are evident, but several species are restricted to particular bioregions. -north GBR (NEB): Histodermella sp. #3642 -south GBR (NEB): Coelosphaera sp. #1979 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): Coelosphaera spp #987, #1310, #1316 -Tasmania (TasP): Coelosphaera sp. #3677, Inlatella sp #879 43. Lissodendoryx (Acanthodoryx, Anomodoryx, Ectyodoryx, Lissodendoryx and Waldoschmidtia) spp (Fig. 97) bioregional trends: Temperate and tropical peaks in diversity, but only one species considered significant component of the benthos on GBR, and two for southern temperate waters of south and south west coasts; poor differentiation of GBR bioregions. Summary details: Lissodendoryx Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 98. Tedania, Tedaniopsis, Hemitedania (circles), Monanchora (triangles), Dendoricella, Fibulia and Pyloderma spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) characterise bioregions: has five subgenera, with database records consisting of Acanthodoryx (3 spp, 1 named), Anomodoryx (2 spp, 1 named), Ectyodoryx (10 spp, 1 named), Lissodendoryx (15 spp, 4 named) and Waldoschmidtia (2 spp, 1 named). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity occur at the far north GBR (NEB: 5 spp) and TasmaniaBass Strait (5 spp), with no species overlapping into adjacent bioregions, but species diversity is relatively low for the genus and only one species (L. (Ectyodoryx) sp. #1001) could be considered a significant component of the benthos on coral reefs of the GBR. Two other species (L. (Ectyodoryx) maculatus, L. (Lissodendoryx) sp. #489) extend across temperate and subtropical waters from the south to mid west coasts (GulfP – CWB). Northern and southern bioregions of the GBR are poorly differentiated. Few species particular -entire GBR (NEB-CEB): L. (Ectyodoryx) sp. #1001 -north GBR (NEB): L. (Ectyodoryx) aspera, L. (Acanthodoryx) ibrosa -central south east coast (CEP): L. (Waldoschmidtia) sp. #1926 -Bass Strait-Tasmania (TasP, BassP, WBassB): L. (Anomodoryx) dendyi, L. (Lissodendoryx) isodictyalis, L. (L.) sp. #841, #849 -south west coast (SWB): L. (Anomodoryx) sp. #1039 -north coast (western NP): L. (Lissodendoryx) timorensis, L. (L.) sp. #50 Family Tedaniidae Ridley & Dendy, 1886 Family Crambeidae Levi, 1963 Family Dendoricellidae Hentschel, 1923 44. Tedaniidae (Tedania, Hemitedania), Crambeidae (Monanchora) and dendoricellidae (Dendoricella, Fibulia, Pyloderma) spp (Fig. 98) bioregional trends: Predominantly temperate (Tedaniai Fibulia) or tropical (Monanchora) spp showing markedly different distributions; only few species abundant; peaks in diversity in southern (Bass Strait, Tasmania, south 131 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 99. Crella (circles) and Echinostylinos spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) west coast) and central east coast bioregions; northern and southern bioregions of GBR undifferentiated. Summary details: Tedaniidae (Tedania (Tedania) (21 spp, 3 named), Tedania (Tedaniopsis) (1 unnamed sp.), Hemitedania (1 named sp.)), Crambeidae (Monanchora (12 spp, 2 named) and Dendoricellidae (Dendoricella (1 unnamed sp.), Fibulia (2 unnamed spp), Pyloderma (1 unnamed sp.)) are diverse but only few species are ever abundant in any particular locality. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Tedania and Fibulia spp are predominantly temperate, where they can be significant components of the benthos. One species (T. anhelans, formerly known as T. digitata) is distributed throughout the south east and south coasts, extending from GulfP to CEB, with isolated records from SWB and NP. It is a highly toxic species (referred to as the ‘fire sponge’) and suspected to be transported by human activities 132 (bilge water, ship fouling etc.) (CSIRO CRIMP database). By comparison, Monanchora is predominantly tropical, with three species occurring along the GBR into southern PNG (CEB-NEB), and one unique to the south west coast (SWB). Peaks in diversity occur in the Tasmania – Bass Strait (7 spp), GBR (7 spp), south east Queensland (7 spp), and south west coast bioregions (6 spp). Several species are distributed across adjacent bioregions (e.g. T. (Tedania) sp. #246 and Fibulia sp. #837 across the south and mid west coasts: from TasP-NWP; T. (Tedania) sp. #462 across the south and mid east coasts: SEB-NEP), whereas most species appear to be restricted to particular bioregions: -entire GBR (CEB-NEB): T. (Tedania) sp. #433, Monanchora spp #994, #1541 -north coast (NP): T. (Tedania) sp. #27 -Tasmania and Bass Strait (BassP, TasP): T. (Tedania) sp. #848, #899, Fibulia sp. #893 -south west coast (SWB): Monanchora sp. #740 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia clearly differentiated by their species composition. Family Crellidae Dendy, 1922 & Family Phellodermidae Van Soest & Hajdu, 2002 45. Crella Echinostylinos spp (Fig. 99) (Crellidae) and (Phellodermiidae) bioregional trends: One widespread species in temperate and tropical waters, and one common in temperate south east waters; highest diversity in northern GBR and differentiated from southern GBR; diversity higher on east than west coast. Summary details: Crella (with subgenera Crella, Grayella, Yvesia) has database records for 18 spp (4 named), and Echinostylinos with 5 unnamed spp for the Australian fauna. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Two species (C. incrustans, C. spinulata) are common components of the temperate and tropical faunas, respectively, comprising significant components of the benthos in some localities (e.g. Darwin region, NP). The former species is restricted to the south east Australian coast (GulfP-CEB) whereas the latter has a nearly circumcontinental distribution. The highest diversity occurs in the northern GBR (8 spp), with one widespread GBR species (C. (Crella) sp. #1525), and diversity is higher on the east than west coasts. Echinostylinos, by comparison, is relatively rare and confined mainly to deeper waters apart from a tropical shallow water species in NP. A few species are restricted to particular bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): C. (Crella) cyathophora -Darwin region (western NP): Echinostylinos sp. #1275 Family Desmacididae Schmidt, 1870 Summary details: Desmapsamma (34 spp, only 2 named) and Desmacidon (12 unnamed spp) contain a diverse assemblage of species with some species also abundant in particular localities (e.g. North West Shelf, NWP). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Both genera have tropical and temperate species. Peaks of diversity occur in the northern GBR (NEB: 10 spp), north coast (NP: 7 spp), Bass Strait – Tasmania (BassP-TasP: 10 spp), southern Gulf (GulfP: 7 spp), and north west coast (11 spp). Northern and southern bioregions of the GBR are moderately well differentiated by their species composition. Several species have wider distributions across several bioregions: Desmapsamma sp. #241 and Desmacidon sp. #980 throughout tropical Australia (NWPNEP); D. psammodes with a disjunct distribution on the tropic either side of the continent (SWB-NWP, and CEB); Desmapsamma sp. #1528 throughout the GBR (NEP-NEB); Desmapsamma sp. #502 in south east Australian region (GulfP-TasP); Desmacidon sp. #255 throughout the north west coast (NWP-western NP). Other species are restricted to one or few bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Desmapsamma spp #423, #3048 -south east Queensland (CEB): Desmapsamma sp. #1125 -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP, TasP, SEB): Desmapsamma sp. #617, #831 -southern Gulf (GulfP): Desmacidon sp. #840 -north west coast (southern part of NWP): Desmapsamma sp. #1746 Family Hymedesmiidae Topsent, 1928 and 47. Acanthancora, Hamigera, Hemimycale, Hymedesmia, Phorbas, Spanioplon spp (Fig. 101) bioregional trends: Temperate and tropical species distributions both with peaks of high diversity; north and south GBR regions differentiated; north east, south east and central west coasts bioregional trends: Higher diversity in tropical east coast than other bioregions, with north and south GBR bioregions differentiated by their species composition. 46. Desmapsamma Desmacidon spp (Fig. 100) 133 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 100. Desmapsamma (circles) and Desmacidon spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) Summary details: Hymedesmiidae is represented in database records by the following genera: Acanthancora (2 spp, 1 named), Hamigera (2 named spp), Hemimycale (4 unnamed spp), Hymedesmia (9 spp, 3 named), Phorbas (14 spp, 1 named) and Spanioplon (1 unnamed sp.). No species are exceptionally abundant or diverse, but peaks in diversity occur in the north GBR (NEB: 5 spp) and south GBR-south east Queensland (NEP-CEB: 6 spp), with both GBR bioregions differentiated by their species compositions. Diversity higher in tropics and on east coast than in temperate and west coast faunas. Two species show widespread tropical distributions: Phorbas sp. #1259 throughout tropical Australia (NWPCEB); Phorbas sp. #1134 throughout the GBR (NEP-NEB). Other species were recorded from single bioregions: 134 -north GBR (NEB): Phorbas sp. #1539, Hamigera strongylata, Spanioplon sp. #2518 -south GBR (NEPCEB): Hymedesmia mertoni, H. grisea -central south east coast (CEP): Hamigera dendyi -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP, TasP): Acanthancora clavilobata, Acanthancora sp. #3652 -north west coast (southern part of NWP): Phorbas sp. #713 -south west coast (SWB): P. ictitioides Family Iotrochotidae Dendy, 1922 48. Iotrochota, Iotrochotopsamma spp (Fig. 102) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical; several spp with wide tropical distributions, but GBR with higher diversity and different species composition than west and north coasts, and north and south GBR bioregions differentiated. Summary details: Iotrochota (26 spp, 6 named) and Iotrochotopsamma (1 named sp.) are diverse, contain some abundant species in local populations, and predominantly tropical. Species Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 101. Acanthancora, Hamigera (triangles), Hemimycale, Hymedesmia (squares), Phorbas and Spanioplon spp (circles) (QM Biolink are frequently e p i p h y t i c , bioeroding, chemically toxic, boring into or smothering c o r a l l i n e substrates. Peaks of diversity occur in the northern GBR (NEB: 12 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 15 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: FIG. 102. Iotrochota (circles) and Iotrochotopsamma spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) 135 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 103. Ectyonops, Forcepia (circles), Myxilla (triangles), Psammochela and Stelodoryx spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) 7 spp), Darwin region (western part of NP: 6 spp) and north west coast (NWP: 6 spp). There is one widely distributed species (I. acerata) occurring in both tropical and temperate bioregions (TasP, SWB, NWP, NP) that is possibly translocated by human activities (bilge water, ship hull fouling); two widely distributed, geographically sympatric, tropical species (I. baculifera, I. coccinea) extending from the north west coast (NWP) to south east Queensland (CEB); and one (Iotrochota sp. #377) occurring on soft substrates from the north west coast (NWP) to the northern GBR (NEB). Northern and southern GBR-south east Queensland bioregions are clearly differentiated on the basis of species diversity and species composition. Several species are markers for particular bioregions: -entire GBR (NEB-CEB): Iotrochota spp #2193, #2386, #2818 -north GBR (NEB): I. purpurea, Iotrochota spp #2682, #2256 -south GBR (NEP): I. foveolaria, Iotrochota sp. #1844 -south east Queensland (CEB): Iotrochota spp #1828, #2330 136 -central south east coast (CEP): Iotrochotopsamma arbuscula -Darwin region (western part of NP): Iotrochota spp #61, #161 -mid west coast (CWP): Iotrochota sp. #701 Family Myxillidae Dendy, 1922 49. Ectyonops, Forcepia, Myxilla, Psammochela, Stelodoryx spp (Fig. 103) bioregional trends: Tropical and temperate genera, with temperate and tropical peaks in diversity (Myxilla predominantly tropical); species in GBR region poorly represented. Summary details: Myxillidae is represented in collections by: Ectyonops (1 unnamed sp.), Forcepia (7 spp, 1 named), Myxilla (7 unnamed spp), Psammochela (4 unnamed spp) and Stelodoryx (2 spp, 1 named), which are neither diverse nor abundant in localities sampled to date, and genera show markedly different patterns in their distributions (Myxilla predominantly tropical, Forcepia and Psammochela predominantly temperate). Highest diversity occurs in the Bass Strait – Tasmania (BassP, TasP: 6 spp) and Darwin regions (western part of NP: 4 spp), with only two species recorded Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 104. Latrunculia spp (QM Biolink database) so far for the entire GBR. Only one species (Forcepia (Forcepia) sp. #851) spans more than a single bioregion (BassPTasP), which also has a remarkable diversity (5 spp) of Forcepia spp. Several species are markers for some bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): F. (Forcepia) sp. #424, Myxilla (Ectyodoryx) sp. #420 -Tasmania-Bass Strait (TasP-BassP): F. (Forcepia) biceps, F. (Forcepia) spp #851, #906, #3637, #3638, Myxilla (Burtonancora) sp. #3452 Suborder Latrunculina Kelly & Samaai, 2002 Family Latrunculiidae Topsent, 1922 50. Latrunculia spp (Fig. 104) bioregional trends: Low diversity, low abundance, but species show distinct bioregionalisation with no overlap in distributions. Summary details: Six species, two named, showing distinct regional distributions: -north GBR (NEB): Latrunculia spp #2390, #2691 -southeast coast (CEB-SEB): Latrunculia brevis -Bass Strait: Latrunculia conulosa -south west coast (SWB): Latrunculia sp. #1686 -north west shelf (NWP): Latrunculia spp #1048 Order Halichondrida Gray, 1867 Family Axinellidae Carter, 1875 51. Auletta, Dragmacidon Ptilocaulis spp (Fig. 105) and bioregional trends: Exclusively tropical, nearly completely east coast group of species, most coral reef associated, indicator of north-south differentiation of GBR. Summary details: Auletta (6 unnamed spp), Dragmacidon (6 spp, 2 named), Ptilocaulis (11 spp, 3 named), exclusively tropical distribution, nearly completely east coast group of species, two widespread species Dragmacidon australis and Ptilocaulis fusiformis, both associated with coral reef distribution, former in both north east (to CEB) and northern bioregions (to NWP), the latter restricted to western Pacific (CEBNEB and Pacific island arc). Highest diversity on the GBR (NEB-CEP) (9 spp Ptilocaulis), with north-south split indicated: -north GBR (NEB): Ptilocaulis spp #454, #3816, Auletta sp.#3817 137 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 105. Auletta (circles), Dragmacidon (squares) and Ptilocaulis spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) change at Torres Strait. -south GBR (NEP-CEB): Ptilocaulis spp #3490, #2791 52. Cymbastela spp (Fig. 106-111) bioregional trends: Good bioregion markers for GBR (NEP-CEB), NP, SWB and GulfP, and east-west tropical species pairs supporting a major faunal FIG. 106. Cymbastela spp (QM Biolink database) 138 Summary details: Unique group of cyanobacterialassociated sponge species some occupying distinct coral reef-associated habitats, most diverse and abundant in the tropics but also with temperate species. The Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 107. Distribution of Cymbastela species in the NPA (red square). Red ellipses indicate east-west species pairs (QM Biolink database) (black crosses represent sampling sites) (see previous igure for species legend). genus is endemic to the southern Indowest Pacific, and with the most species (7 described and 13 undescribed morphospecies) in Australia. Highest diversity in GBR (5 spp), unique bioregional associations for particular species: -restricted to GBR (NEBCEB): C. coralliophila -widespread east coast, GBR (NEB) to south east coastal (SEB): C. concentrica -restricted to north coast (NP): C. stipitata -widespread north and north west coasts (NP – NWP): C. vespertina -restricted to south west (SWB): C. marshae -restricted to south (GulfP): C. notiaina Special analysis of Northern Planning Area. Only two species are known so far to occur in the NPA (C. vespertina, C. coralliophila) (Fig. 107), FIG. 108. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Cymbastela coralliophila Hooper & Bergquist (largely geographically sympatric with C. concentrica) FIG. 109. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Cymbastela concentrica (Lendenfeld) (largely geographically sympatric with C. coralliophila) 139 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 110. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Cymbastela vespertina Hooper & Bergquist (occurs within the geographical range of C. stipitata) FIG. 111. Specimen records and CAAB modelled distributions for Cymbastela stipitata (Bergquist & Tizard) (occurs within the geographic range of C. vespertina) FIG. 112. Axinella spp (QM Biolink database) but there are two sets of east-west speciespairs occurring either side of this region: C. vespertina and C. stipitata in the west, and C. coralliophila and C. concentrica in the east, both strongly associated with coral reef habitats (red ellipses in Fig. 107). There appears to be 140 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 113. Phakellia spp (QM Biolink database) no overlap between these east-west species-pairs, suggesting strongly determinant biogeographic influences in their regional distributions, and species turnover occurring across the NP barrier (Gulf of Carpentaria). Actual datapoints and CAAB modelled distributions for these four key Cymbastela species found bounding the NPA are presented in the following figures. 53. Axinella spp (Fig. 112) bioregional trends: East-west species pair differentiating GBR – north and northwest faunas; species markers for GBR, NWP, NP and CWP. Summary details: Very high diversity (53 spp, only 2 currently named with confidence), primarily tropical Australian distribution (most unnamed species not differentiated in this analysis). Eastwest species pair: Axinella flabellata widely distributed throughout GBR (from CEB-NEB) on east coast, another A. aruensis on north and northwest coast (western side of NP – NWP), and other species confined only to NWP (Axinella sp. #559), NP-NWB (Axinella sp. #26) and CWP (Axinella sp. #728). 54. Phakellia spp (Fig. 113) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, highest diversity on north west coast, higher diversity on north GBR than south GBR. Summary details: Predominantly tropical, with highest diversity in northwestern Australia (NP-NWP: 17 spp). Highly speciose (37 species, only 5 named with confidence) and some regional populations (e.g. P. stipitata on GBR) also highly abundant. Several species (P. dendyi, Phakellia spp #131, #646) with widespread tropical 141 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 114. Reniochalina spp (QM Biolink database) distributions. -entire GBR (NEBCEB): P. stipitata -northern GBR (NEB): P. carduus -north and northwest coasts (NP-NWP): P. conulosa, Phakellia sp. #244 -north west coast (NWP): Phakellia spp #508, #705 55. Reniochalina spp (Fig. 114) bioregional trends: Strong bioregional marker for tropical fauna, strong FIG. 115. Desmoxyidae spp (Desmoxya (squares), Didiscus (squares), Higginsia (circles), Myrmekioderma (triangles), Parahigginsia spp (crosses)) (QM Biolink database) 142 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 116. Acanthella spp (QM Biolink database) differentiation between north east and north west (NWB-NWP) faunas. Summary details: Nineteen species (only 2 named so far), with extensive tropical distribution from CEB to NWP, and two species (R. stalagmites, Reniochalina sp. #122) also highly abundant in some regional faunas (e.g. NP). Highest diversity (8 spp) on northwest coastal (NP to NWP). -north west coastal (NWPNWB): Reniochalina spp #172, #285, #287, #798 Family Desmoxyidae Hallmann, 1917 56. Desmoxya, Didiscus, Higginsia, Myrmekioderma, Parahigginsia spp (Fig. 115) bioregional trends: Strong bioregional marker for tropical fauna, with peaks of diversity on north east (NEB) and north west (NWP) coasts, but most common to both bioregions, and NP fauna less diverse. Summary details: Records of family Desmoxyidae consist of Desmoxya (3 spp, 2 named), Didiscus (1 sp unnamed), Higginisia (8 spp, 5 named), Myrmekioderma (5 spp, 3 named) and Parahigginsia (2 spp, 1 named) have nearly exclusively tropical distributions, with highest diversity in GBR (7 spp) and north west coast (7 spp), with most species extending into both regions, but a species poor region in NP (3 spp). The family contains three very common and often abundant spp: H. scabra, H. mixta and M. granulosa (southern GBR (CEB) to north west coastal (NWP)). Family Dictyonellidae Van Soest, Diaz & Pomponi, 1990 57. Acanthella spp (Fig. 116) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, highly indicative surrogate of GBR bioregion but without strong support for any north-south GBR differentiation. Summary details: Highly diverse predominantly tropical genus (26 species recorded, 7 named), some species very abundant in coral reef 143 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 117. Liosina (triangles) and Rhaphoxya spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) habitats, with several characteristic of GBR fauna. Highest diversity in the GBR (10 spp) but species poor indicators of any northern – southern differentiation of GBR bioregions. One species (A. cavernosa) with widespread tropical distribution from CEB-NWP. -entire GBR (NEB-CEB): A. costata, A. constricta, A. klethra, Acanthella spp #1562, #2161, #2802 FIG. 118. Dictyonella (triangles) and Stylissa spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) 144 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 119. Axinyssa spp (QM Biolink database) south bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Liosina spp #425, 2129 -south GBR (NEPCEB): Rhaphoxya spp #2586, 2785 -south east coast (CEP): Rhaphoxya sp. #2609 -Bass Strait (BassP): Rhaphoxya felina -southern Gulf (GulfP): Liosina sp. #834 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB): Acanthella spp #583, #3002, #3462 58.Liosina and Rhaphoxya spp (Fig. 117) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, highest diversity on GBR, some support for north-south differentiation of GBR, a few species also markers for south eastern bioregions. Summary details: Liosina (6 spp, 2 named) and Rhaphoxya (11 spp, 4 named) have mainly tropical records with highest diversity in the GBR (8 species). Two (L. paradoxa and R. pallida) are widely distributed on the GBR and the former is also frequently abundant. Some support for differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions. Also apparent endemic species for south east and 59. Dictyonella and Stylissa spp (Fig. 118) bioregional trends: Exclusively tropical, highest diversity on GBR, strong species differentiation between east and west coast faunas, no indication of north-south bioregionalisation on GBR. Summary details: Dictyonella (2 unnamed species) and Stylissa (8 spp, 4 named) are represented by exclusively tropical collections, with highest diversity (6spp) in the GBR. Strong indication of east-west species differentiation, but not indicative of any north-south regionalization within the GBR. -north and south GBR (CEB-NEB), and extending into the Paciic islands: Stylissa carteri, S. massa, Stylissa spp #1637, 1741, Dictyonella sp. #2801 -north west coast (NWB, NWP): 145 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 120. Ciocalypta (circles, triangles), Ciocalapata (squares) and Collocalypta spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) different from east coast species: -northern GBR (NEB: 12 spp): Axinyssa spp #2257, #2929, #3252, #3849 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB: 10 spp): Axinyssa spp #1939, #2590, #2824, #3464 S. labelliformis, S. hapalia, Stylissa sp. #1251 Family Halichondriidae Gray, 1867 60. Axinyssa spp (Fig. 119) bioregional trends: Tropical group most diverse on GBR and clearly differentiating north and south GBR bioregions, and species composition different on east vs. north coasts. Summary details: The genus is diverse in tropical Australasian waters (41 spp, only 3 named so far), but never abundant in any locality sampled to date. Highest diversity is on the GBR (21 spp), with clearly differentiated north and south bioregions (with only two species common to both, Axinyssa sp. #1878, #3489). North and northwest coast faunas low diversity (3 spp) but 146 61. Ciocalypta, Ciocalapata and Collocalypta spp (Fig. 120) bioregional trends: Tropical group with a single widely distributed species and several species markers for eastern and northern bioregions (CEB, NEP, NP) Summary details: Ciocalypta (28 spp, 6 named), Ciocalapata (1 unnamed sp) and Collocalypta (1 unnamed sp) show moderate diversity but low abundance with the exception of Ciocalypta tyleri distributed across the tropics (from CEB-NWP). Peaks of diversity occur in the Northwest Shelf (NWP: 6 spp), Darwin region (NP: 5 spp), central east coast (lower CEB: 8 spp), and central and southern GBR (NEP: 6 spp), with only one species (C. tyleri) common to all regions. Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 121. Halichondria spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) 62. Halichondria spp (Figs 121122) bioregional trends: Peaks of diversity on GBR, Darwin, Gulf of Carpentaria, Sydney and Tasmanian regions, with little overlap between species. North and south GBR bioregions differentiated. Summary details: Collections consist of tropical and temperate faunas. Highly speciose (82 spp, only 6 currently named), with highest diversity on the GBR (31 spp), and northern and southern GBR differentiated by species composition with overlap in only a small number of species. Other peaks of diversity in the Darwin region (NP: 10 spp), Gulf of Carpentaria (NP: 8 spp), TasP (5 spp) and Sydney region (6 spp). Differentiation of eastern and western species indicated by turnover of species pair H. stalagmites (east, NEP-NP) and H. phakellioides (west, NWP-NP) at NP. Also indicated is a distinct Gulf of Carpentaria fauna (NP) associated with soft sediments (6 spp mostly unique to the region). Most species represented by one or few records and therefore not differentiated in maps. -entire GBR (CEB-NEB): H. bergquistae, Halichondria spp #1227 -north GBR (NEB): Halichondria spp #1984, #2702, #2922 -south GBR (CEB): Halichondria spp #1186, #2807, #2658 -central south east coast (CEP): Halichondria spp #3581, #3582, #3583, #3584 -north coast (NP): H. vansoesti, H. darwinensis, Halichondria spp #2404, 3582 -Tasmania (TasP): Halichondria spp #896, #898, #3448, #3680 -south west coast (SWB): Halichondria spp #744, #809, #806 147 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 122. Halichondria spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) 63. Hymeniacidon, Amorphinopsis and Epipolasis spp (Fig. 123) bioregional trends: Relatively low diversity and abundance on GBR but north and south bioregions supported; NP and CEP differentiated from GBR faunas. Summary details: Hymeniacidon (20 spp, 3 named), Amorphinopsis (8 spp, 3 named) and Epipolasis (4 unnamed spp) have highest diversity in Darwin region (NP: 8 spp) and Sydney region (CEP: 4 spp), with low diversity (and abundance) on the GBR although species groups differentiate northern and southern GBR bioregions. Species groups also characteristic of other bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Amorphinopsis sp. #3136, Hymeniacidon spp #1623, #2261 -south GBR (CEB-NEP): Amorphinopsis sp. #2334, Hymeniacidon sp. #1862, Epipolasis sp. #799 -central south east coast (CEP): 148 Hymeniacidon spp #1453, #1487, #2335, #3575 -Darwin region (NP): Amorphinopsis excavans, A. sacciformis, A. foetida, Hymeniacidon vernonensis, H. popeae, H. gracilis -northwest coast (NWP): Amorphinopsis sp. #1785, Epipolasis sp. #452, Hymeniacidon spp #395, #557 -southern coast (WBassB-GulfP): Hymeniacidon sp. #509 64. Spongorites and Topsentia spp (Fig. 124) bioregional trends: No ubiquitous species, low diversity, few or single unique species define particular bioregions. Summary details: Spongosorites (8 unnamed spp), and Topsentia (14 spp, 4 named) are neither diverse nor abundant, with no widely distributed species and only one small peak of diversity in the Darwin region (NP). No overlap in species composition between adjacent areas, and single or few species can define particular bioregions: -central and southern GBR (NEP, CEB: 3 spp): Spongosorites sp. #2471, Topsentia sp. #1322, #3254 -north coast (NP: 3 spp): Topsentia halichondrioides, T. dura, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 123. Hymeniacidon (circles), Amorphinopsis (triangles) and Epipolasis spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) Spongosorites sp. #57 -northwest coast (NWP: 2 spp): Topsentia sp. #1438, Spongosorites sp. #349 -GulfP: Spongosorites sp. #1131 -BassP: Spongosorites sp. #1417 -CEP: Spongosorites sp. #1461 FIG. 124. Spongosorites (triangles) and Topsentia spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) 149 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 125. Dactylia spp (QM Biolink database) Order haplosclerida Topsent, 1928 Suborder haplosclerina Topsent, 1928 Family Callyspongiidae de laubenfels, 1936 65. Dactylia spp (Fig. 125) bioregional trends: Predominantly found in the GBR region, with highest diversity in the southern region, diminishing both north and south; one widely distributed south and east coast species, two ‘apparently endemic’ southern species. Summary details: Dactylia (17 spp, 4 named) is predominantly confined to the north and central east Australian coast, especially the GBR region, with some species being highly prevalent and extending throughout the GBR (D. pseudoreticulata, Dactylia spp #1368, #1376, #1584). One species (Dactylia sp. #1846) widespread from 150 the southern Gulf to Cape York (GulfP – NEB). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity occur in the central and southern GBR (NEP: 15 spp), with species diversity diminishing to the north (NEB: 7 spp) and south (CEB: 4 spp, and CEP: 1 sp.). Few species are markers for particular bioregions, aside from those occurring on the central and southern GBR: -south GBR (NEP): Dactylia spp #1823, #1941, #2581, #2600, #2813, #2943 -central south east coast (CEP-CEB): D. radix -southern Gulf (GulfP): D. annulata -Tasmania (TasP): Dactylia spp # 66. Arenosclera and Siphonochalina spp (Fig. 126) bioregional trends: Predominantly east coast, tropical species most diverse on the GBR and in south east Queensland, but with north and south GBR regions not clearly delineated. Both genera are good markers for the GBR. Summary details: Arenosclera (9 spp, 1 named) and Siphonochalina Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 126. Arenosclera (triangles) and and Siphonochalina spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) Arenosclera sp. #193, #3426, Siphonochalina sp. #3561, #3562 -Darwin region (western part of NP): Siphonochalina sp. #363 (21 spp, 1 named) have predominantly tropical distributions, similar to those seen in Dactylia spp, exclusively east coast and with only few species records for temperate waters. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity occur in the northern GBR (NEB: 7 spp), central and southern GBR (NEP: 10 spp) and south east Queensland (11 spp), although delineation of northern and southern GBR bioregions is not clear, with several widely distributed species along the length of the GBR (Arenosclera sp. #1363, S. deficiens and Siphonochalina spp #1373), and only few unique species. A few species are markers for specific bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Arenosclera sp. #3114 -south GBR (NEP): A. arabica, Siphonochalina sp. #2816 -south east Queensland (CEB): Arenosclera spp #2773, #2775, Siphonochalina sp. #2778 -Bass Strait and Tasmania (BassP-TasP): 67. Callyspongia ( C l a d o c h a l i n a , Toxochalina, Spinosella and Euplacella) spp (Fig. 127) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical east coast distribution, particularly associated with the GBR, without clear differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions but with marginally higher diversity on the central and southern GBR; one widely distributed tropical species. Summary details: Callyspongia subgenera Cladochalina (4 named spp), Toxochalina (4 spp, 2 named), Spinosella (1 unnamed sp.) and Euplacella (19 unnamed spp) are predominantly tropical, especially associated with coral substrates on the GBR, with marginally higher diversity on the central and southern GBR (15 spp), diminishing slightly northwards (northern GBR, NEB: 8 spp) and southwards (south east Queensland, CEB: 9 spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Northern and southern GBR bioregions 151 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 127. Callyspongia (Cladochalina (squares), Toxochalina, Spinosella (triangles) and Euplacella spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) are not well differentiated by their species composition. One species (C. (Toxochalina) schulzei) occurs across the tropics, from mid-north west coast to the southern GBR (NWP-NEP), several species occur throughout the GBR (C. (Euplacella) spp #387, #2559, #2814, C. (Toxochalina) sp. #553), with others restricted to one or two bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): C. (Cladochalina) subarmigera, C. (Euplacella) sp. #1527 -south GBR (NEP): C. (Euplacella) sp. #1949, #2820, C. (Cladochalina) vaginalis, C. (Toxochalina) sp. #3504 -south east Queensland (CEB): C. (Euplacella) spp #387, #1176 -north coast (NP): C. (Cladochalina) diffusa -south west coast (SWB): C. (Euplacella) sp. #715, C. (Spinosella) sp. #734 68. Callyspongia spp (Fig. 128-129) (Callyspongia) bioregional trends: Highly diverse subgenus, and very abundant in some habitats; predominant in the tropics 152 and especially on the GBR; highest diversity in the central-southern GBR, with northern and southern GBR bioregions differentiated on the basis of species diversity and species composition; poor diversity in temperate waters. Summary details: Callyspongia (Callyspongia) is one of the most diverse of all sponge subgenera, with database records containing 145 spp, only 11 so far named, distributed throughout Australian waters. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. The highest diversity is in the tropics, particularly on the north east coast, with differential peaks in diversity occurring in the northern GBR (NEB: 40 spp), central and southern GBR (NEP: 52 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 19 spp), central south east coast (CEP: 6 spp), north coast (NP: 15 spp) and north west coast (NWP: 13 spp). In some regions populations are highly abundant although not necessarily accompanied by high species diversity (e.g. Darwin and North West Shelf region). A few species have wide distributions Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 128. Callyspongia (Callyspongia) spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) #2695, #2798, #2935 -south east Queensland (CEB): C. (C.) spp #672, #916, #1116, #2498, $2976 -central south east coast (CEP): C. (C.) trichita, C. (C.) sp. #1452, #1898 -Tasmania (TasP): C. (C.) sp. #3296 -southern Gulf (GulfP): C. (C.) sp. #532 -north coast (NP): C. (C.) sp. #234, #1314, #2709 -north west coast (NWP): C. (C.) sp. #407, #553, #1819 -south west coast (SWB): C. (C.) sp. #755 Family Chalinidae Gray, 1867 throughout tropical Australasia (e.g. C. (C.) aerizusa, C. (C.) carens, C. (Callyspongia) sp. #108, #138, #3070), or within broad bioregions such as the GBR (NEB-NEP: C. (Callyspongia) spp #1369, #1946, #2022, #2025, #2879, #2998), or the north west and north coasts (NWP-NP: C. (Callyspongia) sp. #102, #233), whereas most species are restricted to single bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): C. (C.) communis, C. (C.) spp #1203, #1300, #2392, #2393, #2395, #2673, #3127, #3206, #3266 -central and south GBR (NEP): C. (C.) spp #234, #385, #1379, #1837, 69. Haliclona (Gellius, Reniera, Rhizonera), Chalinula and Cladocroce spp (Fig. 130) bioregional trends: Nearly exclusively tropical distribution, with highest diversity on the GBR and south east Queensland regions; north and south GBR regions not well differentiated, but north eastern and north/ northwestern faunas clearly differentiated in composition. Summary details: Haliclona (Gellius) (15 unnamed spp), H. (Reniera) (43 spp, 153 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 129. Callyspongia (Callyspongia) spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) here. Peaks in diversity occur in the northern GBR (NEB: 15 spp), central GBR to south east Queensland (NEP-CEB: 21 spp), Darwin region (western part of NP: 10 spp) and north west coast (NWP: 8 spp). Few species are distributed across more than one bioregion with the exception of H. (Reniera) rosea on the north coast to the central GBR region (NPNEP), H. (Reniera) spp #90, #607 on the north west and north coast (NWP-NP), and H. (Reniera) spp #1733, #2182 along the GBR. Northern and southern GBR bioregions poorly differentiated but fauna on east and north/ north west coast well differentiated in their species composition and species diversity. Other species are markers for particular bioregions: 3 named), H. (Rhizonera) (1 unnamed sp.), Chalinula (10 spp, 1 named) and Cladocroce (5 spp, 1 unnamed) are recorded in database records, with nearly exclusively tropical distributions. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented 154 -north GBR (NEB): H. (Reniera) spp #801, #2067, #2555 -south GBR and south east Queensland (NEP-CEB): H. (Reniera) sp. #753, #1292, #2466 -north coast (NP): H. (Reniera) sp. #95, H. (Gellius) sp. #195 -north west coast (NWP): H. (Reniera) Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 130. Chalinula, Cladocroce (squares), Haliclona (Gellius, Rhizoniera) (triangles), Haliclona (Reniera) (circles) (QM Biolink database) composition and species diversity. sp. #789, Chalinula confusa 70. Haliclona (Haliclona) spp (Fig. 131-132) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, highly diverse, often highly abundant in coral reef habitats; most diverse on the GBR (but without any significant differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions), and in the western part of NP; apart from a few widely distributed species north east and north west faunas are significantly different in terms of species S u m m a r y details: Haliclona (Haliclona) (105 spp, only 11 named) is highly diverse, widely distributed, predominant in (but not confined to) tropical coral reef habitats where they may be very abundant in local populations. Peaks of diversity are in the northern GBR (NEB: 26 spp), central and southern GBR (NEP: 24 spp), and north coast (primarily the western part of NP: 27 spp), with significantly fewer species in south east Queensland (CEB: 4 spp), central south east coast (CEP: 2 spp), and north west coast (NWP: 15 spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Northern and southern GBR bioregions are not significantly differentiated by either species composition or species diversity, with most species spanning the GBR. One species (H. (H.) cymaeformis, containing an obligatory 155 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 131. Haliclona (Haliclona) spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) lamellata, H. (H.) spp #164, #175, #697, #760 -south west coast (SWB): H. (H.) spp #735, #737, #750 Family Niphatidae Van Soest, 1980 71. Amphimedon, Hemigellius and Microxina spp (Fig. 133) algal symbiont) is widely distributed throughout the tropics and subtropics, extending from the southern GBR (NEP) to the south west coast (SWB). Several species (H. (H.) aculeate, H. (H.) spp #1205, #1381, #1515, #1954) are distributed throughout the GBR, and two (H. (H.) spp #36, #384) are found on the north west and north coasts (NWP-NP). Other species are generally restricted to one or few bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): H. (H.) nematifera, H. (H.) spp #65, #1581, #2685 -south GBR (NEP): H. (H.) spp #628, #1031, #1971, #2164, #2843 -south east Queensland (CEB): H. (H.) sp. #1892 -central south east coast (CEP): H. (H.) venustina, H. (H.) spp #3573, #3574 -Tasmania-Bass Strait (TasP-BassP): H. (H.) spp #858, #3286, #3669, #3671 -north coast (NP): H. (H.) amboinensis, H. (H.) turquoisia, H. (H.) pigmentifera, H. (H.) spp #47, #64, #144, #147, #238, #1311 -north west coast (NWP): H. (H.) 156 bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, not highly diverse but frequently abundant at some localities; distinctive north eastern, north western and south eastern faunas with little overlap in species composition; species diversity approximately similar on both sides of the continent; northern and southern GBR bioregions not differentiated. Summary details: Amphimedon (32 spp, 3 named), Hemigellius (2 unnamed spp) and Microxina (3 unnamed spp) are predominantly tropical in distribution, with distinctive east and west coast faunas, with few species spanning both sides of the continent (Amphimedon sp. #167 extends from the south west coast to the northern GBR, SWB-NEB). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity occur on the northern GBR (NEB: 9 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 8 spp), south east Queensland Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 132. Haliclona (Haliclona) spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) GBR regions not clearly differentiated. Other species are restricted to one or few bioregions: (CEB: 2 spp), north coast (NP: 7 spp), north west coast (NWP: 6 spp). There are several species widely distributed between adjacent bioregions, markers for these larger biomes: Amphimedon spp #365, #382 extending from the mid west coast to the north coast and constituting a north western fauna (CWP-NP); A. terpensis along the length of the GBR (NEP-NEB) – a north eastern fauna; Hemigellius sp. #513 along the south coast (GulfP-BassP), and Microxina sp. #884 in the south east corner (BassP-CEP). North and south -north GBR (NEB): Amphimedon sp. #2641, Microxina sp. #840 -south GBR (NEP): A. sulcata, Amphimedon sp. #3049 -south east Queensland (CEB): Amphimedon sp. #2776 -central south east coast (CEP): Amphimedon sp. #1399 -Tasmania and Bass Strait (TasP-BassP): Amphimedon spp #3440, #3558, #3664 -north coast (NP): A. paraviridis -northwest coast (NWP): Amphimedon sp. #1789 72. Cribrochalina and Gelliodes spp (Fig. 134) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, with highest diversity in the northern GBR and north west coast; on the east coast diversity decreases from north to south; eastern and western coastal faunas marginally differentiated based on species composition. 157 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 133. Amphimedon (circles, triangles), Hemigellius and Microxina spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) Summary details: Cribrochalina (40 spp, only 3 named) and Gelliodes (16 spp, 1 named) are predominantly tropical, with peaks of diversity on the northern GBR (NEB: 21 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 14 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 4 spp), north coast (NP: 9 spp), north west coast (12 spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Several species have broader tropical distributions (G. fibulatus), or predominantly north-northwest tropical (NWP-NP: C. olemda, Cribrochalina spp #560, #1293, Gelliodes sp. #337), south to north west coast (SWB-NWP: Gelliodes sp. #555), or along the entire GBR (CEB-NEB: Cribrochalina sp. #2178, Gelliodes spp #1215, #1383, #1621), whereas others are more useful markers for particular bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Cribrochalina spp #1303, #2563, Gelliodes spp 158 #1618, #2244 -south BR (NEP): Cribrochalina spp #1367, #2163 -south east Queensland (CEB): Cribrochalina sp. #2666, Gelliodes sp. #1177 -central south east coast (CEP): Cribrochalina sp. #1359 -Tasmania and Bass Strait (TasPBassP): Cribrochalina spp #1412, #3560, #3663, #3679, Gelliodes sp. #3441 -north coast (NP): Gelliodes sp. #777 -north west coast (NWP): Cribrochalina sp. #318, Gelliodes sp. #619 -south west coast (SWB): Cribrochalina sp. #742 73. Niphates spp (Figs 135-136) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, with west and east coast faunas distinctively different; GBR with overwhelmingly highest diversity, but no clear differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions; only one widely distributed tropical species spanning both east and west coast faunas, but several species within each of these faunas defining broader continental bioregions. Summary details: Niphates (95 spp, only 1 named so far), is highly diverse, with database records mainly Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 134. Cribrochalina (circles, squares), and Gelliodes spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) markers for the broad adjacent bioregions, spanning the length of either the west (SWBNP: Niphates spp #307, #320) or east coasts (CEB-NEB: Niphates spp #1122, #1943, #586, 1980). North and south GBR bioregions are not clearly differentiated by either their species diversity or species composition. from tropical bioregions, and peaks of diversity occurring on the GBR (northern GBR (NEB: 29 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 33 spp)), diminishing southwards (south east Queensland (CEB: 13 spp)) and westwards (NP: 6spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. West and east coast faunas are substantially differentiated by their respective species compositions and levels of species diversity, with only one species (Niphates sp. #321) found on both sides of the continent. Within each of these continental faunas, however, several species are -north GBR (NEB): Niphates spp #1821, #1569, #2023, #2391 -south GBR (NEP): Niphates spp #1234, #2857, #2678, #2687, #2697 -south east Queensland (CEB): Niphates sp. #2331, #2665, #3081 -central south east coast (CEP): Niphates sp. #3579 -Tasmania-Bass Strait (TasP, BassP): Niphates sp. #3665 -north west coast (NWP): Niphates sp. #321 -south west coast (SWB): Niphates sp. #723, #1689 159 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 135. Niphates spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) FIG. 136. Niphates spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) 160 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 137. Xestospongia spp (QM Biolink database) Suborder Petrosina BouryEsnault & Van Beveren, 1982 Family Petrosiidae Van Soest, 1980 74. Xestospongia spp (Fig. 137) bioregional trends: Nearly exclusively tropical distribution with peak in diversity on the northern GBR, diminishing southwards and westwards. Summary details: Xestospongia (30 spp, only 2 named), is represented in collections by mainly widely distributed tropical species, with peaks on diversity seen in the northern GBR (NEB: 11 spp), diminishing southwards (southern GBR (NEP: 7 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 4 spp)) and westwards (north coast (NP: 5 spp), and north west coast (NWP: 3 spp)). Species are predominant in the interreef region and at the base of coral reefs, including the GBR. One species (X. testudinaria) occurs throughout the tropical Indo-west Pacific, sometimes with high population abundance at the small (local site) scale, and three other species (X. bergquistia (east coast), Xestospongia spp #158, #565 (north and north west coasts)) occur widely and sometimes in geographical sympatry with X. testudinaria. A few rare species can define particular bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Xestospongia spp #1726, #2387, #3179, #3198, #3257, #3808 -south GBR (NEP): Xestospongia spp #2133, #2853, #2937 75. Acanthostrongylophora, Neopetrosia and Petrosia (Strongylophora) spp (Fig. 138) bioregional trends: Exclusively tropical; most common on GBR but without differentiation of northern and southern GBR bioregions; poor bioregional markers. Summary details: Acanthostrongylophora (2 spp, 1 named), Neopetrosia (3 named spp) and Petrosia (Strongylophora) (9 spp, 2 named) are exclusively tropical, not diverse, and only two (cryptic) sibling species (N. exigua, N. pacifica – considered by some to be synonymous) common in tropical Australasia (from 161 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 138. Athostrongylophora (triangles), Neopetrosia (circles) and Petrosia (Strongylophora) spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) NWP-NEP). The GBR has six species, without any substantial differentiation between northern and southern bioregions. Neopetrosia is found exclusively associated with coral reefs, whereas Acanthostrongylophora and Petrosia (Strongylophora) are found in other habitats as well (e.g. soft benthos). No species appear to be useful markers for any bioregion. 76. Petrosia (Petrosia) spp (Fig. 139) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical, coral reef species; peaks in the GBR and NP but little overlap between north GBR, south GBR and NP species composition. Summary details: Petrosia (Petrosia) (56 spp, 7 named) are highly diverse but rarely abundant in any of the surveyed localities, predominantly tropical in distribution, and predominantly associated with coral reef habits. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Peaks in diversity occur in the Darwin region (NP: 8 spp), northern GBR (NEB: 15 spp) and southern GBR 162 (NEP: 10 spp), with little overlap in species distribution between these three localities. A few species occur in both western and eastern continental faunas (P. (P.) nigricans, P. crassa) and two (Petrosia (Petrosia) sp. #113, #1021) occur across the tropical belt (NWP-NEB). Several species also occur in northern and southern bioregions of the GBR (CEB-NEB: Petrosia (Petrosia) spp #1976, #2197), with species composition differentiating both regions, but by-and-large most species are restricted to one or few adjacent bioregions: -north GBR (NEB): Petrosia (Petrosia) sp. #3804 -south GBR (NEP): Petrosia (Petrosia) spp #1601, #3073, #3468 -north coast (NP): Petrosia (Petrosia) spp #134, #312, #357 -north west coast (NWP): Petrosia (Petrosia) spp #136, #692 Family Phloeodictyidae Carter, 1882 77. Aka, Calyx and Pachypellina spp (Fig. 140) bioregional trends: Nearly exclusively tropical distributions; equal diversity on eastern and western coasts; north and south GBR differentiated. Summary details: Aka (26 spp, Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 139. Petrosia (Petrosia) spp (QM Biolink database) Aka spp #331, #332), and one throughout the GBR (NEB-NEP: Aka sp. #1373), with several other species restricted to single bioregions. Northern and southern bioregions on the GBR are differentiated in terms of species composition. -north GBR (NEB): Aka spp #1636,1736, 1738 -south GBR (NEP): Aka sp. #2169 -north west coast (NWP): Pachypellina sp. #566 2 named), Calyx (1 unnamed sp.) and Pachypellina (14 unnamed spp) are represented in collections by predominantly tropical species with diversity approximately similar on both sides of the continent: northern GBR (NEB: 7 spp), southern GBR (NEP: 6 spp), Darwin region (western part of NP: 8 spp) and north west coast (NWP: 10 spp). Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Many species are bioeroding, boring into coralline substrates or embedded in soft sediments. Several species are distributed on both east and west coasts (NWP-NEP: Aka mucosa, 78. Oceanapia spp (Fig. 141) bioregional trends: Ubiquitous in many marine habitats, highly diverse and frequently abundant in some; highest diversity in the soft sediments of NP and NWP, with lower diversity in the GBR; species composition clearly differentiates eastern and western NP faunas, and those in the GBR and NWP bioregions; north and south GBR bioregions not clearly delineated; east and west coast faunas clearly differentiated with only a few widely distributed species spanning both coasts. Summary details: Oceanapia (73 163 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 140. Aka (circles), Calyx (squares) and Pachypellina spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) spp, 9 named) are ubiquitous in nearly all habitats, ranging from bioeroding and burrowing into soft sediments to free-living on hard and soft substrata. Species database records are predominantly tropical although it is likely that further sampling of temperate habitats will uncover a similar high diversity. Species with only single records are not differentiated on maps presented here. Several species are widely distributed across east and west coasts (SWB-CEP: O. ramsayi, Oceanapia sp. #135), several are restricted to either western and north coasts (SWB-NP: O. toxophila, Oceanapia spp #94, #96; NWP-NP: O. macrotoxa, Oceanapia sp. #303) or to north east coasts (NEP-NEB: O. renieroides, Oceanapia sp. #1220). Species are particularly diverse and frequently also abundant in the soft 164 benthos of the Gulf of Carpentaria (eastern part of NP), the North West Shelf (NWP) and the inter-reef region of the GBR (NEB-NEP). The highest diversity occurs in the Darwin region (western NP: 18 spp) and Gulf of Carpentaria (eastern NP: 18 spp), with about half the species different between each of these zones, and with other peaks in diversity on the north west coast (NWP: 16 spp), northern GBR (8 spp), southern GBR (13 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 6 spp) and south west coast (SWB: 8 spp). The northern and southern bioregions of the GBR are not well differentiated in terms of species diversity or species composition, but they differ significantly from more southern (CEB) and western (NP) faunas. -north GBR (NEB): O. sagittaria, Oceanapia sp. #3100 -south GBR (NEP): Oceanapia spp #1384, #1868, #2835, #2940 -central south east coast (CEP): Oceanapia sp. #1353 -Gulf of Carpentaria (eastern NP): Oceanapia spp #669, #1312, #1313, #1321, #2401 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 141. Oceanapia spp (QM Biolink database) Order Dictyoceratida Minchin, 1900 Family Dysideidae Gray, 1867 79. Citronia, Lamellodysidea, Pleraplysilla and Euryspongia (Fig. 142) bioregional trends: Three genera predominantly tropical, with some species characteristic of the southern GBR (NEP, CEB), and one widespread species associated with coral reef habitats. -Darwin region (western NP): O. amboinensis, Oceanapia spp #192, #1291 -north west coast (NWP): Oceanapia sp. #563 -south west coast (SWB): O. abrolhensis, Oceanapia sp. #1692 Summary details: Citronia (3 named species), Lamellodysidea (6 species, 2 currently named), Euryspongia and Pleraplysilla (11 species, 3 currently named) were recorded, having a predominantly shallow water (<20m) north east tropical distribution. The former two genera are associated with coral reef faunas, one of which (L. herbacea) has an extensive Indo-west Pacific distribution. Similarly, Euryspongia is predominantly tropical, north east coast, with two species characteristic of the southern GBR (NEP, CEB – E. deliculata, Euryspongia sp. # 2896). By comparision, the two species 165 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 142. Citronia (circles), Lamellodysidea (triangles), Pleraplysilla and Euryspongia spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) of Pleraplysilla temperate. are predominantly 80. Dysidea spp (Fig. 143-144) bioregional trends: Probably a high proportion of species phototrophic. Few species with wide geographical distributions largely correspond to coral reef localities. Highest diversity in the southern and central GBR. Several species restricted to and indicative of particular tropical and temperate bioregions, and Dysidea species composition corroborates north – south split in GBR faunas. Summary details: Dysidea is a highly diverse genus distributed predominantly (but not exclusively) in tropical shallow waters (<30m depth), and often also highly prevalent in population size, especially in coral reef habitats. Many species are host to a diversity of cyanobacterial symbionts and consequently many species may be at least partially phototrophic (hence their predominance in shallow, clear waters). Of 67 species recorded here 166 only 12 can be presently assigned to a known taxon. Several species are widely distributed t h r o u g h o u t tropical Australia, associated with the distribution of coral reefs themselves (D. cf. avara, D. cf. pallescens, D. arenaria, Dysidea sp. #16). Highest diversity (27 species) occurs in the southern and central GBR (CEB, NEP) – only species with more than one record are differentiated on maps. Other species appear to be more useful markers for particular bioregions: northern and central GBR (NEB, NEP) - D. lizardensis [a species name currently in manuscript], Dysidea spp #1214, #1547; far northern GBR (NEB) – D. fragilis, Dysidea spp #2266, #2920; central GBR (NEP) – Dysidea sp. #1848; southern GBR (CEB) – Dysidea spp #2389, #2905; eastern Gulf of Carpentaria (NP) – Dysidea sp. # 2389; central west coast (CWP, NWP) - D. dakini; south eastern coast (GulfPWBassB) – Dysidea sp. #507. Aside from the four widely distributed species noted above species appear to be largely restricted to single bioregions. Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 143. Dysidea spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) Family Irciniidae Gray, 1867 81. Ircinia spp (Figs 145-147) bioregional trends: Collections contain predominantly tropical Ircinia species records, but this undoubtedly FIG. 144. Dysidea spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) 167 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 145. Ircinia spp – part 1 (QM Biolink database) represents a bias of the ‘active’ sponge collection agencies. Few widely distributed species, but many species corroborate particular bioregions, with relatively few species shared between major bioregions. Data corroborate splits between: north and south GBR; GBR and NP faunas (although occasional incursions of GBR fauna into the eastern Gulf of Carpentaria); NP FIG. 146. Ircinia spp – part 2 (QM Biolink database) 168 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 147. Ircinia spp – part 3 (QM Biolink database) of particular bioregions, with some bioregions repeatedly corroborated by many taxa: and western coastal provinces; poorly resolved corroboration between NWP and south western provinces. Summary details: Ircinia is highly diverse and often also numerically prevalent throughout regional Australian sponge faunas, with species living in clear (coral reef) to very muddy and turbid waters. 76 morphospecies are recorded here, although species determination is very difficult for some taxa and some of these may be morphological variants of other taxa. Of these only eight species can be presently assigned to a known taxon. Few species appear to have widespread Australian distributions (e.g. Ircinia sp. #1), or throughout tropical Australia (CEB to NWP - Ircinia spp #1255), although it is likely that these consist of several cryptic sibling species hiding amongst a morphospecies. More frequently, however, there are many groups of species characteristic -entire GBR (NEB to CEB) Ircinia spp #1244, #1944 -far north GBR (NEB) – Ircinia spp #1550, #2710, #3173, #3810 -central and southern GBR (CEB, NEP)– Ircinia wistarii, Ircinia cf. ramosa, Ircinia spp #1242, #1380, #1876, #1523, #1534, #2683, #3077, #3079 -central south east coast (CEP) Ircinia spp #1909, #2769 -entire north coast (NP to NWP) Ircinia spp #1228, #2716, #1254 -Gulf of Carpentaria to Darwin (NP) - Ircinia spp #1294, #1256, #2707, #2400, #3790 -Bass Strait (BassP) - Ircinia spp #3434 -central southern coast (GulfP) - Ircinia spp #527 -central western coast (NWP) - Ircinia spp #394 82. Psammocinia, Collospongia and Sarcotragus spp (Figs 148-149) bioregional trends: Greater number of temperate species, but trends similar to Ircinia, with species distributions corroborating particular bioregions: split between northern and southern GBR; GBR and NP; GBR and CEP; distinct BassP and TasP faunas. Summary details: Fourty two species of Psammocinia and five species of Collospongia and Sarcotragus are 169 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 148. Psammocinia (circles, triangles), Collospongia (squares), Sarcotragus spp (squares) – part 1 (QM Biolink database) recorded, with only five species currently named. Only one species (Psammocinia sp. #487) with a wide temperate and tropical distribution, although this might concern more than one cryptic sibling species hiding within a morphotype. Several species indicative of major bioregional distributions, nearly mirroring the closely related genus Ircinia. Taxa differentiate: -entire GBR (NEB to CEB) – Psammocinia spp #1191, #1867 -far north GBR (NEB) – FIG. 149. Psammocinia (circles, triangles) – part 2 (QM Biolink database) 170 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 150. Coscinoderma (circles), Leiosella (triangles) and Rhopaloeides spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) Psammocinia auris, Psammocinia spp #1727, #2385, #3103 -central and southern GBR (CEB, NEP) – Psammocinia spp #1181, #1191, #1407, #3422, #2772 -central south east coast (CEP) – Psammocinia spp #1339, #1459, #1472, #1874, #1912 -Gulf of Carpentaria to Darwin (NP) – Psammocinia spp #3788, #3789 -Bass Strait (BassP-TasP) – Psammocinia spp #3603, #3646, #3430, #3648, #3537 -central southern coast (GulfP) – Psammocinia rugosa -central western coast (NWP) – Psammocinia spp #305, #1791 Family Spongiidae Gray, 1867 83. Coscinoderma, Leiosella and Rhopaloeides spp (Fig. 150) bioregional trends: Several species characteristic of GBR provinces. Summary details: Coscinoderma (9 species, 2 named), Leiosella (7 species, 3 named) and Rhopaloeides (2 species, one named) have relatively low species diversity compared to most other genera of Spongiidae, but some species are dominant components of tropical benthic regional faunas. C. mathewsi and R. odorabile are characteristic of northern, central and southern GBR coral reef habitats (and elsewhere in the tropical western Pacific), with records of the latter outside this region probably representing morphologically similar (cryptic sibling) species distributions. C. pesleonis is found in temperate waters from eastern SEB to western CWB. 84. Hippospongia and Hyattella spp (Fig. 151) bioregional trends: Several species are markers for boundaries of tropical Australia, north and north west coast (versus northeast coast), entire GBR, and far north and central and southern GBR bioregions. Summary details: Hippospongia (14 species, 4 named) and Hyattella (10 species, 2 named) are dominant components of the soft bottom marine benthos in some tropical bioregions, with species exhibiting widespread tropical distributions (Hy. Intestinalis from the mid east CEB to mid west CWP bioregions), or with more restricted distributions: north and northwest coast (Hy. clathrata – NP to NWP), 171 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 151. Hippospongia (circles) and Hyattella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) tropics but are widespread (e.g. Spongia spp #1983), but several can define particular bioregions: widespread GBR (Hi. elastica – from CEB to NEB), central and southern GBR (Hy. spp #2763, #1366 - CEB, NEP), or far north GBR (Hi. aphroditella, Hi. sp. #2240 - NEB). Differentiation of northern and southern GBR regions corroborated by these taxa. 85. Spongia spp (Fig. 152) bioregional trends: Distinct tropical and temperate faunas with virtually no overlap. Some bioregions clearly marked by species, including differentiation of GBR into northern and southern regions, splits between GBR and NP, and GBR and south eastern coast. Summary details: Spongia (52 species, only 3 named with confidence) is highly diverse in both tropical and temperate faunas. Few species have apparent widespread tropical and temperate distributions (e.g. S. hispida), a couple occur only in the 172 -northern to southern GBR (NEB to CEB): Spongia sp #1990 -northern GBR (NEB): Spongia spp #1812, #3193, #3278 -central GBR (NEP): Spongia sp. #1364 -southern GBR – southeast Qld (CEB): Spongia spp #1815, 2360 -central east coast (CEP): Spongia spp #1908, 2831 -southeast Australia (BassP, WBassB, GulfP): Spongia spp #869, 542 -Tasmania and Bass Strait (TasP, BassP): Spongia spp #3433, 3535, 3428 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): Spongia spp #3095, 3096 -southwest coast (SWB): Spongia pyriforme Family Thorectidae Bergquist, 1978 86. Aplysinopsis, Cacospongia, Candidaspongia and Narrabeena spp (Fig. 153) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical distributions, with some species supporting north-south bioregionalisation of the GBR, and the GulfP region. Summary details: Aplysinopsis (11 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 152. Spongia spp (QM Biolink database) -northern GBR (NEB): Aplysinopsis spp #477, #3191, Cacospongia sp. #3183 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB): Narrabeena lamellate, Aplysinopsis sp. #1388, Cacospongia sp. #1120 -southern Gulf (GulfP): Aplysinopsis spP #477, #538 87. Carteriospongia and Phyllospongia spp (Fig. 154) species, 3 named), Cacospongia (6 species, 1 named), Candidaspongia and Narrabeena (each with a single named species) are predominantly tropical but with varying distributions. Candidaspongia flabellata is widely distributed throughout the GBR but not yet recorded outside this region, nor has it yet been recorded from the very far northern GBR. Aplysinopsis elegans appears to occur in both temperate and tropical faunas, although not very commonly; A. cf. reticulata and Aplysinopsis sp. #330 are restricted to the northwest coasts (NWB-NWP), and several species’ distributions support the north-south GBR bioregional split, and a temperate bioregion: bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical coral reef dwelling species, with similar distributions to the reefs themselves, but a few species restricted to smaller bioregions. Summary details: Carteriospongia (5 species, 3 named) and Phyllospongia (8 species, 4 named) demonstrate clear bioregional trends, with several species strongly correlated to the presence/ absence of coral reefs (P. foliascens, P. papyracea, C. flabellifera) and hence mimicking those distributions, one on soft and non-coralline substrata (P. lamellosa) and others more restricted to particular bioregions: -northwest (NWB-NWP): Carteriospongia sp. #379, P. mantelli -northeast GBR (NEB): Phyllospongia sp. #3202 -southeast GBR (NEP): Phyllospongia 173 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 153. Aplysinopsis (squares), Cacospongia (triangles), Candidaspongia (circles) and Narrabeena spp (circles) (QM Biolink database) sp. #2805 Split between northern and southern GBR is not well supported by these taxa. 88. Dactylospongia and Fascaplysinopsis spp (Fig. 155) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical coral reef associated species, with highest diversity by far in the FIG. 154. Carteriospongia (circles) and Phyllospongia spp (triangles and squares) (QM Biolink database) 174 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 155. Dactylospongia (circles) and Fascaplysinopsis spp (triangles and squares) (QM Biolink database) Fascaplyinopsis sp. #2170 -northern GBR (NEB): Dactylospongia spp #2994, #3244, Fascaplyinopsis spp #1538, #2314 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB): Dactylospongia spp #2171, #3050, Fascaplyinopsis spp #1549, 1824, 1842, 3055 -northwest coast (NWBNWP): Dactylospongia sp. #356, Fascaplyinopsis spp #1777, #1798 -central east coast (CEP): Dactylospongia spp #1349, #1357, Fascaplyinopsis sp #1354 GBR provinces; species distributions support differentiation of northern and southern GBR faunas, distinct from northwest and southeast species compositions. Summary details: Records of Dactylospongia (15 species, only 1 named so far) and Fascaplyinopsis (25 species, only 1 named) are predominantly tropical, with highest diversity on the GBR (24 species), and with some (e.g. D. elegans, F. reticulata) characteristic of coral reef habitats throughout the Indo-west Pacific. Several species support the notion of a north-south split of the GBR fauna and a number of species support few other tropical/ subtropical bioregions: 89. Fasciospongia and Hyrtios spp (Fig. 156) bioregional trends: Tropical and temperate species, highest diversity on GBR, north-south GBR split supported, few other species useful as bioregional indicators. Summary details: Fasciospongia (14 species, 4 named so far) and Hyrtios (18 species, 3 named) are equally diverse in tropical and temperate bioregions. One species (Fasciospongia sp. #290) occurs widely throughout Australia whereas most others are more indicative of particular bioregions. Highest diversity occurs on the GBR (17 species). A few species support distinct northern-southern GBR faunas: -entire GBR (NEB – CEB): D. elegans, 175 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 156. Fasciospongia (squares) and Hyrtios spp (triangles, circles) (QM Biolink database) GBR and southern and western species. -widespread GBR and elsewhere in the tropical Indo-west Paciic (NEBCEB): H. erecta, H. reticulata -northern GBR (NEB): Hyrtios spp #2560, #2864, #3271 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB): Fasciospongia sp. #2543, Hyrtios spp #2693, #2799, #2887 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): Fasciospongia sp. #1318, #n.sp. -northwest coast (NWP): F. pulcherrima, Fasciospongia sp. #49 -central east coast (CEP): F. australis, Fasciospongia sp. #1476 90. Luffariella, Fenestraspongia, Lendenfeldia, Petrosiaspongia and Scalarispongia spp (Fig. 157) bioregional trends: Temperate and tropical species, one widely distributed coral reef inter-reef species on whole GBR to NP regions, remainder not abundant but supporting north-south split on GBR, and differences from 176 Summary details: Luffariella (20 species, 3 named), Fenestraspongia (2 species, 1 named), Lendenfeldia (2 species, both named), Petrosiaspongia (3 species, 1 named) and Scalarispongia (2 unnamed species) comprise distinct tropical and temperate faunas, with a small number of species indicating some bioregional patterns, but species are not abundant. The exception is Lendenfeldia plicata which is common throughout the GBR extending to the Darwin region (CEBNP), mainly associated with soft and silty bottoms in the inter-reef region. Other bioregional faunas indicated are: -northern GBR (NEB): Luffariella spp #2302, #3187, Fenestraspongia sp. #3275 -southern GBR (NEP-CEB): Luffariella spp #2495, 3057, Scalarispongia sp. #3591 -Gulf of Carpentaria (NP): Luffariella sp. #1975, #3107 -central east coast (CEP): Luffariella sp. #1917 -north west coast (NWP-NWB): Luffariella sp. #380 -south east coast (TasP – Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 157. Luffariella (circles), Fenestraspongia, Lendenfeldia, Petrosiaspongia and Scalarispongia spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) bioregions: GulfP): F. intertexta -south west coast (SWB): Lendenfeldia areniibrosa 91. Thorecta, Smenospongia and Strepsichordaia spp (Fig. 158) bioregional trends: Both temperate and tropical species, not abundant or diverse apart from one widespread GBR species of Strepsichordaia, and Thorecta most diverse in temperate waters; several groups of species characterize north and south GBR, central east coast, northwest coast and Tasmanian bioregions. Summary details: Thorecta (24 species, 4 named), Smenospongia (1 species unnamed) and Strepsichordaia (3 species, 2 named) are neither diverse nor abundant apart from the coral reef associated species Strepsichordaia lendenfeldi which is found along the length of the GBR (NEB-CEB). Highest diversity is in Bass Strait and Tasmanian bioregions (9 species). Several groups of species characterize other tropical -northern GBR (NEB): Thorecta spp #3815, #3232, #3208 -southern GBR (NEPCEB): T. vasiformis, Thorecta sp. #3494 -north west coast (NWBNWP): Thorecta spp #11, #38, #44, #146 -central east coast (CEP): T. freija, Thorecta sp. #1356 -Bass Strait (SEB-BassP): St. calciformis -Tasmania (TasP): T. cribrocusta, Thorecta sp. #3539 92. Thorectandra, Taonura and Thorectoxia spp (Fig. 159) bioregional trends: Temperate and tropical groups, characteristic for NPCWP, TasP-GABB and GulfP. Summary details: Thorectandra (17 species, 4 named), Taonura (6 species, 3 named), Thorectoxia (1 unnamed species), with one widely distributed temperate species (Thorectandra choanoides), and two peaks of diversity in tropical (6 spp) and temperate regions (9 spp): -northwest and west coasts (NPCWP): T. excavatus -southeast coastal (Tasp - GABB): T. corticatus, Thorectandra sp. #491, Taonura labelliformis -southern Gulf (GulfP): Taonura colus, T. marginalis, Tanonu sp.#530, 177 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 158. Thorecta (circles), Smenospongia (square), and Strepsichordaia spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) Order Dendroceratida Minchin, 1900 Family Darwinellidae Merejkowsky, 1879 93. Aplysilla spp (Fig. 160) bioregional trends: Aplysilla species show useful bioregional trends, indicative of eastern Australian, southeastern Australian, and split FIG. 159. Thorectandra (circles), Taonura (triangles) and Thorectoxia spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) 178 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 160. Aplysilla spp (QM Biolink dartabase) between northern and southern GBR faunal distributions. Summary details: Nine species are recorded with only two presently assigned to a known taxon. Highest species diversity is on the GBR, with three species in the northern sector (NEB) and four in the south (NEP – CEB) with only one species common to both regions (viz. the widely distributed Aplysilla sulfurea). Species show distinct bioregionalisation: widely distributed eastern Australia (A. sulfurea – GulfP to NP), less widely distributed FIG. 161. Chelonaplysilla (circles) and Darwinella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) 179 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 162. Dendrilla spp (QM Biolink database) bioregional trends: One species characteristic for NWP region. on southeast coast (A. rosea – GulfP to CEB), and more restricted distributions to southern GBR (Aplysilla sp. #1999 – CEB), and northern coast and Sahul Shelf regions (Aplysilla sp. #688 – NP to NWB). 94. Chelonaplysilla and Darwinella spp (Fig. 161) bioregional trends: Southern GBR differentiated from other tropical regions; two species widely distributed eastern coast. Summary details: Seven species of Chelonaplysilla and five species of Darwinella are recorded, with six currently assigned to a known taxon. The highest diversity occurs in the southern sector of the GBR – Coral Sea (nine species – NEP - CEB). All species except (Chelonaplysilla sp1 Norfanz) occur in shallow waters (up to 50m depth). Two species (C. violacea, D. gardineri) are widespread throughout eastern Australia, the former extending into the western Pacific. 95. Dendrilla spp (Fig. 162) 180 Summary details: Ten species recorded with only two currently assigned to a known taxon. Highest diversity in the southern GBR sector (NEP). One species widely distributed (D. rosea), possibly circum-Australian; one species (Dendrilla sp. #159) characteristic of northwest coast (NWP). Family Dictyodendrillidae Bergquist, 1980 96. Acanthodendrilla spp (Fig. 163) bioregional trends: Species composition delineates tropical from temperate east coast faunas. Summary details: Twelve species, only one of which can be presently assigned to a known taxon. All species occur in shallow waters (<40m depth), with highest diversity in the southern GBR (NEP, CEB), and distinctly different species composition between tropical east coast (8 species – CEB to NEB)) and cool temperate east coast faunas (3 species - TasP). 97. Dictyodendrilla spp (Fig. 164) bioregional trends: One widespread tropical species; two sets of species groups clearly differentiating northern Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 163. Acanthodendrilla spp (QM Biolink database) and southern GBR regions. Summary details: Sixteen species, only two of which are currently assigned to a known taxon. Only one species (Dictyodendrilla sp. #362) widely distributed across northern Australia (NEB to NWP), three informative for meso-regional distributions (Dictyodendrilla sp. #648 at NEB, Dictyodendrilla spp. #2172, #2989 at CEB), with the remainder rare and known so far from only one or few records. Northern GBR (6 species – NEB) and southern GBR faunas (5 FIG. 164. Dictyodendrilla spp (QM Biolink database) 181 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 165. Ianthella (circles) and Anomoianthella spp (triangles) (QM Biolink database) species – CEB, NEP) with different species assemblages with no species in common Order Verongida Bergquist, 1978 Family Ianthellidae Hyatt, 1875 98. Ianthella and Anomoianthella spp (Fig. 165) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical with 3 species spanning the tropical belt; highest diversity on the GBR; north and south GBR and east and west coast faunas not differentiated. Summary details: Ianthella (14 morphospecies spp, 5 named) and Anomoianthella (4 spp, 2 named) are not diverse but highly abundant in many habitats, particularly at the base of coral reefs and in the inter-reef region and soft benthos. The fauna is dominated by three species, all showing wide tropical distributions: I. basta and I. flabelliformis (north west coast to south east Queensland: NWP-CEB), and I. quadrangulata (western part of the north coast and Sahul Shelf to the 182 Sydney region: NP–CEP). The highest diversity is on the southern GBR (NEP: 9 spp), north GBR (NEB: 8 spp) and Darwin region (western part of NP: 6 spp). Northern and southern GBR regions and east coast and west coast faunas are not clearly differentiated by this group. Anomoianthella popeae is a western and north west coast species (NWPNP). Family Aplysinellidae Bergquist, 1980 99. Aplysinella, Porphyria, Psammaplysilla and Suberea spp (Fig. 166) bioregional trends: Peak in diversity in the south GBR and south east Queensland regions, with distinct differences between east and west coast faunas changing at Cape York. Summary details: Aplysinella (8 spp, 1 named), Porphyria (1 named sp.), Psammaplysilla (1 named sp.) and Suberea (7 spp, 2 named) are not diverse but one species (Aplysinella rhax) can be abundant in coral reef habitats. The southern GBR (NEP) and south east Queensland regions (CEB) have the highest diversity of species (8 spp). There are distinct differences between east coast and west coast Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 166. Aplysinella (circles), Porphyria, Psammaplysilla (triangles) and Suberea spp (squares) (QM Biolink database) species, the latter with Aplysinella sp. #143 predominant, with species turnover at the eastern part of NP boundary. Family Pseudoceratinidae Carter, 1885 100. Pseudoceratina spp (Fig. 167) bioregional trends: Predominantly tropical Pacific group, with highest diversity in the GBR; north and south GBR bioregions differentiated; distinctinctive east and west coast faunas with species turnover at Cape York (eastern NP). Summary details: Pseudoceratina (36 spp, 4 named) has database records containing extensive tropical and fewer temperate species’ distributions, with one widespread western species indicated (Pseudoceratina sp. #190), extending from the south west coast to the north coast (SWB-NP), one northern and north eastern species (Pseudoceratina sp. #364) extending from the Sahul Shelf (NWB) to south east Queensland (CEB), and and two predominantly southern species (P. durissima, P. clavata) that extend into the GBR province. Other species appear to be restricted to one or few adjacent bioregions. Highest species diversity occurs in the southern GBR (NEP: 15 spp), northern GBR (NEB: 14 spp), south east Queensland (CEB: 10 spp) and the north coast (NP: 7 spp). Northern GBR bioregion and south GBR – south east Queensland bioregions differentiated in terms of species composition, and a major species turnover at Cape York (NP) differentiating eastern and western faunas. -north GBR (NEB): Pseudoceratina spp #1773, #2915, #3176 -south GBR and south east Queensland (NEP-CEB): P. purpurea, Pseudoceratina sp. #1973, #2462, #3502 -central south east coast (CEP): Pseudoceratina sp. #1478 -Tasmania-Bass Strait (TasP-BassP): Pseudoceratina spp #3640, #3641 -southern Gulf (GulfP): Pseudoceratina sp. #472 -north coast (NP): Pseudoceratina spp #145, #2399, #2432 Family Aplysinidae Carter, 1875 101. Aplysina spp (Fig. 168) bioregional trends: One circumAustralian species with remainder 183 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 167. Pseudoceratina spp (QM Biolink database) restricted to single bioregions; NP region with highest diversity. Summary details: Aplysina (12 spp, 3 named) is not diverse but contains one highly abundant and widely distributed ‘morphospecies’ (A. ianthelliformis) found throughout Australian coastal waters. The Darwin region (western part of NP) contains the highest diversity (6 spp). Several species are markers Fig. 168. Aplysina spp (QM Biolink database) 184 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 169. Pericharax species, with enlargements of east and west coast species distributions (QM Biolink database) for particular bioregions: -south GBR- south east Queensland (NEP-CEB): Aplysina sp. #1247 -Tasmania-Bass Strait (TasPBassP): A. lendenfeldi, Aplysina sp. #3636 -north coast (NP): Aplysina sp. #40, #87, #125, #223 -south west coast (SWB): A. pedunculata Class Calcarea Bowerbank, 1864 Order Clathrinida Hartman, 1958 Family Leucettidae de Laubenfels, 1936 102. Pericharax spp (Fig. 169) bioregional trends: Highest diversity in the Great Barrier Reef region (CEB to NEB). Two species delineate eastern - northeastern zones (NEB to CEP) from northern - western zones (NP to SWB). Species turnover is dramatic south of the Tweed River (CEB) and west of Torres Strait (NP). 185 QM Technical Reports | 002 FIG. 170. Leucetta species (QM Biolink database) southern region). There is a fundamental east-west differentiation at Torres Strait (NEB-NP), delineated primarily by the predominant distributions of two widespread tropical taxa (Pericharax heterorhaphis and Pericharax sp. #58). To date no species have yet been discovered within the Gulf of Carpentaria. Summary details: Fourteen species of Pericharax occur in tropical and warm temperate Australian waters, only one of which can be currently assigned to a named taxon with any certainty. The greatest species diversity (ten species) occurs in the Great Barrier Reef provinces (NEB, NEP & CEB), predominantly associated with coral substratum. Nine species occur in the northern zone (NEB) and six in the southern zone (NEP & CEB), with five species common to both zones. Two of these species are shared with New Caledonia. There is one species distributed widely along the length of the east Australian coast (Pericharax sp. #1187), extending from TasP to NEB. There is a marked species turnover (biotone) at the southern end of the CEB, with only two species occurring south of the Tweed River region (one unique to the 186 On the north and west coasts of Australia only four species occur, two of which concern the widely distributed tropical Pericharax species. 103. Leucetta spp (Fig. 170) bioregional trends: Only recorded so far from the GBR region (NEB to CEB). Species diversity and composition differentiate northern and southern faunas, corresponding to genetic data. Summary details: Ten species of Leucetta were recorded for tropical Australian waters, several of which have been recently described, and all of which occur in the Great Barrier Reef and Coral Sea provinces. One species (L. chagosensis) is widely distributed throughout the GBR and the Indo-west Pacific in general, although there is empirical evidence to show that there are two distinct ‘haplotypes’ within the GBR and Coral Sea populations (Woerheide et al. 2001). The far northern region of Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia FIG. 171. Levinella (circles) and Sycon (triangles) spp (QM Biolink database) Summary details: Two other calcarean species are common in both the northern and southern-central the GBR (NEB) has six species, the southern regions have eight species (NEP & CEB), with two species unique to each of these northern and southern regions, and none so far recorded south of the Tweed River or west of the Torres Straits. GBR region associated with coralline Family Levinellidae Borojevic & Boury-Esnault, 1986 & and occur elsewhere in the Coral Sea Order Leucosolenida Hartman, 1958 Family Sycettidae Dendy, 1892 104. Levinella (Levinellidae) and Sycon spp (Sycettidae) (Fig. 171) bioregional trends: Species presence/absence is indicative of coral reefs, but no differentiation of northern or southern reef provinces. substrate, extending from NEB to CEB. Neither have yet been collected extensively, but probably have geographically sympatric distributions and Pacific Island regions. Both species are indicative of coral substrate. The record of Sycon cf. gelatinosum from the Sydney region likely concerns a non-conspecific morphologically similar (sister) species. 187 QM Technical Reports | 002 APPENDIX 7. Modeled CAAB distributions and ‘mudmaps’ of surrogate species used for GIS and numerical analysis. Refer to Appendix 1 for list of taxonomic names that refer to each of these CAAB modelled distributions (ordered by species number). CAAB distributions: surrogate species e:\Biolink\NOO report\NOO report final figures\CAAB figures sp0002caab2.gif sp0003caab2.gif sp0004caab2.gif sp0005caab.gif sp0006caab.gif sp0007caab.gif sp0008caab2.gif sp0009caab.gif sp0012caab2.gif sp0013caab.gif sp0022caab.gif sp0023caab.gif [1] 188 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0024caab.gif sp0025caab.gif sp0026caab.gif sp0028caab2.gif sp0029caab.gif sp0030caab2.gif sp0031caab.gif sp0034caab.gif sp0035caab.gif sp0039caab2.gif sp0051caab.gif sp0053caab2.gif sp0054caab.gif sp0063caab2.gif sp0078caab.gif [2] 189 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0093caab.gif sp0097caab2.gif sp0104caab2.gif sp0107caab.gif sp0120caab.gif sp0121caab.gif sp0122caab2.gif sp0129caab.gif sp0130caab.gif sp0131caab.gif sp0133caab.gif sp0135caab.gif sp0150caab.gif sp0152caab.gif sp0153caab.gif [3] 190 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0154caab2.gif sp0156caab.gif sp0172caab.gif sp0190caab2.gif sp0196caab2.gif sp0203caab2.gif sp0208caab.gif sp0210caab.gif sp0213caab.gif sp0216caab2.gif sp0217caab.gif sp0218caab.gif sp0221caab.gif sp0229caab2.gif sp0230caab.gif [4] 191 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0243caab.gif sp0244caab.gif sp0252caab2.gif sp0254caab.gif sp0259caab.gif sp0262caab.gif sp0264caab2.gif sp0265caab.gif sp0267caab.gif sp0268caab.gif sp0269caab2.gif sp0271caab2.gif sp0272caab.gif sp0274caab2.gif sp0275caab.gif [5] 192 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0285caab.gif sp0287caab.gif sp0288caab.gif sp0289caab2.gif sp0292caab.gif sp0293caab2.gif sp0298caab.gif sp0300caab.gif sp0304caab2.gif sp0307caab2.gif sp0311caab2.gif sp0313caab.gif sp0326caab.gif sp0326caab2.gif sp0329caab.gif [6] 193 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0336caab.gif sp0339caab2.gif sp0341caab.gif sp0343caab2.gif sp0346caab.gif sp0350caab.gif sp0352caab.gif sp0353caab.gif sp0359caab.gif sp0364caab.gif sp0372caab.gif sp0374caab2.gif sp0377caab2.gif sp0383caab.gif sp0386caab2.gif [7] 194 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0387caab.gif sp0390caab.gif sp0393caab2.gif sp0406ccab.gif sp0412caab.gif sp0414caab2.gif sp0415caab2.gif sp0416caab.gif sp0417caab.gif sp0418caab.gif sp0419caab.gif sp0426caab.gif sp0427caab.gif sp0430caab2.gif sp0431caab.gif [8] 195 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0432caab2.gif sp0433caab.gif sp0434caab.gif sp0437caab.gif sp0440caab2.gif sp0441caab.gif sp0443caab.gif sp0444caab.gif sp0445caab2.gif sp0447caab.gif sp0449caab2.gif sp0453caab.gif sp0454caab.gif sp0456caab.gif sp0459caab2.gif [9] 196 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0462caab.gif sp0463caab.gif sp0465caab.gif sp0467caab.gif sp0468caab.gif sp0471caab2.gif sp0476caab.gif sp0478caab.gif sp0479caab2.gif sp0480caab2.gif sp0482caab.gif sp0484caab2.gif sp0493caab.gif sp0494caab.gif sp0496caab.gif [ 10 ] 197 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0500caab.gif sp0501caab.gif sp0503caab2.gif sp0508caab.gif sp0509caab2.gif sp0514caab.gif sp0519caab2.gif sp0520caab.gif sp0521caab.gif sp0522caab.gif sp0524caab.gif sp0526caab2.gif sp0537caab.gif sp0543caab.gif sp0545caab2.gif [ 11 ] 198 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0546caab2.gif sp0547caab.gif sp0549caab.gif sp0551caab.gif sp0552caab.gif sp0554caab.gif sp0559caab.gif sp056caab.gif sp0579caab.gif sp0580caab2.gif sp0582caab2.gif sp0586caab2.gif sp0589caab.gif sp0590caab2.gif sp0591caab2.gif [ 12 ] 199 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0602caab.gif sp0603caab.gif sp0604caab2.gif sp0606caab.gif sp0610caab2.gif sp0611caab.gif sp0612caab.gif sp0613caab.gif sp0620caab.gif sp0630caab2.gif sp0643caab.gif sp0646caab.gif sp0647caab.gif sp0650caab2.gif sp0653caab2.gif [ 13 ] 200 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0654caab.gif sp0655caab.gif sp0656caab.gif sp0657caab.gif sp0659caab.gif sp0660caab2.gif sp0661caab.gif sp0662caab2.gif sp0664caab.gif sp0665caab.gif sp0666caab2.gif sp0668caab.gif sp0670caab.gif sp0671caab.gif sp0703caab.gif [ 14 ] 201 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0705caab.gif sp0706caab.gif sp0707caab.gif sp0709caab2.gif sp0712caab.gif sp0714caab.gif sp0725caab.gif sp0728caab2.gif sp0730caab.gif sp0739caab2.gif sp0741caab.gif sp0747caab2.gif sp0754caab.gif sp0761caab.gif sp0766caab.gif [ 15 ] 202 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0770caab.gif sp0774caab.gif sp0775caab2.gif sp0779caab2.gif sp0780caab.gif sp0781caab.gif sp0782caab.gif sp0783caab.gif sp0784caab.gif sp0785caab.gif sp0788caab2.gif sp0794caab2.gif sp0796caab2.gif sp0798caab.gif sp0807caab.gif [ 16 ] 203 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0810caab.gif sp0812caab.gif sp0814caab2.gif sp0816caab.gif sp0821caab.gif sp0826caab.gif sp0827caab2.gif sp0830caab2.gif sp0833cab.gif sp0838caab.gif sp0844caab2.gif sp0850caab.gif sp0854caab.gif sp0859caab.gif sp0862caab2.gif [ 17 ] 204 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0863caab.gif sp0868caab.gif sp086caab2.gif sp0880caab.gif sp0885caab.gif sp0894caab.gif sp0895caab.gif sp0897caab.gif sp0901caab.gif sp0902caab.gif sp0903caab.gif sp0905caab.gif sp0910caab.gif sp0913caab2.gif sp0915caab.gif [ 18 ] 205 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0916caab.gif sp0919caab2.gif sp0921caab2.gif sp0923caab2.gif sp0928caab.gif sp0940caab.gif sp0948caab.gif sp0950caab.gif sp0972caab.gif sp0977caab.gif sp0980caab2.gif sp0981caab.gif sp0988caab.gif sp0989caab2.gif sp0993caab2.gif [ 19 ] 206 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp0996caab.gif sp0997caab2.gif sp099caab.gif sp1001caab2.gif sp1004caab2.gif sp1005caab.gif sp1012caab.gif sp1014caab.gif sp1015caab.gif sp1016caab.gif sp1021caab2.gif sp1023caab.gif sp1031caab.gif sp1040caab.gif sp1043caab2.gif [ 20 ] 207 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1049caab2.gif sp1051caab2.gif sp1054caab.gif sp1055caab.gif sp1056caab2.gif sp1061caab2.gif sp1064caab.gif sp1065caab.gif sp1066caab2.gif sp1075caab2.gif sp1077caab.gif sp1080caab2.gif sp1081caab2.gif sp1082caab2.gif sp1084caab.gif [ 21 ] 208 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1088caab2.gif sp1089caab.gif sp1094caab.gif sp1100caab.gif sp1106caab2.gif sp1115caab2.gif sp1116caab2.gif sp1121caab2.gif sp1122caab2.gif sp112caab.gif sp1134caab2.gif sp1155caab.gif sp1169caab.gif sp1175caab2.gif sp1176caab.gif [ 22 ] 209 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1178caab.gif sp1181caab.gif sp1183caab.gif sp1187caab2.gif sp1189caab.gif sp1191caab2.gif sp1194caab2.gif sp1195caab2.gif sp1198caab.gif sp1205caab.gif sp1211caab.gif sp1220caab2.gif sp1227caab2.gif sp1228caab2.gif sp1239caab.gif [ 23 ] 210 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1242caab.gif sp1245caab.gif sp1246caab.gif sp1255caab2.gif sp1269caab2.gif sp1270caab.gif sp1274caab2.gif sp1279caab2.gif sp1293caab2.gif sp1294caab2.gif sp1299caab2.gif sp1308caab2.gif sp1318caab2.gif sp1328caab.gif sp1333caab.gif [ 24 ] 211 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1341caab.gif sp1342caab.gif sp1343caan.gif sp1344caab.gif sp1358caab.gif sp1362caab.gif sp1363caab.gif sp1366caab.gif sp1368caab.gif sp1373caab.gif sp1374caab.gif sp1376caab2.gif sp1390caab2.gif sp1402caab.gif sp1413caab.gif [ 25 ] 212 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1474caab.gif sp1490caab.gif sp1491caab.gif sp1493caab2.gif sp1514caab2.gif sp1518caab2.gif sp1519caab.gif sp1524caab.gif sp1525caab.gif sp1541caab.gif sp1547caab.gif sp1554caab.gif sp1559caab.gif sp1571caab.gif sp1607caab.gif [ 26 ] 213 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1610caab.gif sp1620caab.gif sp1629caab2.gif sp1630caab.gif sp1631caab.gif sp1632caab.gif sp1638caab.gif sp1641caab.gif sp1650caab2.gif sp1685caab.gif sp1695caab.gif sp1696caab.gif sp1697caab.gif sp1698caab.gif sp1699caab.gif [ 27 ] 214 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1700caab2.gif sp1703caab.gif sp1728caab.gif sp1738caab.gif sp1754caab2.gif sp1755caab2.gif sp1765caab.gif sp1772caab.gif sp1785caab.gif sp1795caab.gif sp1830caab.gif sp1833caab.gif sp1839caab.gif sp1845caab.gif sp1853caab2.gif [ 28 ] 215 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1855caab.gif sp1856caab.gif sp1870caab.gif sp1875caab.gif sp1876caab.gif sp1877caab.gif sp1878caab.gif sp1882caab2.gif sp1889caab.gif sp1890caab.gif sp1921caab.gif sp1943caab.gif sp1944caab2.gif sp1954caab.gif sp1957caab.gif [ 29 ] 216 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp1958caab.gif sp1960caab.gif sp1980caab.gif sp1983caab2.gif sp1984caab.gif sp1991caab.gif sp1993caab2.gif sp2001caab.gif sp2022caab.gif sp2027caab2.gif sp2088caab.gif sp2114caab2.gif sp2170caab.gif sp2176caab.gif sp2177caab.gif [ 30 ] 217 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp2178caab.gif sp2189caab2.gif sp2195caab.gif sp2264caab.gif sp2265caab.gif sp2267caab2.gif sp2282caab.gif sp2322caab.gif sp2349caab1.gif sp2386caab2.gif sp2480caab.gif sp2489caab.gif sp2530caab.gif sp2583caab.gif sp2606caab.gif [ 31 ] 218 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp2613caab2.gif sp2627caab.gif sp2635caab.gif sp2636caab.gif sp2655caab.gif sp2688caab2.gif sp2692caab.gif sp2701caab.gif sp2711caab2.gif sp2714caab.gif sp2789caab.gif sp2791caab2.gif sp2800caab.gif sp2803caab.gif sp2806caab.gif [ 32 ] 219 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp2819caab.gif sp2822caab.gif sp2823caab.gif sp2825caab.gif sp2844caab.gif sp2846caab.gif sp2856caab.gif sp2878caab.gif sp2897caab.gif sp2938caab.gif sp2950caab2.gif sp2953caab.gif sp2959caab.gif sp2980caab.gif sp3003caab.gif [ 33 ] 220 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp3004caab.gif sp3005caab.gif sp3052caab.gif sp3054caab.gif sp3088caab.gif sp3089caab.gif sp3092caab.gif sp3102caab.gif sp3108caab.gif sp3189caab.gif sp3197caab.gif sp3249caab.gif sp3256caab.gif sp3256caab1.gif sp3287caab.gif [ 34 ] 221 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp3333caab.gif sp3446caab.gif sp3461caab.gif sp3463caab.gif sp3482caab.gif sp3488caab.gif sp3490caab.gif sp3493caab.gif sp3496caab.gif sp3554caab.gif sp3578caab.gif sp3587caab.gif sp3589caab.gif sp3611caab.gif sp3612caab.gif [ 35 ] 222 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp3613caab.gif sp3614caab.gif sp3616caab.gif sp3617caab.gif sp3643caab.gif sp3644caab.gif sp3678caab.gif sp3689caab.gif sp3747caab.gif sp3763caab.gif sp3767caab.gif sp3816caab.gif sp3817caqb2.gif sp3818caab.gif sp3832caab.gif [ 36 ] 223 QM Technical Reports | 002 CAAB distributions: surrogate species sp3833caab.gif sp3834caab.gif sp3835caab.gif sp3837caab.gif sp3838caab.gif sp3840caab.gif sp3843caab.gif sp3844caab.gif [ 37 ] 224 Report for the National Oceans Office C2004/020 Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia 225

RELATED PAPERS

RELATED TOPICS

Log In

Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia

Collation and validation of museum collection databases related to the distribution of marine sponges in northern Australia

Related Papers

RELATED PAPERS

RELATED TOPICS